advertisement
2 Copyright
Copyright
This documentation is protected by law. All rights, especially the right of duplication, circulation, and translation, are reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced in the form of copies, microfilms or other processes, or transmitted into a language used for machines, especially data processing machines, without the express written consent of the publisher.
All copyrights reserved.
All other product names are trademarks of the corresponding manufacturers.
Errors in and changes to the contents as well as program modifications reserved.
Copyright © MAGIX AG, 2001 - 2011. All rights reserved.
MAGIX is a registered trademark of MAGIX AG.
Created under license from Dolby Laboratories
Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of the Dolby Laboratories.
© 1992 - 2011 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
Other named product names may be registered trademarks of their respective owners.
This product uses MAGIX patented technology (USP 6,518,492) and MAGIX patent pending technology. www.magix.com
Preface
Preface
Congratulations! You have purchased a complete, fully-equipped, yet easy-to-use video studio!
The possibilities are endless - from quick holiday video editing to demanding and detailed advanced film editing. MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX also offers:
Recording and import of all standard video formats
Video and audio content optimization
Possibility of adding fades, titles and effects
Disc menu creation for DVD, Blu-ray Disc and others
Upload videos to the Internet, e.g. to YouTube or Facebook
The printed manual contains the basic functions of both program versions
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX and MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX Plus/Premium.
Additional features of the Plus/Premium version are marked accordingly.
In addition to the printed manual, there is also more detailed documentation which is copied to the program folder on your hard drive during installation.
This electronic PDF manual describes all program functions in detail.
This information will get you started on your way to making your first movie masterpiece. The reference chapter later on and the index can also be used to help quickly when you need it.
Enjoy!
Your MAGIX Team
3 www.magix.com
4 Table of Contents
Table of Contents
What is MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX? 13
What's new in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX?
Additional new features in the Plus/Premium version
Burn DVDs with interactive menus
www.magix.com
Table of Contents
Import a non-copy-protected DVD 93
Insert object into the project 94
Area marker (in and out points)
Source tracks and preview images
Creating titles using a template 118
Creating titles without a template
www.magix.com
5
6 Table of Contents
Video effects in the Media Pool
Movement effects in the Media Pool
Audio effects in the Media Pool
Design elements in the Media Pool
Personalized templates in the Media Pool
Effects masks (Plus/Premium version)
Attach to picture position in the video
Image improvements for the entire movie
Image improvements for individual objects
Adding a sound track using MIDI songs 174
Stereo3D (Plus/Premium version)
Align videos and pictures for 3D
Turn camera movements into 3D videos
www.magix.com
Table of Contents
Hook up TVs, monitors or projectors
Configure channels for analog reception
Channel list for analog programs
Upload to Internet (MAGIX Online Album)
www.magix.com
7
8 Table of Contents
Transport control in the Media Pool
Problems and Remedies regarding the Auto Remix Assistant
Define the path for saving Internet media.
Fee-based activation of MVC codec
Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
www.magix.com
Overview of the different disc types
Table of Contents
Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings
www.magix.com
9
10 Support
Support
Dear MAGIX customer,
Our aim is to provide convenient, fast and solution-focused support at all times. To this end, we offer a wide range of services:
Unlimited web support:
As a registered MAGIX customer, you have unlimited access to web support offered via the convenient MAGIX service portal on http://support.magix.net, including an intelligent help assistant, high-quality FAQs, patches and user reports that are constantly updated.
The only requirement for use is product registration at www.magix.com
The online community - on-the-spot support and a platform for exchange:
MAGIX customers have free and unlimited access to the online community at www.magix.info, which includes approx. 120,000 members and offers the opportunity to ask members questions concerning MAGIX products as well as use the search function to search for specific topics or answers. In addition to questions & answers, the knowledge pool includes a glossary, video tutorials and a discussion forum. The multiple experts, found round-the-clock at www.magix.info guarantee quick answers, which sometimes come within minutes of a question being posted.
Email support for MAGIX products:
For every new MAGIX product you will receive, as of date purchase, 12 months of email based customer service.
Premium email support :
For priority support, or if you want the MAGIX support team to help with non-MAGIX related hardware problems you can purchase a Premium email support ticket. Log in at http://support.magix.net and click on "Purchase access code", the ticket is for a specific problem, and is valid until it is solved, it is not restricted to an email.
Please note: To be able to use the Premium email support and free product email support via the Internet, you have to register your MAGIX product using the serial number provided. This can be found on the CD case of your installation CD or on the inside of the DVD box.
Additional telephone service:
Besides the large number of free customer service offers, we also offer a fee-based telephone customer service.
Here you can find a summary of our technical support telephone numbers: http://support.magix.net/ www.magix.com
Uninstalling the program
Mail (Europe): MAGIX Development Support, P.O. Box 20 09 14, 01194
Dresden, Germany
Mail (North America): MAGIX Customer Service, 1105 Terminal Way #302,
Reno, NV 89502, USA
Please make sure you have the following information at hand:
Program version
Configuration details (operating system, processor, memory, hard drive, etc.), sound card configuration (type, driver)
Information regarding other audio software installed
MAGIX Sales Department
You can reach the MAGIX Sales Department workdays for help with the following questions and problems:
Orders
Product consulting (pre-purchase)
Upgrade requests
Returns
Europe
Monday - Friday, 09:00-16:00 GMT
U.K.: 0203 3189218
Denmark: 699 18149
Sweden: 0852500858
Finland: 09 31581630
Norway: 0210 30665
North America
9 am to 4 pm EST Mon-Fri
Phone: 1-305-722-5810
Uninstalling the program
If you would like to uninstall MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX, you can do so via the control panel under "Software". Or go to "Programs > MAGIX > MAGIX Movie
Edit Pro MX > Service and Support > Uninstall MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX".
11 www.magix.com
12 Serial Number
Serial Number
A serial number is included with each product. This serial number is required for the installation of the software and enables usage of additional bonus services.
What can a serial number do?
A serial number ensures that your copy of MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX is clearly assigned to you and only you, and it makes improved and more targeted customer service possible. Abuse of the software can be prevented with a serial number, since it ensures that the optimum price/performance ratio continues to be offered by MAGIX.
Where can the serial number be found?
The serial number can be found on the reverse side of your CD/DVD case. If your product, for example, is packed in a DVD box, then you'll find the serial number on the inside.
For versions that have been especially optimized for the Internet (download versions), directly following the transaction you'll receive a serial number by email to activate the software.
When will you need the serial number?
The serial number is required when you start or register MAGIX Movie Edit Pro
MX for the first time.
Note: We explicitly recommend registering your product, since only then are you entitled to get program updates and contact MAGIX Support. Entering the
serial number is also required for activating codecs (view page 331).
www.magix.com
Introduction
Introduction
What is MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX?
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX is a complete all-in-one movie studio for your PC.
With MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX you can easily transfer your recordings to your computer and then, once you have improved and enriched them, burn them onto DVD, AVCHD or Blu-ray™ – perfect for theater-quality presentation on
TV, screen, or monitor.
Videos, photos, as well as additional audio and video material can be transferred from various devices to the PC. Long movies can be separated into chapters or scenes automatically. You can also do the opposite and automatically combine individual recordings to make a single movie.
Add music, theater-quality transitions, text and selected effects to your own movies with a mouse-click. The easy-to-use interface, advanced technology and handy wizards guarantee perfect results at lightning speed!
Once your video is finished, you can use it in different ways: transfer it back onto the tape or to your camcorder. You can burn it to disc and watch it, for example, on TV. Or, you can upload your video to Internet platforms such as
YouTube, Facebook or your own personal MAGIX Online Album.
What's new in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX?
Noticeably faster performance: When loading projects, starting the program, and in many other aspects. Thanks to the optimized MAGIX Hybrid Video
Engine, the output speed for AVCHD for OpenCL and CUDA graphics cards is noticeably faster compared to the previous versions. This is extremely
advantageous both during burning (view page 255) as well as exporting (view
Dynamic slow motion effects: When strong slow motion effects are applied, playback may become uneven due to dropped intermediate frames; these will now be calculated and inserted automatically.
Enlargeable preview images: Resize the preview images in the Media Pool any way you please.
Project browser: Browse existing projects to load any of their elements into your current project.
Export assistant: The new export assistant makes export to SD cards easier. www.magix.com
13
14 Introduction
New menu templates: The new menu templates for DVD and Blu-ray discs provide just the right background.
Media X-change function : The "MX" in the title refers to the new media exchange function. In the "Share" menu you will find different options which make the current project's media files available for other applications.
Additional new features in the Plus/Premium version
Completely re-worked travel route animation: Visually display along which route you have traveled using map material from the whole world. Internet connection is required
Professional movie templates: Create movie trailers ready for the big-screen using included templates.
Accelerated effects preview: With the new segment rendering, complicated effects can be completely pre-calculated for smooth playback even on slower computers.
Transitions with sound: Make automatic transitions between clips with matching sound effects. www.magix.com
Introduction
Features
Recording
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX provides the following recording functions:
AVCHD camera
HDV camera: HDV1 and HDV2 camcorders
DV camera: Mini DV camcorders or DV video cameras
Video: Analog TV, video input, VHS recorders, webcams
Audio: Microphone, cassette recorders, minidisc players, record players
Screen (Plus/Premium version only): PC monitor
Single frame : Single and series images from webcams, video recorders, video cameras, or TV cards
Analog capture requires capture cards compatible with DirectShow. DV recording take place via FireWire. A TV card can be used to record programs from TV or from your video recorder.
Import/Export formats
Supported import formats:
Video: AVI, DV-AVI, MPEG-1, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, MTS, M2TS, MXV, MKV,
MJPEG, QuickTimeTM, WMV(HD), VOB, MKV
Audio: WAV, MP3, OGG, WMA, MIDI, Dolby ® Digital Stereo/5.1 (Classic version: downmix to stereo)
Photo : JPEG, BMP, GIF, TIF, TGA (supports scanners and digital photo cameras)
Supported export formats:
Video: AVI, DV-AVI, MPEG-1, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, MXV, MJPEG, Quicktime,
WMV(HD)
Audio: WAV, MP3, Dolby ® Digital Stereo/5.1 (Plus/Premium version only)
Photo: JPEG, BMP
Note: For copy protection reasons, MPEG-4, MPEG-2, and Dolby ® Digital must first be activated. Initial activation is free of charge. MP3 export requires www.magix.com
15
16 Introduction installation of Windows Media Player version 10 or higher. Online Services offered inside the program as well as the Online Update require an Internet connection.
Editing
Picture optimization: Color improvement (RGB,saturation), sharpness (focus and feathering), brightness regulator (brightness, contrast), anti-flicker filter.
Sound optimization: The equalizer allows you to manipulate the frequency spectrum – perfect for cleaning-up muffled dialog. The compressor is a dynamic volume regulator. The StereoFX processor controls the position of the sound within the stereo panorama. The denoiser and dehisser are professional noise reduction tools for removing noise and hisses.
Video effects: For example, creative filters, distortion, video mix (Chromakey), movement effects (e.g. camera/zoom or rotation), cropping, picture-in-picture collages, video effect plug-in support.
Automatic scene detection
Slideshow Maker turns drab photo collages into spectacular multimedia shows.
MAGIX Soundtrack Maker offers a huge selection of fitting sounds for your background music.
Burnable disc formats
DVD
WMVHD (high-resolution CD/DVD in WMV format, playable on PC)
Blu-ray Disc
AVCHD disc (on DVD and Blu-ray Discs)
MultiDisc (DVD + WMV HD)
Mini-DVD (DVD on blank CD)
Project backups, backup copies, and 1:1 copies of DVDs
Multimedia editable DVD menus
Many templates for DVD menus that are later used on TV to aid in film and chapter selection are included with the program, some also in 16:9 widescreen format. These may simply be applied during burning to provide a professional appearance to the DVD.
Every menu template may be customized with personal photos, thematic animations, 3D titles, sound, intro videos, etc. www.magix.com
Also in the Plus/Premium version
Professional video editing
99 tracks, editing & effects automation
Live preview, MultiCam editing
Introduction
Unique effects creation
Chroma keying with alpha channel
Movie templates, fades with sound, title editor
Perfect audio dubbing
Create Dolby ® Digital 5.1 Sound yourself, restore audio tracks
Audio Mastering Suite, Soundtrack Maker
DVD / Blu-ray design
Professional menu design, ISO output
Full stereo3D support
Full support for stereoscopic footage
Full import functions for many 3D camera models
Editing of own 3D recordings made, for example, with two cameras
Real 3D fades and titles for 3D video projects
Preview and output to all standard 3D display devices
Output in all formats (DVD, Blu-ray, file, YouTube, etc.)
17 www.magix.com
18 Quick Start
Quick Start
This chapter explains the basic functions of MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX with a step-by-step introduction. A systematic description of the program functions can be found in the chapters and in the extensive PDF manual.
Tip: Take advantage of the introductory video and tutorials, which can be opened with the help of the Task Assistant.
Program start
Once you have installed MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX, start the program from the
Windows start menu. The following dialog opens:
Here you can decide if you want to "Load an existing project" for further editing and burning to disc or if you want to "Create a new project". Under "Options" you can "Create a new project folder". This means that all the files for that film will be saved to that folder.
Additionally, you can also use movie templates (view page 197). Movie
templates contain complete stories with finished content and many placeholders for your photos and videos, constituting the base for your story. www.magix.com
Quick Start
Import video
In the following we assume that you want to import an AVCHD recording into the program.
If you don't have such a recording at hand now, you can load material form the hard disk in order to try out the MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX workflow. Here the included demo project is recommended.
In the Media Pool, click the button "My Media >
Projects".
Next, open the "_Demo" folder by double- clicking and then load the MVP movie files.
( „_Demo.MVP“) by double-clicking.
19
Insert AVCHD material
Connect your AVCHD storage devices (camera, USB stick, SD card and others) to your PC. You may have to first turn your camera on.
To open the recording dialog, click on the red "Record" button below the preview monitor. www.magix.com
20 Quick Start
Select "AVCHD" from the recording dialog.
The AVCHD import assistant will then open. Select your connected storage devices as "Video source". A file list will appear. www.magix.com
Quick Start
In the file list, select all the recordings that you've imported from the device.
You can preview all your recordings using the preview monitor in the middle of the dialog in order to decide if they are suitable for your movie.
After selecting all videos, in "Import options" you can select whether the recordings should be directly placed into your movie project or simply copied to your computer's hard drive (you can select the location in the next dialog).
You can also automatically delete your recordings after import.
21
Play movie
To play the recording ( or the demo project), click on the play button on the transport control below the preview monitor.
Tip : An even easier way to control playback is by pressing the space bar on your keyboard.
During playback, a vertical line will move across the arranger, i.e. the playback marker that displays the current position. You can reposition it by clicking at different locations as desired.
Media Pool
www.magix.com
22 Quick Start
The Media Pool can be used to access and load media files of all kinds: videos, photos, MP3 files, audio CD tracks, RTF text files, fades, effects and
Internet media, etc.
There is a preview function for all of the files in the Media Pool. To see them you will need to stop playback of the demo film first (press the spacebar or use the transport control below the preview monitor).
Now you can look for useable media throughout your computer's directories.
Use the navigation buttons at the top left to access any drive or folder on your
PC. Try clicking on an entry in the Media Pool. Video and image files will be displayed in the video monitor immediately, and audio files will be played by the sound card. There are previews for the templates and effects included to make it clear how they will function.
All media types are loaded into a movie from local drives or directly from the
Internet via double-click or drag & drop. Just try it out!
Display modes
The three switches on the toolbar in the center activate the "Timeline",
"Storyboard", and "Scene overview" modes (there are 4 switches and 4 modes available in the Plus/Premium version).
Storyboard mode (first button) is the preset view. This view offers an easy, streamlined interface to simplify the editing process. All scenes from your film are listed sequentially in the "Storyboard" mode. Every scene is displayed with a preview picture in the storyboard.
The scene overview (second button) provides a scaleable overview of the scenes. You can use this to comfortably view, sort, and delete unnecessary scenes.
In the Timeline mode (third button) your films are displayed as "Objects" in the
"Timeline". This means: The longer the object, the longer the corresponding film. www.magix.com
Quick Start
Especially practical: you can display all modes in full screen using the button at the top right.
Multicam mode is found under the fourth button in the Plus/Premium version of MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX. Multi-cam editing enables easy cutting of various recordings of the same scene from different camera perspectives.
Storyboard mode
23
"Storyboard" mode represents all scenes in linear sequence on the storyboard.
Each scene offers the following editing options:
Add title and text: Titles and text can be added to any film. Click on the "T" button, enter your text directly in the program monitor and select from different animations (try movement from bottom to top for a classic end credits effect).
Set volume: The volume in each scene can be set via the loudspeaker button.
Effects menu: This switch accesses a menu with different editing functions like scene recognition, image stabilization, or the trimmer dialogs. The hissing on the track can be minimized by selecting
"Audio cleaning".
Transitions/Fades: Click on the large button between the scenes and select a scene transition (or "Fade").
Rotate image (only with image files): If an image or photo is on its side or upside down, click on this button. The photo will rotate 90 degrees. www.magix.com
24 Quick Start
Timeline mode
All advanced editing functions should be undertaken in "Timeline" mode. Your movies and scenes are shown here: The longer the object in the track, the longer the corresponding movie.
Playback range : Clicking in the range bar above the first track lets you define start markers, i.e. the starting point of the playback range. If you right click further on, the end marker will appear to indicate the end point of the playback range. The length of the playback area is shown in the center of the section display.
When the end marker has been reached, the playback cursor jumps back to the start marker and begins playing everything again as a loop.
The entire playback range can be moved using the mouse by clicking on the bar in the middle and dragging it. The in and out points can be moved with the mouse. Left clicking positions the in point, and the right mouse button sets the out point. The playback range above the first track is linked to the playback range of the preview monitor. Both can only be changed simultaneously
To move the start and end markers to the beginning and the end of the film again, click "Optimize movie view" in the "Window" menu. www.magix.com
Quick Start
Handles : All objects can be shortened by moving the mouse to one of the lower corners of the object until it turns into a stretch symbol. Move the mouse over one of the lower corners of the object until the mouse pointer becomes a stretch symbol. At the top corners of every object, you’ll find two fade handles that can be adjusted to fade an object in or out. The handle at the top center can be used to adjust the volume of audio objects and the brightness of video objects.
25
Object selection : For advanced effects editing, the objects must be selected first. Each object can be selected by clicking it. Objects will change color to show that they have been selected. Multiple objects can be selected by holding down "Shift". You can also click and drag out a rectangle to select multiple objects. All objects included in the rectangle will be selected.
Removing unusable scenes
One of the most important steps during import of your footage is cutting out unusable scenes from the material. There are two options in this case:
Option 1 : First, the complete material is loaded into your project and the unusable scenes are cut out.
Option 2 : You can cut the material already in the Media Pool, i.e. BEFORE you import it, and then proceed to import only the scenes you need. This process is recommended for long movies with a lot of editing.
Cut videos in the project
Let's assume that you have already imported your film material into a project and would now like to edit it.
Play your video by clicking on the up arrow on your keyboard.
Pause playback at the position where the scene is located by pressing the downward arrow. The playback marker stays near the start of the scene to be removed.
Note: You can also use the space bar or the play button on the transport bar to start and stop playback. However, in order to move the playback marker to the position where you stop the playback, you must first go to program www.magix.com
26 Quick Start settings (File > Settings > Program) in the "Playback" tab under "Space bar behavior" and select the "Space bar stops at current playback position" function.
Tip: In case of long films or to speed up search, you can also fast forward the video following the action on the preview monitor. To do so, pull the playback marker across the timeline (but not too fast!) while holding down the mouse key.
Set the playback marker exactly at the start of the unusable material. The zoom function is recommended to get a better view of longer videos (the +/- buttons in the bottom right corner).
Press "T" on the keyboard. This will split the current scene into two sections at the position of the playback marker.
Repeat these steps for the end of the unusable scene. Find the end of the unusable scene, place the play marker as close as p ossible to the end point, and then press the "T" key on the keyboard again. www.magix.com
Quick Start
Now you have "isolated" the unusable scene and may delete it from the movie using the "Del" key on the keyboard. Before this, the scene must be selected by clicking it with the mouse.
27
If you didn't work accurately during cutting, then don't worry; you can use the lower object handles to stretch or shorten the remaining objects to recover or exclude material from the deleted section.
After deletion a gap will appear in the film sequence at the position of the removed material. How do you remove gaps out of the film? Easy: Pull the later scenes up to the earlier scenes until they "dock" with each other.
Remember to "take" all objects that are further behind, otherwise the gap will just be "passed" to the end. To pull up later objects, use the "All tracks" mouse mode, since this automatically takes all the objects found later on the timeline along with the object being pulled. www.magix.com
28 Quick Start
Note: If your project has a sound track next to the image track, it is usually necessary to cut audio and video tracks in synchronization. After import from the camera, video and sound tracks are automatically grouped, which is why all cutting and moving actions have an effect on video and sound tracks simultaneously. However, if you have added a separate soundtrack which has not yet been grouped with the image sequence, then you should group them before starting to edit.
To do so, select the video object and the audio object via "Ctrl" + click, and in the "Edit" menu select the "Group" option (or click the group tool).
Go ahead and experiment with the editing functions in all processes (and all other editing operations in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX), the original material on your hard disk is not changed.
Import individual scenes from longer movies
If you have saved a longer video as a file on your hard disk and only want to use a section of it for your project, then proceed as follows:
Select the file from the Media Pool.
Switch the transport control to "Media Pool" via the button on the left.
Now you can playback the selected file in the Media Pool using the transport control. Find the range which you would like to import. Position the playback marker above the transport control at the start position of the range and click the "Set in-point" button. www.magix.com
Quick Start
Next, position the playback marker at the end of the section and click the "Set out-point" button.
29
The currently selected range appears highlighted in blue in the range display.
You can play back this range with the "Play back range" button separately.
All range limits can be moved by holding down the mouse button and dragging. Once the range matches the section that you want to import, click on the preview monitor and drag the section onto the track. An object will appear there featuring the material you wanted to import.
Regroup scenes
It will often be the case that you will want to move whole scenes or even groups of scenes to a different place within a film. This happens completely intuitively: Single scenes can be selected in any view ("Timeline", "Storyboard" or "Overview" modes) using just a mouse-click, and then moved to the desired spot with the mouse button held down. In the "Timeline" and "Overview" modes you can also create scene groups which can be moved together: "Ctrl
+ mouse-click" lets you select more than one scene, "Shift + mouse-click" selects the scenes that lie in between.
Three final tips for advanced video arranging:
Using "Intelligent mouse" mode, which is available in the "Timeline" mode, you can move not just the selected scene, but also all elements directly bordering it (e.g. transitions, fades, and scenes following the selected scene and those on neighboring tracks).
The commands "Group (view page 285)" and "Ungroup (view page 286)" let
you join any scene into groups which can then be moved together as a block.
If editing and moving scenes left your project looking like a junkyard, then you can also work in the opposite direction by selecting the scenes you want to www.magix.com
30 Quick Start use and saving them to the Media Pool directory. Collect scenes that you want to use, place them into the "Takes" folder, start a new project, take scenes from that folder, then place them in the second project in the order you want them. The "Takes" folder can be accessed in the Media Pool via the
"Import -> My Media" button.
Burn DVDs with interactive menus
Once you are satisfied with your video, move to the "Burn CD" screen to burn it with an interactive DVD menu onto a disc.
If you simply want to burn a DVD the quickest way possible, then click the button to burn a
DVD. www.magix.com
Quick Start
For multiple films that are subdivided into individual scenes or chapters, the
DVD selection menu becomes even more important. This is because you require manageable navigation to be able to jump between each film and each scene.
31
The "Burn" screen has two views: "preview" an "Edit". Use the buttons located in the upper left to switch between them
In both views, you will see a preview of the DVD menu. All movies appear as uppermost entries, and all scenes appear as sub-entries.
You can use the remote control to the right to test the function of the menus just like in a real DVD player.
In the "Edit" view you can access the structure of the selection menu in
"Navigation". You can delete unnecessary scenes by clicking the corresponding box. The entry will be removed from the menu, but the scene will not be removed from the movie.
To make sensible chapter divisions in your movies, each movie must feature corresponding chapter markers in the "Edit" window. If you want to change the current scene splits, it is best to switch back to the "Edit" screen and then choose the movie which you would like to split. Place the Start marker where you'd like to have it and choose the option "Chapter marker" from the Edit www.magix.com
32 Quick Start menu (keyboard shortcut: Shift + Enter). If you select the option "Automatic
Chapter markers", a Chapter marker is automatically placed at the beginning of every scene. Superfluous chapter markers may simply be clicked and deleted.
If you are satisfied with the subdivision of the movies and chapters, you can devote yourself to the layout of the selection menu.
At the bottom of the screen, you'll see an array of preset menu templates. Use the scroll bar to view each template. There are plenty to choose from:
If you wish to fully apply a template, first click on "Layout" in the template bar and double-click on the template of your choice. The complete template will then be applied.
In the "Edit" view you can also combine various elements of individual templates with one another. For example, if you want to combine the text format of a template with the background of another one, then select "Font" first and double click the template with the text of your choice. Then select
"Order" and double click the order you like. The preview in the middle shows you the results immediately.
Double click the preview picture or a menu entry to change the film or chapter name and select a different preview picture.
When all videos and chapters (scenes) are logically arranged and you are satisfied with the selection menu, you can go ahead and burn. www.magix.com
Workspaces
"Edit" screen
Workspaces 33
1 Upper button bar: Buttons for quick access to important commands.
2 Menu bar: Most functions in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX can be accessed via the menu bar.
3 Program monitor: Video and image objects are displayed and files from the Media Pool can be previewed here.
4 Templates: Here you can find the folders for transitions, titles, effects and pans. For a preview, simply click on the template. Catooh connects you directly to the Internet to open the Online Media Market Catooh.
5 Media Pool : Load your photos and other media files via the Media Pool.
Use the navigation buttons to access any drive or folder on your PC.
6 Modes:
Storyboard mode displays all scenes in the current video in a panel so that they can be easily manipulated and arranged.
Timeline mode is for more involved arrangement and effects work.
Overview mode displays all of the objects on the first track and enables quick sorting of scenes. www.magix.com
34 Workspaces
The right button activates MultiCam mode in the Plus/Premium version.
7 Lower toolbar : Select the "Timeline" or various different mouse modes for diverse editing functions.
8 Timeline with range markers: Defines the range that will be played. It is equipped with a time scale.
9 Arranger : Drag & drop files from the Media Pool, then arrange and edit files in detail here.
10 Scroll bars: The lower scroll bars can be dragged apart and pushed together for zooming with the mouse. The right scroll bar vertically zooms into the tracks. The right scroll bar zooms into the tracks vertically. Click on the edge of the scroll bars while holding the mouse button to change the visible part in the arrangement window.
The "Burn" screen
1 Menu preview: Here you can see a selection menu preview. Read more
in the "Menu" (view page 265) chapter.
2 Change view: Here you can swap between the preview and edit view.
3 Remote control : Check how your disc will react later when you press a button on your player's remote control.
4 Output: Before burning the project, select the desired format (view page
www.magix.com
Workspaces
5 Play preview: Play the preview menu and test how it works with the remote control.
6 Template category: Select the desired section from various categories with different menus.
7 Menu templates : Switch between different templates for designing your menus.
8 Apply templates: Choose whether you want to use a template for the page, the menu or all menus on the disc.
You will find more information in the "Burning" (view page 241) section.
Toolbars
Upper button bar
The upper button bar can be found in the monitor to the top left. It has the following functions:
New project
Creates a new MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX project. A dialog with settings
for a new disc project or a new film (view page 55) opens to get started.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + N
Load project
With this option you can load a project or a media file. Please note that all media files associated with it must be loaded along with a project.
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX will search for all used sounds and video files in the folders in which they were located when the move was saved.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + O
Save project
The current movie is saved with the name displayed in the project window. If you have not yet specified a name for your project, a dialog will open wherein MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX asks you to do so.
Please note : In the project file (*.MVP), all information about the used media files, cuts, effects, and titles are saved, but not the picture and sound material www.magix.com
35
36 Workspaces itself. This is found in the recorded or imported media files that remain unchanged during the entire MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX editing process. To save the full movie into a dedicated directory, for instance to continue editing on a different PC, please use the command "Copy movie and media into directory".
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + S
Program settings
Opens the program settings (view page 60).
Keyboard shortcut: Y
Context help
The mouse cursor will turn into an arrow with a question mark.
Click on any button of the main screen, to open program help which will describe the control element in question.
Shortcut: Alt + F1
MAGIX News Center
The MAGIX News Center features links to current online tutorials and tips & tricks on the software application examples. The "News" is indicated by color according to content:
Green indicates practical tips & tricks for the software
Yellow reports the availability of new patches and updates
Red for special offers, contests and questionnaires
If no new messages are present, the button will appear gray. When the MAGIX
News Center is clicked, all of the available information will be displayed. Click the messages to reach the corresponding website. www.magix.com
Lower toolbar
Workspaces
The following buttons are available:
Select a movie to edit
Using the dropdown menu, you can control various movies within a project.
Undo
With this command you can undo the last changes you made. This way, it's no problem if you want to try out critical operations. If you don't like the result, then you can always revert to the previous state by using "Undo".
Clicking on the arrow next to the button opens a list of changes made until now, allowing you to undo several changes made in sequence.
Note: You can adjust the length of the list to your needs in program settings
(view page 60). In general: The longer the list, the more RAM is used.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Z
Redo
This function undoes the previous "Undo" function.
Clicking on the arrow next to the button opens a list of changes made until now, allowing you to undo several changes made in sequence.
Note: You can adjust the length of the list to your needs in program settings
(view page 60). In general: The longer the list, the more RAM is used.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + Y
37 www.magix.com
38 Workspaces
Delete objects
This function deletes the selected scene (or the selected object in the
Timeline mode).
Keyboard shortcut: Del
Title editor
Opens the Title editor for the selected photo, video, or title object.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + T
Cut button
You can split objects with the cut button, you can remove the object start or object end or divide the film up. Select the object you want to edit and place the playback marker at the desired position. Clicking on the cut button cuts the object in two. You can reach extra options using the drop-down menu.
Split
This command cuts a scene at the point where the playback marker is positioned. This way, two free-standing objects are created.
Keyboard shortcut: T
Remove start
This command cuts a scene at the point where the playback marker is positioned and removes the material before the playback marker.
Keyboard shortcut: Z
Remove scene end
This command cuts a selected object at the playback marker position and removes the material behind the playback marker.
Shortcut: U
Hint: If the commands "Split" and "Remove beginning/end" are applied without a selection, all objects at the position of the playback marker are cut. www.magix.com
Workspaces
Remove scene
This command allows you to completely remove selected objects. The parts that follow will be automatically moved to the end of the object in front of the object to be removed.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Del
Split movie
This command divides the movie into two individual movies at the position of the playback marker. The current arranger retains the portion that is located in front of the playback marker.
The remaining part will be erased from the current arranger and turned into a new movie, which can be found in the "Window" menu.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Y
Special functions to insert new objects
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX offers various possibilities how an object selected in the Media Pool will be pasted into the project.
Apply automatically
Pastes the file selected in the Media Pool into the arranger. Video and image objects will always be placed behind the last object into the first track; audio and text objects are separated into different tracks.
Single-track ripple
Inserts an object from the Media Pool at the position of the playback marker and simultaneously moves the objects on the track following it.
The single-track ripple behaves similarly to the intelligent ripple, the difference is that only the objects on the target track are moved. Bordering tracks are unchanged.
In contrast to automatic insertion, all objects will be inserted at the position of the playback marker.
Videos and images are placed on the first track. If another object is found at the playback marker position, then it will be cut continued at the end of the inserted object (so that the inserted object can start exactly at the point of insertion).
Objects lying further along the track will be moved further down. www.magix.com
39
40 Workspaces
Multitrack ripple
The object selected in the Media Pool will be inserted on the target track at the position of the playback marker. All objects found at the playback marker position will be split and moved down the length of the inserted object. All objects on the track located further on will also be moved.
The multitrack ripple behaves similarly to the intelligent ripple, but the difference is that all objects on all tracks following the playback marker's position will be moved.
In contrast to automatic insertion, all objects will be inserted at the position of the playback marker.
Videos and images are placed on the first track. If another object is found at the playback marker position, then it will be cut continued at the end of the inserted object (so that the inserted object can start exactly at the point of insertion).
If other objects are located at the playback marker position, these will also be separated and moved further along the track.
Objects lying further along on all tracks will be moved further down.
Replace
Replaces the selected object with an object selected in the Media Pool.
Overwrite
Overwrites the object in the target track at the position of the start marker with the object selected in the Media Pool.
Hint: In contrast to "Replace", no length adjustment takes place. With
"Replace", any downstream objects are moved, while "Overwrite" overwrites downstream objects as well (sometimes only partially), depending on the length of the object being inserted in comparison to the object being overwritten.
Preview rendering
You can access the preview rendering options by pressing this button. www.magix.com
Mute button
This button mutes the sound output.
Workspaces
Mixer
With this option you can open and close the real-time mixer. Further
information can be found in the Mixer (view page 176) chapter.
Shortcut: M
Additional functions in Timeline mode
The following buttons are available only in the Timeline Mode:
Set chapter marker
Places a chapter marker at the position of the playback marker. This creates a chapter entry in the disc menu in case the movie is being burned to disc.
You can rename the chapter markers by right clicking and selecting "Rename".
The new name will appear in the chapter menu (view page 242).
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + Enter
Object grid
Use this button to switch the object grid (view page 106) on and off.
When the object grid is switched on, the objects snap into place beside one another so that everything fits in seamlessly.
Form group
Orders all selected objects into groups. As soon as an object from the group is selected, all other objects in the group will be highlighted as well so that you can work on them collectively.
Keyboard shortcut: G
Ungroup objects
This turns all selected objects into free-standing objects again.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + G
41 www.magix.com
42 Workspaces
Mouse modes
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX offers special mouse modes for different kinds of editing. These may be selected using the small arrow next to the button.
Move everything
This mouse mode in principal behaves like the "Single object mouse mode". All objects that have the same or a later starting point will be moved.
This is useful if something should be inserted in the middle of an arrangement, but there is not enough space, meaning that all contents have to be moved down.
Shortcut: 7
Move everything on the track
Basically, this mouse mode behaves like the mouse mode for individual objects, but moving one object will also move all other objects located behind it on the same track.
This is practical if space is needed at the start of a track, since all objects can be moved together without moving them underneath each other.
Shortcut: 8
Mouse mode for individual objects
This is the preset mouse mode where most work is performed.
Select objects by left-clicking them. You can move an object by holding down the mouse over it while dragging it to the desired position.
Keyboard shortcut: 6
Curve mouse mode
This mouse mode is used especially for drawing effects curves.
The effects curve controls the intensity of the effect: The more higher the curve point, the more intense the respective effects parameter at this location. The www.magix.com
Workspaces curves can be used for video and image objects on the image tracks and also for audio objects on the audio tracks.
More information about this can be found in the chapter "Animate objects", section "Editing object effects curves".
Keyboard shortcut: 9
Stretch mouse mode
This special mode is for customizing the length of objects.
With timestretching, audio objects can be expanded or compressed using the handles at the bottom. The duration of the audio material is therefore lengthened without changing the pitch. Playback of the video objects is accelerated/decelerated with the help of the handles at the bottom.
Warning!
If the object to be stretched or compressed is going to be animated with an effects curve, then the option "Connect curve length with object length
(view page 146)" should be set for the effects curve.
Keyboard shortcut: 0
Preview audio
This mode allows you to preview audio objects (as long as the mouse button is held down).
In this mode, objects cannot be moved or changed.
43 www.magix.com
44 Workspaces
Media Pool
The structure and workflow of the Media Pool is similar to that featured by
Windows Explorer; however, the difference is that only the used files are displayed. This is used to access and load multimedia files of all kinds: video files, audio files, fades, effects, and also complete projects.
Importing
Navigation buttons
The navigation buttons let you navigate through your computer’s drives and folders.
Forward/bac k
Higher directory
Folder tree
Search
These buttons access the previously viewed folders.
This button accesses the next highest folder level.
Here you can activate a folder tree to navigate through your computer system.
The search function allows you to find specific files quickly. You may specify your search according to file type, date, or certain folders. www.magix.com
Browse history list and path details
Workspaces
The path information for the current folder is displayed in the center above. Use the arrow button to open the menu to find the folders you previously visited.
Options All functions of the context menu (switch views, rename, or delete files, etc.) can also be accessed via the options button.
Display options
Settings for how detailed the entries should be listed may be specified here.
Zoom A zoom slider can be used to set the number and size of visible symbols in the "Large symbols" view.
Search
The Media Pool has an easy search function for finding files on the computer. It may be activated and turned off again with the shown button.
45
File name: Enter any part of the name of the file you are looking for in the "File name" field. The X symbol deletes the entry. A "?" may be used as a placeholder for a single character, and "*" for any number of characters.
File type: Here you can enter a file name extension. Multiple entries are separated using a semicolon. Below the entry field, various presets may be selected for often-used file name extensions.
Date: Here, you can set time period limits on your search. Choose an entry from the list.
Folder: If you don't want to search the entire computer, but only look on certain drives or in a single folder, you can define a certain search path.
Search depth: Here you have various options that determine whether additional locations should be searched.
Search indexed locations and the selected folder www.magix.com
46 Workspaces
Search indexed locations, the selected folder and personal files.
Search indexed locations, the selected folder, personal files and the project file.
"Indexed locations" are folders, which are searched and cataloged in Windows via the index list. If the index list is activated, the files in the indicated folders will be indexed while the computer is idling, so that the user's search query may be completed faster.
Note: In Microsoft Windows XP, the indexing service is usually deactivated by default. The search functions in Windows Vista
®
may be installed with the current version of "Windows Search". They make it possible to easily add to the indexing service. Please refer to the installation instructions from Microsoft.
Computer
The link button "Computer" displays the drives in the Media Pool. All drives will be listed along with their drive letters and can be opened with a double click.
User directory
The second button featuring the user's name opens their personal folder in the
Media Pool.
My media
The "My media" button lets you select "Projects", "My videos", "My music",
"My images", and "Recordings".
Projects: Here you can switch to the folder where your projects and films are usually stored.
You will find the "Show project contents" function in the context menu of a project. Using this function, you can display all objects of a project and copy them into the current project, retaining the editing and effect state of the object. This means that you don't have to edit the objects again to keep the status of the "old" project. But you can certainly continue editing the transferred object. These changes will be then saved in the current project.
My videos
Displays all usable files found in "My documents\My videos." www.magix.com
Workspaces
My music
Displays the contents of the "My Documents\My Music" folder. MAGIX Music
Manager also suggests this folder for importing your music collection into the database.
My pictures
Switches to the "My documents\My pictures" folder. This folder is often used by digital cameras and scanners to store transferred images by default. The included MAGIX Photo Manager program also uses this folder (e.g. during image import).
Recordings : MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX specifies standards for all recordings.
MAGIX tools
The "MAGIX tools" link selects links to "Downloads", "Database", "Online
Album", and "Internet Media".
Downloads : Use this button to access the media files that you downloaded with Catooh.
Database : Use this button to open the database view. Right-clicking opens the database search. The database first has to be created using the supplied additional programs MAGIX Photo Manager or MAGIX Music Manager.
Online Album : This buttons opens MAGIX Online Album. This provides a shortcut to uploading and deleting data. To do this, you must first register on
MAGIX Online Album.
There are many ways to upload data:
1.
While holding "Ctrl" down, select the data to be uploaded in the Media Pool, and select "Copy" in the context menu (opened by right-clicking). Switch to the MAGIX Online Album screen, open the desired folder, and select
"Paste" in the context menu.
2.
In the Media Pool, click on "Online Album", and go to the desired directory.
Open the Windows Explorer, select the desired data with "Ctrl" held down, and drag it into the Media Pool.
Both options will result in your desired data being uploaded to your MAGIX
Online Album.
47 www.magix.com
48 Workspaces
Hint : This function requires an Internet connection. To gain access, make sure you have your login information (email address and password) ready.
Internet media : This opens MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX's integrated browser
(view page 329). It offers you the possibility to collect media from the Internet
to use in the current project.
Movie templates
Here you will find various movie templates, which can be customized as you
Fades
Here you can find all fades from MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX, sorted into various categories. One click on a category displays all of the fades that are contained.
To load a fade, drag it with a held-down mouse key onto the object, into which you would like to fade.
You can find additional information in the "Fades" section of the "Objects (view
Title
This displays the title settings and the title editor. These presets are sorted into different categories and may be loaded by double-clicking or drag & drop. The
3D title templates are also located here.
The text featured by title objects may be changed directly in the program monitor by double-clicking.
Effects
This provides access to the effects that are sorted into the various categories.
Read more about this in the chapter "Effects (view page 121)".
Video effect templates
Here you can find pre-configured effect templates that can be dragged-and-dropped onto a video or image object. These effect templates consist of a combination of various effect settings which you can adjust in the appropriate effect dialogs.
In the "Video mix effects" subfolder you will find templates for mixing two video or image objects. To do so, two video or image objects have to lie on two www.magix.com
Workspaces tracks directly above or below the other. To use a mix effect template, drag on the lower object.
Video effects
Here you can find adjustable effects for video and photo objects. The effects can be set only after selecting an object in the respective effects dialog. For
more information, go to the "Video effects in the Media Pool (view page 123)"
section in the "Effects" chapter.
Movement effects
These are movement effects you can use to animate the frame by using zoom or camera movements. For more information go to the "Effects" chapter,
section "Movement effects in Media Pool" (view page 131).
Stereo3D
This accesses the program's Stereo 3D functionality. Please read the
corresponding chapter "Stereo 3D". (view page 188)
Note: This function is available only in the Plus/Premium version.
Audio effects
Here you will find many audio templates for echo, reverb, equalizer,
compressor, etc. Also read the "Audio Track" (view page 154) chapter.
Design elements
Multi picture-in-picture: Various effects presets for image stacking.
Collages: These work similarly to normal picture-in-picture effects, but more objects are used. Depending on the collage, arrange the selected objects one after the other and drag the collage onto the first object.
Color spaces: The color spaces are a collection of various backgrounds.
Professional test images are included for calibrating your system. You can also use the colored backgrounds for your own color transitions, for instance. The special "User" template opens a color selection dialog where you can choose the desired color.
Backgrounds: Here you can find static and animated photo and video backgrounds. Video backgrounds are capable of being looped, meaning that their length can be extended by duplication. www.magix.com
49
50 Workspaces
Image objects: Here you will find various image objects like black bars, thought bubbles for cartoons, etc.
Intros/Outros: These are beginning and end scenes for films with various themes.
You can find additional information in the "Effects (view page 138)" chapter, in
the section "Design element in Media Pool".
Personalized templates
Here you will find the folder for your own effect templates. For more details, please read the "Own effects in Media Pool" section in the "Effects" chapter
Extra effects
Here you will find all available effect plug-ins. Please read the "Additional
effects in the Media Pool" section in the "Effects" chapter (view page 140).
Various file list view modes
In the file list , all of the supported multimedia files and subfolders of the currently selected folder are displayed. Three different views (list, detail, large symbols) can be set by right clicking on the Media Pool context menu.
List: Only file names are listed. This view mode displays the most files simultaneously.
Details: In the details section the type, size, and date of modification are shown for every media file beside its name. The list can be sorted by clicking on any of these details. www.magix.com
Workspaces
Large icons can be quite useful because they show a preview frame for each movie and picture file. This allows you to sort through the material quicker. One disadvantage is that it takes longer for the file list to be displayed.
51
Preview function
This is a preview function for all files in the Media Pool which can be started by dragging & dropping onto the video monitor or by pressing the play button.
There are also previews for effects that illustrate their functionality.
The "Extras" button or the enhanced transport control function provides a selection of sections from a longer video file in the Media Pool. Please refer to the "Inserting objects into the project" chapter.
Transport control
The transport controls in the program monitor enable you to play back video and photo material in the arranger or as a preview in the Media Pool.
Transport control buttons
Range: Above the playback functions, the range between the in and out points can be changed by clicking. www.magix.com
52 Workspaces
Playback marker: This marker indicates the location of the image currently displayed on-screen.
Media Pool / Arranger: This button allows you to switch between using the arranger's transport control and the selected files in the
Media Pool (preview function).
Set in / out points: Defines the start and end of the playback range.
To the start: This button sets the playback marker to the start of the current area.
Jump to start of film: Sets the playback marker to the start of the movie.
Play/Stop (pause): The playback button in the middle starts playback. A second click stops playback.
Tip: In the menu "File -> Settings -> Program -> Playback", you can set whether the playback marker will go back to the start position (stop) after the second click or following the appropriate shortcut (space bar), or if it should stay at the current position (pause function).
Range playback: This button plays the current range.
To the range end: This button sets the playback marker to the end of the current area.
Audio or video recording : Quickly jumps to the Recording selection dialog.
Switches the video monitor to "Film overview" mode.
Jog wheel: Using this wheel, you can move by single frames within the video and position the playback marker exactly at high magnifications.
Shuttle control: The further the slider control is moved to the side, the quicker the arrangement is played in the corresponding direction. This way a certain position can be reached quickly. www.magix.com
Arranger
Workspaces 53
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX offers an editing interface for advanced editing: audio dubbing, professional editing, plus precise transitions and effects editing.
There are corresponding views for different applications: "Scene overview", "Storyboard" mode, and "Timeline" mode.
Tracks
The Arranger offers tracks for multimedia material positioning and editing. The number of tracks displayed may be specified in the file menu under "Movie settings".
In principle, any object type may be placed on any of the tracks. Video and image objects may also be combined with MIDI and audio objects on any of these tracks. The maximum length of a movie is restricted to 6 hours.
Mute a single audio track by clicking on the “Mute” button or play individual tracks separately (“Solo”) to emphasize a particular scene.
Clicking the lock symbol protects all objects in a track against unwanted editing. The track name can be changed by double-clicking on the text above the buttons.
A right-click on the track box opens the context menu:
MultiCam > Source track: Here you can activate/deactivate a track as a source track.
MultiCam > Master audio track: Here you can designate the master audio
track for Multicam editing (view page 115).
Track height: Set whether the selected track or all tracks should be displayed as small, large or in standard size. www.magix.com
54 Workspaces
You can also adjust the size using your mouse. To do so, drag the lower border of a track box downward using a mouse.
Zooming
The vertical zoom function sets the number of visible tracks. With many tracks, zooming is useful to be able to selectively edit a track or an object in full view.
Use the horizontal zoom functions to set up the visible section of the arrangement on the timeline.
Object zoom : Vertical and horizontal zoom stages are enlarged so that all of the selected objects are displayed at maximum size.
Optimize view: Displays the complete arrangement in full width.
Zoom will be set to 100%.
When the function is turned off, the old zoom level will be reactivated.
Adjusting the workspace
The program monitor, the arranger, and the Media Pool can be turned off completely or freely repositioned. Personal settings are automatically saved when MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX is closed and are available when the program is reopened.
In "File > Settings > Program > Display templates" you will find useful presets for monitor display settings. On systems with only a single monitor, only the first two templates are practical. The presets are explained on the right side of the dialog. All window properties of the arranger, video monitor, etc. can be changed after the application of a preset.
For larger arrangements, the program monitor can be used to show an
overview of the arranger (Window -> Movie overview (view page 298)).
Note: If you've lost track, then you can use "Window -> Reset window arrangement" or the keyboard shortcut "F9" to reset the basic settings. www.magix.com
Settings
All settings dialogs can be reached via "File > Settings".
Settings
Start dialog
A start dialog will open when the program is launched or a new project is loaded. Here you can make important presets for the project. You can change these settings at any time by going to "File" > "Settings".
55
Create new project: Here you can assign a name to your new project.
Options: This button lets you open and close the options area of the start dialog.
Watch the intro video: Here you can launch the introductory video with information about workflows in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX.
Project file: Here you can set the path for the project directory where all project files should be saved.
Movie settings: Here you can set the movie's target format (display norm, resolution, frame rate). This setting has no effect on the internal processing quality and can be changed at any time by going to "File > Settings > Movie"
www.magix.com
56 Settings
Audio sample rate: Here you can set the audio track's audio sample rate.
Load existing project: Here you can select and load a previously saved project.
Use movie template: Here you can choose an included movie template for a
new project. Read the "Using movie templates" (view page 197) section for
more details.
Project and movie settings
In this three-part dialog you can find settings that apply separately to every movie or every project.
Note : A project can include multiple movies.
Settings
Name: Here you can enter the name of the current movie.
Path: This is where you determine the folder on your hard drive in which your movie is saved. www.magix.com
Settings
Play film in loop mode: The movie is then played over and over again; that is, once the movie reaches the end marker, it is started again from the beginning.
Use settings as presets for new movies : The settings specified in the dialog are used as the standard settings for newly created projects.
Automatically adjust new images to fill screen (borders are faded out): This option is especially useful for photos, which are to be embedded into the arrangement, but have a different format. When the option is activated, there are no bothersome black bars; however, parts of the image along the edge will be hidden.
Number of tracks: Here you can change the track number.
Audio sample rate: The preset sample rate is 48 kHz. This sample rate is used for all recordings and is also a prerequisite for audio tracks of DVDs. With this setting, optimum sound quality is guaranteed. Audio material at different sample rates (e.g. CD Audio with 44 kHz) is automatically adapted when loaded (resampling). Only change this value if you want to use sound material with a different sample rate or if your sound card does not support this sample rate.
Video settings: This is where you set the standard settings for the picture format and frame rate for PAL or NTSC TV pictures or for your own format.
57 www.magix.com
58 Settings
Movie Information
This option opens an information window:
Name: Here you can enter the name of the current movie.
Path: This is where you select the folder on your hard drive in which your movie is saved.
Created on: Displays the time the movie was created.
Last changed : Displays the time of the last save.
Number of used objects: Displays the number of all objects in the movie.
Used files: All files used in the movie are listed here.
Keyboard shortcut: E www.magix.com
Settings
Project settings
You can change project settings here. A project can consist of multiple movies and is saved as an mvp file.
59
Description : Here you can give you project a description - perhaps a few statements about the state of the editing progress, etc. This field functions like a notepad.
Time point : You can assign your project a certain date. You can choose between simply a date - e.g. "24.12.2009" - or a written-out description - e.g.
"Christmas 2009".
Preview : This is the preview in a data manager such as the Windows Explorer, a comparatively insignificant setting. Instead of an automatic selection, you can select a certain image or a preview frame from the project.
Automatically select preview image
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX uses an automatically-selected preview image. www.magix.com
60 Settings
Use image file
Clicking the folder button opens a dialog to load image files. In this dialog, you can navigate to the directory where the image file is found and select it by double clicking.
Use preview image from movie
Use the controller to select a frame from the corresponding directory.
Program settings
All basic settings for MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX are made in this window. This allows you to influence the settings in
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX in detail.
Keyboard shortcut: Y
Playback
Audio playback
Driver selection : Wave/DirectSound, Specify whether you wish to use the standard Windows driver for the sound card or the DirectSound driver here.
DirectSound is a component of DirectX and, if necessary, is installed together with MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX. DirectSound has the advantage that the sound output (for all modern sound cards or onboard soundchips) can also be used by other programs open simultaneously. WAV drivers are recommended if the www.magix.com
Settings
CPU load is higher, as the larger buffers allow better handling of the load peaks (otherwise this would cause crackling).
Export device: Use this option to specify which sound card plays the wave audio objects. This is especially important if you have multiple sound cards installed on your computer, e.g. "onboard sound" as well as an additional sound card.
Audio buffer: In order to allow smooth playback of a complex arrangement,
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX creates a RAM data buffer into which the current data is loaded. Therefore it is not the entire arrangement that is preprocessed; far more, processing occurs step-by-step.
Number of buffers : Specify how many buffers should be used here. More buffers increase reliability, for judder-free arrangement playback, but this also increases the memory requirements. If played via DirectSound (see settings in the "Playback parameter" dialog), only one buffer is used automatically.
As a rule: If response and loading times are too slow, reduce the buffer size; otherwise increase the buffer size if the audio playback is choppy or if real-time errors occur. Since error-free playback is usually more important than fast reaction times, the buffer size should be raised to 16384 or 32768 for drop-outs. The possible number of used buffer updates is between 2 and 10.
Multitrack size/Preview size : Specify the buffer size used to play the entire arrangement or for previewing waves in the file manager.
Write real-time audio to wave file: If this option is active, the entire audio track may be mixed live and recorded simultaneously. During playback, for example mixer fades and effects may be controlled live and - all real-time activities are recorded and saved in a separate wave file.
Video playback
Video cache size : The video cache ensures smooth on-screen playback for files and effects by pre-loading them. The ideal setting depends on your system; experiment to find the best playback performance on your system.
Track number for parallel track optimization: This is an option, which is useful for projects with an especially high track number which leads to problems when saving the project. If you get errors, try using a value of "2" here. If you continue having problems, try using "1".
61 www.magix.com
62 Settings
This option influences program function only when MPEG and AVCHD material is being edited. However, performance declines to reduce disk space usage with increasing values.
Arranger
Autoscroll during playback: If autoscroll is activated, the screen view automatically shifts when the playback cursor reaches the right edge of the screen, which is useful for longer arrangements. You can select the size of the scrolling steps from either "Fast" (whole pages) or "Slow" (half pages).
Attention: Scrolling requires constant recalculation of the screen view, which may lead to interrupted playback if the amount of system RAM is too low. If this happens, simply deactivate the autoscroll feature.
Display: Display of objects in timeline mode can be simplified for performance reasons. You can decide whether to display preview frames for video objects across the entire object, or just for the first and last frames. For audio objects you can hide the wave form display. This is particularly recommended for
MPEG data streams.
Update in background: The update of the object display after move and zoom operations in the arranger is performed in the background in order to let you work smoothly.
Spacebar behavior: Here you can determine whether pressing the spacebar during playback resets (deactivated) the playback marker or leaves it at the current playback position (activated).
MIDI playback
Specify which sound card or which MIDI interface should be used for MIDI playback.
Image material playback
Resizing high-quality image material : Use this feature to improve the quality during resizing, particularly when downsizing to less than half of the original size (e.g. for picture-in-picture effects). This, on the other hand, requires more processing power.
Load image material in background: Activate this option in order to load inserted image material already before playback in background. www.magix.com
Folders
Settings 63
Here you can set the path where
you want to save your projects ( Projects )
and where exported ( Export ) or imported ( Import ) files, and recordings
( Recordings ) and VCR recordings ( TV recordings ) are saved,
Disc Images are saved
and where EXE files for the external audio and picture editor are located so that they can be launched via the Effects or Prepare menu (only
Plus/Premium-Version)
Note: Folders placed here are fundamental for the entire program. Newly created projects are stored in a separate subfolder, which you can define in
the "Program start" (view page 18) screen.
www.magix.com
64 Settings
Video/Audio
In this tab you will find all settings concerning video and audio files.
Video standard
PAL is used in Europe; the United States, Canada, and Japan use NTSC.
Movie display
The resolutions that can be set here concern only the picture display in the arranger. If playback becomes jerky, we recommend entering a lower value.
This does not influence the quality of exported videos.
Automatic interlace processing: MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX normally detects whether the loaded video files were recorded with the interlace or progressive processes automatically, and half-image format is detected for interlaced movies. In case automatic detection fails, you can deactivate it here and set
the object properties (view page 305) of video objects to the correct process.
Options
Automatically preview exported clips: This option starts the clip immediately after exporting for verification.
Automatically copy exported material to clipboard: This option is particularly useful when used with other programs, such as Microsoft Powerpoint. If activated, a multimedia file you have just created is immediately copied to the clipboard and can be used in other applications. For instance, you can insert it into an opened MS Powerpoint template by pressing "Ctrl + V". www.magix.com
Settings
Use picture effects when exporting to MAGIX Online Services: If this option is selected, all the picture effects are included with the sent file.
Extract sound from video: If a video file contains video and audio data the audio track of the video will also be imported if this option is activated. It will be displayed as an audio object in the arrangement below the video object. Both are automatically grouped together. If the audio track has to be edited or replaced later, you first have to ungroup it ("Ungroup" button in the tool bar or via the "Edit" menu).
Allow user-defined names for sound extracted from VOBs: Specifies whether a warning will be displayed for each imported file during VOB import
(VTS_01_1.vob) allowing you to enter a name for your movie (check box
"checked") or whether you would like an automatically generated name to be assigned (check box "unchecked").
Automatically load/save picture effects from JPX file : If you have edited pictures using another MAGIX program (e.g. MAGIX Photo Manager), then a
.jpx description file is saved along with the image which contains information about effects editing and texts. This option adds that information into your editing process.
Adjust minor deviations from 4:3 aspect ratio during export: This option automatically customizes photos that have an approximate 4:3 aspect ratio to
4:3 TV screen format. The pictures are therefore easily stretched or compressed. This inevitably brings about distortions in the picture. If this option is deactivated, black bars appear along the sides.
GPU acceleration for standard fades: Here you can (de)activate hardware acceleration of your graphics card for 3D effects. More information about this
topic is available in the 3-D fades (view page 103) chapter.
Optimize overload for realtime playback: Here you can activate or deactivate overload optimizing during realtime playback of the arrangement. This feature is particularly suitable for low-powered PCs.
Automatically create frametable during import Sometimes, rebuilding a frame table can get rid of problems in certain MPEG files. For example, such problems can be present if the navigation (positioning of the playback marker, transport) is bumpy or doesn't function at all.
Normally, when loading MPEG video, a frame table is not created in order to speed up the loading process. If you do create one anyway, MPEG files are normally noticeably faster and easier to edit.
65 www.magix.com
66 Settings
Reduce bitmap resolution for preview: The resolution of image files is reduced during playback to decrease required memory. This requires less computing power than playback in full resolution; full resolution is always calculated during export.
Relocate memory for bitmaps to other process: Activating this option will improve handling of bitmaps as they will be processed differently.
Still frame duration: Here you can specify how long a still frame will be shown normally during BMP or JPEG file import. For single frame sequence import select the duration of 1 frame.
System
Reactivate warning dialogs: In its newly installed state, MAGIX Movie Edit Pro
MX displays a number of security queries at various parts of the program. Each of them can be switched off by clicking the small box at the bottom that says
"Don't show this message again". To display these warning messages, select the "Reactivate dialogs" option.
Begin online configuration: If you have an Internet connection and use MAGIX
Online Services, you can configure your services here.
Undo/Redo: Here you can set the number of possible undo commands. The higher the value, the higher the CPU load on the computer.
Import formats: File formats that you never use can be de-selected here. Once de-selected they won't be imported anymore. Please keep in mind that several www.magix.com
Settings import modules exist for some file types (AVI, WMA). MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX uses the fastest one in each case. If you experience problems during the import of certain files, you can experiment with deactivation of certain import modules, forcing the program to use the slower, but more compatible import module.
Automatic preview : Here you can deselect automatic file preview start for
Media Pool files and certain file types.
Autosave: Here you can set the interval at which auto save projects will be periodically saved.
Automatic preview when changing transition: When this option is activated, a short preview of the transition effect will be quickly played between the two objects you selected.
High output quality for dynamic zoom and combination effects: The Title
Editor is used in high resolution by default. The display quality of titles is improved, but this also results in longer loading times for movies.
Move playback marker when selecting objects : This option causes the playback marker to move to the beginning of the selected object.
Display templates
67 www.magix.com
68 Settings
These presets provide a collection of useful configurations for display on the monitor. On systems with only a single connected monitor, only the first two are practical. The presets are explained on the right side of the dialog. All window properties of the arranger, program monitor, etc. can still be changed manually after the application of a preset.
Display options
Video output to DV device
Video output on a DV device: This option displays your arranger view on your
TV via your DV camera. This is useful if your graphics card doesn't have a TV output. However, since your PC must then compress the video signal in real time in DV-AVI format and in addition to processing all real-time effects, so you need to have a powerful PC for jitter-free playback. Even if your computer is not particularly powerful, you can still use this function to see how your video looks on your TV screen, since the analog video output signal of a good DV camera is better than the TV output of an average graphics card.
Preview in the Arranger/preview window and playback in video recorder/analog recording
You can set playback mode separately for the Arranger (including all preview windows and effects dialogs) and the preview monitors during recording and in the video recorder. www.magix.com
Settings
Video mode
Standard playback (video for windows): This is the standard mode that functions on all systems.
Direct 3D (hardware mixer): This mode provides an extreme increase in speed by letting the mixing, many effects, and various transitions be calculated directly on the graphics card. Depending on the graphics card, performance can increase by 300%. The graphics card will not be used during export.
Note: To use this mode the graphics card must posses at least 128 MB own memory. You will need to install Direct 3D 9 or higher, and the graphics card driver must support "High Level Pixel Shader Language 2.0". MAGIX Movie
Edit Pro MX checks the corresponding properties when this mode is selected, and switches it off if necessary.
Standard mode (overlay mixer): In this mode you can use a hardware-like de-interlacing for the output on your PC screen or progressive scan-capable projector. Playback of recordings with interlace turns out much better.
Alternative mode (video mixing renderer 9): This mode uses the hardware de-interlacing function of modern graphics cards together with DirectX 9. Make sure that you are using the most recent version of your graphics card driver, which must be compatible with DirectX 9 to function properly. This mode works better than the standard mode (overlay mixer) only for a few graphics card models.
Image formation in Vertical Blank Intervals (VBI)
The image formation takes place in the vertical blank intervals of the monitor signal (or the connected TV signal). This helps avoid image interruptions.
Warning: Because of the necessary waiting time on the next VBI, this process adds significant computation time!
You can deactivate this option for digital displays such as TFT monitors. In
"Overlay" mode, image formation occurs exclusively via VBI.
De-interlacing
The DirectShow modes "Overlay mixer" and "Video mixing renderer 9" enable activation of hardware de-interlacing for the graphics card. For general information about de-interlacing and the options "Top/bottom field first",
please read the corresponding article "De-interlacing (view page 366)" in the
manual. www.magix.com
69
70 Settings
Preview rendering
Use this dialog to set how MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX renders a set range in the arranger. This dialogs may be accessed via "File -> Settings -> Preview rendering".
Note: The preview rendering function enables complicated passages in the project to be rendered beforehand for fluid video previewing. This may be accessed via the marker bar's context menu. You can find more details in the
"Preview rendering" section.
Presets: You have the option to select presets or save your own settings for later use.
Format settings : Specify here which format should be used to render a set range. "Advanced settings" enables you to adjust the selected format to suit your own particular requirements.
Other : Access this dialog prior to every rendering process (the dialog does not appear by default).
Note : Rendering may take longer depending on the selected format and size of the set range. www.magix.com
Video recording
Video recording
Select the recording method
To start recording, click on the red "Record" button below the preview monitor.
The following selections are possible in the dialog window:
71
AVCHD for AVCHD cameras
HDV camera: For HDV cameras
DV cameras : For mini DV cameras and DV video recorders
Video : For analog video cameras, analog TV, VHS recorders, webcams and others
Audio: For microphones, cassette recorders, MiniDisc players, turntables, etc.
Screen : Records directly from the computer monitor
Single frame : For single and series images from analog cameras, analog TV, or VHS recorders, webcams, etc. www.magix.com
72 Video recording
Recording AVCHD
Connect camera
Suitable cameras are essentially available in three varieties:
Cameras featuring removable data storage : These cameras have a slot for a memory card. Your computer should have a card reader for the corresponding memory card, which you can then remove from the camera and insert into the card reader. Different camera models can also be connected via USB.
Cameras which burn DVDs directly (usually 80 mm diameter instead of the regular 120 mm): The DVD can simply be taken out of the camera and inserted into the computer. For so-called "Slot in DVD" drives, look beforehand in the operational manual whether or not 80 mm DVDs (also called 3" DVDs or
MiniDVDs) are acceptable.
Cameras with built-in hard drives: The camera will respond as a drive as soon as it is connected via a USB cable to the PC. This additional drive will appear in Media Pool.
Hint: The listed options and procedures reflect our experience with what works. Still, we recommend you read the camera's manual for the exact sequence of actions and contact the manufacturer in case of problems.
AVCHD import
AVCHD recording is actually not really a recording as such, but rather "only" the transfer of the already created video file and its import into the existing project.
On older systems, it may be helpful to transfer AVCHD files into MPEG-2 format during import. A corresponding query appears during importing of these files.
Note:
During AVCHD import, it is necessary to activate (view page 331) the
MPEG-4 and the Dolby ® Digital Stereo codec. MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX offers this option as soon as the codec is required. www.magix.com
Video recording
After you have selected AVCHD recording, the following dialog opens.
73
Video source: Here you can navigate to the drive that corresponds to the connected AVCHD camera.
Save in the following folder : Create a target directory for the files to be imported to here.
Advanced settings: Adjust various settings affecting the name and date of the files to be created.
Preview monitor and transport control : Play and rewind the clips in the file list here.
Medium/General : An info area for the files is provided to the right next to the preview monitor.
File list : The contents of the selected drive are shown here. Use the display filters to reduce the types of files shown. You can select every file separately using the little check boxes in order to import them later. At the top right of the list you can find options for displaying the files. www.magix.com
74 Video recording
Note: The files are color-coded. The colors indicate recording times, so that you can quickly recognize which recordings were made at the same time.
Select : This offers self-explanatory options for file display ("All", "Only new", or
"None").
Display filter: Here you can select between "Movies" or "Photos". With the option "Show only selected", all non-selected elements will be hidden. You should only use this option if you've already selected elements.
Import into movie : With this option activated, media will be inserted directly into the MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX Arranger as objects. When inactive, they will be simply copied into the target folder and may be selected from the Media
Pool at any time.
Delete selected media after import from camera : This option deletes the selected media after importing from the camera.
Import: Starts the import process of the selected files into the target directory.
Cancel: Closes dialog without import.
Tip : The AVCHD import dialog is basically a universal import dialog, appropriate for external drives, photo or video cameras, containing usable files.
If you find the display filters useful for your camera as well, nothing stands in the way of connecting the camera to the computer and then activating AVCHD recording in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX. www.magix.com
Video recording
HDV camera
Use this option to open the HDV camcorder record dialog. To do this, you have to connect an HDV camcorder.
75
The options in this dialog can also be found above in DV recording.
DV camera
DV devices
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX supports continuous editing of DV (digital video) files. A DV recorder or camcorder and a computer with a FireWire interface are required.
To record digitally, the digital output of the Mini-DV camcorder or DV video recorder must be connected to the DV interface of the PC, yet switched off.
You must also have Microsoft’s DirectX8a (or higher) installed on your PC. Now switch your camcorder to “video recorder” or “playback” mode (depending on your particular device) and open the DV capture dialog. www.magix.com
76 Video recording
Connect a DV or HDV camera
Connect the digital output of the switched-off camera with the computer's DV interface (also called FireWire or iLink).
Insert a DV cassette or the storage device into the camera.
Switch your camera’s operating mode to "Video recorder" or "Playback".
The camera is now ready to transfer video to the computer.
Note: You may also use a HDV camera in DV mode to, for example, transfer recordings in the old DV format. We have noted problems with this mode in many cameras, and therefore recommend that the Record mode of the camera is also switched to DV, switching the camera off and then on again.
Capturing DV recorders or cameras
To start recording, click the "Record" button below the source monitor.
Select "DV camera" from the recording dialog. Uncompressed DV capture requires approx. 220 MB per minute of video. If you would instead like to record using the more space-saving MPEG format, then you should first activate the "Record DV as MPEG" option.
This opens the actual recording dialog. Check to see if a DV camera driver has been selected.
Name your recording. It's worth choosing a logical name which will allow you to find it easily again on the hard drive. www.magix.com
Video recording
You can access the appropriate place on the camcorder tape by using the remote control buttons: shuttle forwards, backwards, and start/stop playback.
To start recording, click on the "Record" button. Keep an eye on the remaining hard drive space.
Cease capturing with the "Stop" button and exit the record dialog. You can see the recording in the film-strip in the lower third of the screen.
Tip : In the DV recording dialog, you can set clips from the DV video which then will be recorded one after the other (batch capturing). Read more on this in the
chapter "Batch processing" (view page 80).
"DV capturing" dialog
77
Note : Keep an eye on the available hard drive space before each recording.
DV capture requires approx. 220 MB per minute of video!
Select DV device driver: The device driver for your DV device should be listed here. If "Record audio" is deactivated, then video without sound is recorded only . "Audio preview" activates the audio output of the recording. www.magix.com
78 Video recording
Note : The audio preview is deactivated at first, since DV cameras usually include built-in speakers.
Save movie file as/save in following folder : Enter the name of the movie to be recorded. You can also select the folder where you wish to store your video file. The default recording directory is set by default, but you can change the
Path settings (view page 63) under menu item "File -> Program settings ->
Path settings".
Edit after recording : This provides access to the automatic editing options.
Start device automatically : Starts the DV recorder or DV camera automatically when the "Record" button is pressed. This does not function with all digital cards/video devices.
Video preview : On the preview monitor you can see a preview of your movie.
Original size : This option allows you to preview the video in the original size.
To return to the dialog use the "Esc" key.
Batch capturing : Here the start and end points can be set for the capturing.
This allows you to search the entire video for all captures to be used and list them for planned batch capture. This is then processed in sequence when the recording starts (via the red button). That way you don't need to record each scene individually. You simply determine recording time points, and the computer takes care of the rest. To set the start and end points precisely, click
"Enter start/end point (view page 79)"
Record list : Use this button to view the available list of already recorded videos and scheduled recordings. All entries from the list can be selected and deleted.
Record : Starts the recording process. Also contains the list of scheduled recordings. These are processed step-by-step (batch capturing).
Stop : Stops the recording process.
Snapshot!
With the Snapshot! button, you can create a frozen image directly from the preview monitor. Start the camcorder and watch the preview window.
When the image you want appears, click "Snapshot". Or you can navigate using the remote control to the position you want, and stop there in Pause mode . Stopped playback on the DV camera will not deliver an image! The images are saved in the record directory as graphics files in the set resolution. www.magix.com
Video recording
Remote control
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX also supports remote controls for most digital camcorders. This does not function with all digital cards/video devices. If your hardware does not support the remote control function, the buttons will not be usable.
The transport controls required for this are featured in the DV or HDV recording dialog.
79
Tape title : Enter a name for your tape here. MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX requires this name for the DV logging feature.
Recording information : Displays various information about your recordings.
Enter start/end point : Enter the exact start and end point or the recording length for a scene. www.magix.com
80 Video recording
Both values can be entered as ATN
(absolute track number) or as a timecode in hours:minutes:seconds:frames.
DV as MPEG
This recording selection dialog option allows you to transfer DV recordings directly into the space-saving MPEG format on the harddisk.
From the "DV as MPEG" dialog window you can find MPEG encoder settings options under
"Advanced".
You can also burn your DV material direct to disc without any intermediate steps.
Recording list
Set the start and end points for the capture here. This allows you to search the entire video for all captures to be used and list them for planned batch capture. This is then processed in sequence when the recording starts (via the red button). That way, you don't need to record each scene individually.
Simply specify the recording time points and the computer takes care of the rest. To set precise start and end points, click "Enter start/end point (view
www.magix.com
Video recording
Recording list : Press this button to view the available list of already recorded videos and scheduled recordings. All entries from the list may be selected and deleted.
Every batch recording is automatically logged.
Conversely, every "manual" DV and HDV recording is transferred into the recording list in order to restore lost recordings without much effort.
81
Logging
Logging means that MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX also saves the original save location, position and additional information (metadata, e.g. scene, take, rating, comments, etc.) about DV video and audio files.
Everything copied using DV recording, DV to MPEG recording and HDV recording appears in the recording lists of the corresponding recording dialog.
Recordings for which the corresponding video material is no longer on the hard disk will appear as "planned recordings".
If MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX does not find the corresponding DV and WAV files during the loading of a video, it will ask that the corresponding DV tape is inserted into the connected camcorder again for automatic scene import.
You no longer have to save DV AVI and audio files (which can be very large). If at a later time you would like to work on a film again, but do not have the space to keep the material for it on your hard disk, then you can simply delete the bulky DV AVI and audio files. www.magix.com
82 Video recording
Analog video recording
Connect analog video source
Connect the video out of your video camera, DVD player or VCR to the video in
(TV, video, or video-in graphics card) of your computer, and the audio out to the line in of your sound card.
Due to the variety of device configurations, it is difficult to say which cable will function best with your setup. If you’re not sure, check the manual of your VCR or your TV-, video- or graphics cards.
Example: Many VCRs have a SCART output and most DVD players have three
RCA outputs (two for the stereo track, one for the image). In such cases, you will need a SCART to RCA adapter, a cable with 3 RCA plugs at each end.
SCART/RCA adapter Scart/RCA adapter with 3
RCA jacks
Stereo RCA/mini phone jack adapter
Most sound card inputs are mini stereo jacks. To connect the audio out of your
VHS recorder to the sound card audio in, you will need a stereo RCA/ mini phone plug adapter.
You will have to purchase a cable with three RCA plugs and a stereo RCA/mini phone plug adapter. www.magix.com
Analog video recording
Video recording 83
Video/Audio driver : Here you can set up the video card or sound card for recording. In practically every case the driver software supplied with the hardware must be installed.
Hint: Under "video driver" you will find a "screen capture" entry in the
Plus/Premium version. You can read about how it functions in the "Record
screen contents (Plus/Premium version)" (view page 90) section.
Input/Tuner settings : If your video capture card supports multiple sources, i.e. your card also has a TV tuner or multiple inputs (SVHS, composite, etc.), then you can select the proper recording source and the TV channel to be recorded here.
Save movie file as/Save in folder : Enter the name of the movie to be recorded.
You can also select the folder where you wish to store your video file. The standard recording folder is set as default. The location of this folder can be
changed in "Path settings (view page 63)" under "File -> Program settings ->
Folders".
Edit after recording : Use this to access the automatic editing options.
Record quality: You can choose between various predefined recording qualities in the list box according to your computer's processing power and www.magix.com
84 Video recording how you wish to use the picture material. They are sorted according to picture quality. Use Configuration to fine-tune the quality for the preset.
Presets displayed with MPEG record directly in MPEG format.
Tip : Use the presets marked MPEG if you want to burn your recordings straight away, since smart encoding can omit laborious encoding after recording.
Advanced...
: Opens the video driver settings dialog (view page 84).
Capture control : Here you'll find the "Red" record and "Stop" buttons. With them, you can start and stop recording.
Timer recordings active/time limit : Here you can specify a recording start time and length, and thus turn your PC into a fully functioning VCR.
Snapshot!
: With the "Snapshot" button, you can create a still image directly from the preview monitor. The images are saved in the recordings folder as graphics files in the resolution you have set.
Recording details : This shows statistical information such as the recording time, available space on the hard-drive, the recorded frames, and the
“dropped” frames. Dropped frames are frames that have been left out because the computer processor is too slow for the selected image format and cannot accept all incoming frames.
Preview : Some graphics adapters allow you to reduce the system lead by deactivating the video preview. If you hear an "echo", deactivate the audio preview.
Advanced configurations in the video capturing dialog
Here you can adjust certain settings for the video recording driver.
These dialog boxes, so-called “property sheets,” come with the video card drivers. These driver-specific performance properties may deviate depending on the cards. We also have a very limited influence on the behavior of these drivers. If you encounter any difficulties, please contact the video card manufacturer for the latest driver updates. www.magix.com
Input: Sets the crossbar of the video card.
Video recording
The crossbar determines which video and audio input signal will be recorded.
The crossbars are connected in series to the video recording chip itself. In the output field, the video output (for the crossbars) is the input for the recording chip (video or audio decoder-in) of the video card. In the “Input” field, select the signal source that will be used by the video card to capture for this input.
Many video cards have separate crossbars for audio and video. If you have a problem, try out the different configurations until the right sound matches the right image.
Composite-in = the normal video input (typically a cinch jack)
S-video = S-video input (mini-din jack)
SVHS-in = SVHS input (special cable)
Tuner-in = TV signal of the integrated tuner
Imagesetting
Video decoder: If the picture only appears in black & white or it flickers, the video standard may be set incorrectly. In mainland Europe, PAL_B is used.
VideoProcAmp: Fine-adjustment of colors, brightness, contrast etc. We recommend against changing any of the manufacturer’s settings.
Format: Please do not change anything here. The capturing format is set in the
"Recording quality" option in the video recording dialog.
Station selection
This option is only available if a TV tuner is integrated into your video card.
85
Audio
Songs, noises, or instruments can be easily recorded in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro
MX using the audio recording function. A hooked-up microphone or various audio devices (especially a stereo system) can be used as recording sources.
Connecting the source for recording
First of all, the source of the audio material must be connected to the sound card input. Again, there are several possibilities which primarily depend on the type of equipment you have. www.magix.com
86 Video recording
If you are recording from a microphone, then please connect the microphone to the microphone jack on your sound card (usually red).
If you want to record material from a stereo system, then you can use the line-out or AUX out jacks on the back of your amplifier or tape deck. This involves connecting them to the sound card input (usually red).
If your amplifier has no separate output (other than for the speakers), then you can use the connection intended for headphones for your recordings. In most cases, you will need a cable with two mini-stereo jacks. This type of connection has the advantage of being able to set the headphone input signal level with a separate volume. As headphone connections generally are not the best, it is advised that you use the line outputs if possible.
When recording cassettes from a tape deck, you can connect the tape deck's line out directly to the sound card input.
When recording from vinyl records, you should not connect the record player's output directly with the sound card because the phono signal needs to be pre-amplified. A more suitable method would be to use the headphone connection or an external pre-amp.
Adjusting the Signal Level
Adjusting the signal level to the sound card is also recommended to get the best sound quality during digital recording.
Once a recording source is connected to the sound card, the "Record" button opens the recording dialog and starts the recording source.
You can now adjust the recording level with the help of the LED display in the recording dialog. For this, you must first check off "Show Levels".
If the adjustment is set too high, distortion occurs and the incoming signal must be reduced. If you have connected the source through either an amplifier or tape deck output to the sound card, you can only reduce the signal level in your sound card’s software mixer interface. You can access the mixer directly from within the recording dialog via the “Recording Level” button.
If you reduce input sensitivity by using the input fader, the resolution at which the analog signal is digitized is also reduced. Try to set these automatic controllers to the loudest sound level possible.
The maximum setting for an optimal level is the loudest part of the material.
The loudest part should be adjusted to be the maximum. The actual recording www.magix.com
Video recording begins when you press the "Record" button. At the end of the the recording you will be asked if you want to use the recording. Upon confirmation, the newly-recorded material will be placed at the next free position of the start maker in the arrangement.
Audio record dialog
87
Audio driver: Selects the sound card for the recording.
Save audio file as/ Save file in the following folder: Here you can select the title of the audio file you wish to record. You can also select the folder where you wish to store the file.
Recording quality : Sets the sound quality of the recording. In the preset menu you can choose between medium wave radio ("AM tuner"), UKW ("FM Radio"),
DAT (Digital Audio Tape) and CD quality.
Volume control : Using the peakmeter, you can monitor the level of the incoming signal. Please read more on this in the chapter "Adjusting levels"
Recording : This button starts the actual recording. www.magix.com
88 Video recording
Stop : Click this button to stop recording
Normalize after recording: With this option activated, your material's volume is raised to a proper level after recording is completed. In order to achieve good results, you should try to record the source as loud as possible without overmodulating it. To do so, refer to the peak meter reader in the recording dialog.
Playback while recording: This option is particularly important for spoken commentary, etc. If activated, the selected movie (or selected scene if recorded in the "Edit" screen) is played while recording. This acts as orientation for the movie.
Advanced: Use this button to open a window where you can select from special features:
Advanced settings for audio recordings
Mono recordings: Activate to record in mono. This reduces the required memory space in half. Mono recordings are recommended for voice recordings made using only one standard mono microphone.
"Real-time sample rate adjustment": Automatically matches the sample rate of a new file to be recorded with the sample rate of the current movie's sound track (set in the video recording).
Ducking (reducing the sound volume): To add narration or other sound material to a video that already has sound volume levels set, activate the option ”Automatic reduction of sound volume of remaining audio tracks”. This automatically reduces the volume of audio objects in the arrangement during the recording session (”ducking”). This is achieved using an automatically configured volume curve: Before and after the recording, other tracks will be faded in or out, resulting in a homogeneous total volume level. (Lowering of volume level during spoken comments is also called "Ducking".)
Single frame
Single frame recording may be used to record snapshots from the connected video source. This requires a DirectShow compatible video recording or TV card or a corresponding USB device (e.g. a webcam).
The time control function allows you to automatically take snapshots. This is useful for the following applications:
to create slideshows using videos
for animation films (stop-motion recording) www.magix.com
for video surveillance
or in time-lapse photography
Video recording
The recorded images are added to the current arrangement.
Time Control
Recording interval : When active, starting recording produces a sequence of images. Snapshots are saved according to the selected time interval and numbered sequentially. For example, if snapshots are taken every two seconds and then inserted every five frames into the slideshow, then a ten times accelerated time lapse recording will result.
Photo length in frames : Specifies how long the photos appear in the slideshow.
Enhanced single-frame recording dialog settings
You can adjust certain settings for the video recording driver.
These dialog boxes, so-called "property sheets", come with the video card drivers. The driver-specific features may slightly vary from driver to driver. The
MAGIX team has little direct influence on the performance of the various drivers. If you encounter any difficulties, then please contact the video card manufacturer for the latest driver updates.
Input : Sets the crossbar switch of the video card. This lets you define what video and audio signal is used in the recording. The crossbars are connected in series to the video recording chip itself.
Output : In the "Output" field, the video output (for the crossbars) is the input for the recording chip (video or audio decoder in) of the video card. In the
"Input" field, you select the signal source to be used for this input by the video card during recording.
Composite in = the normal video input (typically a cinch jack)
S-VHS in = S-VHS input (special cable)
Tuner in = the TV signal of the built-in tuner
Video decoder : If the picture only appears in black & white or it flickers, then the video standard may be set incorrectly. PAL_B is used in Germany and most European countries (France: SECAM; US/CAN: NTSC).
89 www.magix.com
90 Video recording
VideoProcAmp : For fine tuning of colors, brightness, contrast, etc. We recommend against changing any of the manufacturer's settings.
Format : Do not change anything here! The capture format settings can be changed under "Resolution" in the "Recording" dialog box.
Screen Capturing
Use this feature to record everything that moves on your monitor. This process is called "screen capturing".
Note: This function is available only in the Plus/Premium version.
Step-by-step screen capture
Use this feature to record your screen content. This process is called "screen capturing".
Under Recording quality , you will find various presets for different applications. You can either record the entire monitor
("fullscreen"), a frame of variable size (e.g. to film the Windows
Media Player display), or a different video player. Click
"Configuration" to make custom size adjustments.
Hint : Because many video players work with overlay, it is recommended to open each player before starting the capture! This way switching into "Overlay" mode can be prevented.
Select the "Screen" option in the recording selection dialog. www.magix.com
Video recording
An additional dialog with a red record button, a black stop button as well as a frame with dashed bordering appears.
Activate the option "Record mouse pointer" to record the movements of the mouse pointer.
91
Now select the screen area you wish to record, i.e. the screen of the video player in which the video is playing. Drag the frame over the area you wish to record and adjust its size as required by dragging the edges and corners.
Hint: If you selected the "fullscreen" preset before, or clicked the "fullscreen" button in the dialog before, the frame will appear outside the visible area.
The actual recording process can be started by pressing the red record button. The recording starts; the record symbol appears in the task bar (tray).
Once the video you wanted to record has come to an end, click on the
"Record/Stop" button to stop the recording. Recording ends and the recording dialog is visible once again. www.magix.com
92 Video recording
Edit after recording
The "Edit after recording" dialog can be opened from all recording dialogs.
All editing steps from recording to automatic burning can be carried out without further user involvement.
The dialog "Edit after recording" allows you to:
Find and remove advertisements automatically : Please read the chapter
"Automatically search for and remove ads" (view page 223) chapter.
Automatic scene detection : Divide material into scenes. Please also read the
section "Automatic scene recognition (view page 201)".
Set automatic chapter markers : Please also read the section "Set chapter
marker automatically (view page 288)" in the "Edit" chapter in the PDF manual
(press "F1").
Burn project immediately after recording : You can use this option to record and burn in a single step. Simply select the format you would like to burn, insert a suitable blank disc into the drive, and then press record.
Note : Make sure that the selected recording quality corresponds with the disc type (the preset "MPEG:DVD" for DVDs).
If you use your own settings for MPEG encoding (e.g. half image resolution for long-play DVDs) make sure that settings for recording and later for burning are the same so that no new recording is necessary (Smart encoding).
After recording, the program automatically switches to the "Burn" screen, the burn window opens and the disc is burned. The last set layout is used for the
DVD menu layout. www.magix.com
Objects
Tip : This function is particularly suitable for burning lengthy disc projects directly to disc, since recording may begin in the evening and the DVD should be finished by morning.
Export for mobile device : The recorded movie is immediately converted into the format of the selected mobile device and transferred. The list field contains the device which has been selected in the "Export video/audio (view page
Settings
: Opens the "Export settings (view page 268)" dialog for the selected
target device.
Note : If you enter a file name and memory path in the export dialog, then the path is used but the file name is ignored. For EPG-controlled TV recordings the name of the program is used instead.
93
Import a non-copy-protected DVD
Click in the Media Pool under "Import" on "Computer" and select by double clicking the DVD drive where the DVD to be imported is located.
Now you can load the listed VOB files into the project as described in the "Add
objects into the project" (view page 94) chapter. MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX
recognizes which files belong together, so that you only have to load one file.
Objects
Objects are used while in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX's "Timeline" mode. The general term "object" includes all media types that are present on the arranger's tracks. There are video objects for video files, audio objects for audio files, image objects for images and photos, title objects for subtitles, and even synthesizer objects, which contain MIDI files.
In the following chapter you can read about what you can do with these objects. The workflow for all object types is the same.
Tip: You will find many functions in the object context menus, which you can open with a right click on the corresponding object. There, you will also find the "Object properties" dialog, where in addition to current settings you can www.magix.com
94 Objects also change interlace settings for the object. In the "Context menu" chapter of the PDF manual or in Help (F1 key) you will also find detailed information.
Insert object into the project
File selection using the preview monitor
All selection processes are conducted on the video monitor. View and edit material before importing it. There is a preview function for all of the files in the
Media Pool.
Use the playback button to start the preview of video or image objects in
Media Pool. A preview is also provided for special objects like titles or fades.
Audio files from the Media Pool can also be previewed via the playback button.
Tip: Useful presets for the Arranger and video monitor can be found in the tab
Display templates (view page 67) in the program settings.
Full-page view of image
The option "full screen" in the context menu maximizes the preview monitor.
Alternatively, a double click on the monitor or press "A + Enter" to maximize the window. The fullscreen view is especially recommended for working with two screens; one screen for the film preview, and the other for the arranger.
You can also shift the monitor into full screen mode and access it via the context menu (right mouse button). There, you can also hide and display the basic transport controls.
With "Esc" you will go back to the normal view (or click on "smaller" button to the right in the fullscreen mode).
Show movie overview
The option "Film overview" in the "Window" menu enables an overview of the entire arranger. All objects in the arranger will be displayed in the program monitor. The overview display is especially recommended for work with long movies because the reduced overview in the program monitor and the zoomed detailed view in the arranger present a good combination.
The film overview can be used for moving around in the movie and for editing certain parts: www.magix.com
Objects
When you click on a certain object in the video monitor, the arranger will zoom on that object.
Using the mouse, you can draw a frame in the video monitor – and the corresponding range will be zoomed in the arranger.
When you move the playback marker in the video monitor, the arranger playback marker will also move correspondingly.
Tip: If you use this option very often, you can use the keyboard shortcut (Shift
+ A).
Load files
Media files can be loaded into the arranger from the Media Pool in several different ways:
The fastest way : Drag the desired file from the Media Pool into the desired track. If an object is already present at this position, the file is inserted at the desired time position on the next empty track below.
Load several files : If you would like to load several files, hold down the "Ctrl" key while clicking on the entries you would like to use. If you would like to load a sequence of files, hold the "Shift" key and click the first entry, then on the last. All entries in between are selected. Then you can drag all of the selected files into the Arranger with the mouse button pressed.
Insert by command: You can also use the commands of the "Insert modes"
Files with multiple audio tracks
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX also loads VOB files that contain multiple audio tracks. After the VOB file has been loaded, simply click the audio object created and select the desired audio track.
Note : To view and select audio objects in the arrangement, Timeline mode must be active.
Loading parts of movie files
For longer videos, it is recommended to define the areas which should be loaded into the project before importing. An in and out point is set to define the area for this purpose.
Proceed as follows:
95 www.magix.com
96 Objects
Select a file from the Media Pool by double clicking it. Play it back using the play buttons to indicate the section which you want to use in the project.
Either move the range markers directly by dragging them with the mouse or set them using the buttons or the shortcuts I and O . The shortcuts are especially useful for exact positioning using the shuttle and the jog wheel
Left click on the monitor and drag it to the arranger. An object will appear on the track, corresponding to the selected area.
Select and group objects
To edit or delete objects using menus, you must first select them. To do so, simply click on the object you wish to select. Objects will change color to show that they have been selected.
When the Shift key is pressed, multiple objects are selected. You can open up a rectangle positioning the mouse over the object, then holding down the mouse button and marking all objects within the rectangle (”elastic band selection”) by left-click-dragging.
Any object can be combined with others to make up a group, to avoid the objects being unintentionally moved out of relation to each other. Once they are combined, clicking on one object of a group will select the entire group. To group or ungroup objects, use the buttons in the tool bar or the corresponding commands in the "Edit" menu.
Move Objects
Hold down the mouse button to move selected objects to any tracks and positions via drag and drop. It is recommended to place objects that belong together on neighboring tracks and to create separate tracks for audio and video objects. For this reason, videos that should overlay each other should usually be placed on the same track.
If the Shift key is pressed, objects can be moved from one track to another, without the time position being changed. www.magix.com
Objects
Cutting objects
All objects can be split. Each object section then becomes is an independent object.
Select the object to be cut.
Position the playback marker at the position where the movie is to be cut.
Click on the "Cut" (view page 38) button or select the "Cut" option in
the "Edit" > "Split scene" menu.
Note : If the commands "Split scene" and "Remove beginning/end" are applied without a selection, all objects at the position of the playback marker are cut.
Tip : You can find detailed step-by-step instructions on how to remove (view
page 25) unusable scenes from video material in the "Quick start" chapter of
the print manual.
There are three options for joining split objects:
Click on the undo button in the lower toolbar (view page 37). This will work
only directly after applying the split command.
In order to rejoin these split objects at a later stage, simply highlight the individual parts and select the "Group" command to join the selected objects together into one group.
Remove the rear object and move the front object forward and restore the original length using the bottom right handle.
Duplicate objects
Objects may be duplicated very easily. Click on the object to be copied with the mouse while holding down the "Ctrl" key. This generates a copy, which you can immediately drag to the desired position or cut separately.
97 www.magix.com
98 Objects
Object handles
All objects can be re-sized with their lower edge “object handles”. Move the mouse over one of the lower corners of the object until the mouse pointer becomes a double arrow. Move the mouse over one of the lower corners of the object until the mouse pointer becomes a stretch symbol.
5 "handles": Length, fade, transparency (volume)
An object can be faded in or out with the handles to the left and right upper corners of the object. Cross-fades between different objects can be created by overlapped positioning of objects that are fading in and out. The length of the cross-fade can be adjusted with the handles.
Using the transparency/volume handle located centrally at the top of the object, adjusts the transparency of video and Bitmap objects, or the volume of audio and image objects.
If you adjust the middle handle of a video object all the way down, the object will become transparent. If a second object is located on a track above it, a black color will appear from below it, so that brightness will be reduced.
Trim Objects
Trimming provides exact placement of object borders or transitions. MAGIX
Movie Edit Pro MX has two different trimmers, and these can be opened using the context menu for a video or image object.
General advice for operating both trim editors
Play functions: The trim window contains its own play functions that allow the object to be played individually or in relation to the arrangement.
The right play button plays the arrangement normally. Replays can sometimes appear shaky because the processor may be over-worked. Those frames that the processor cannot calculate quickly enough are left out. www.magix.com
Objects
The middle play button plays the arrangement “frame by frame”, which means no frames are left out. Depending on the processor load, playback may thus be slower, but still smooth.
The left play button renders material before playing, i.e. the current settings are calculated first and then exported. This method ensures a smoother playback.
With the fast forward and rewind functions you can change the range start in the timeline. This allows for complete control of transitions between two videos.
Increments: A click on the arrow buttons in both trim editors moves the handle or the material within an object exactly by one frame. With the Ctrl key you can increase the frame rate gradually to 5 frames per mouse-click.
Trimmer for individual objects
A schematic display of the selected object and its handles can be found in the center of the trimming window.
99
Fade in/out (4, 5): These buttons adjust the upper fade handles of an object.
Object content (3): Here you can move the video material to be played without changing the object length.
Position (2): Moves the object on the track.
First frame/End fade-in (7): Toggles the left monitor between the first frame of the object and the end of the transition.
Start fade-out/Last Frame (8): Toggles the right monitor between the start of the transition and the last frame of the object. www.magix.com
100 Objects
Left/right arrow buttons (1, 6): Here you can adjust the lower object handles.
Next object/cut (9, 10): The buttons below and to the right skip to the next/previous object and/or cut in the arranger. These buttons make it easy to move and trim objects in the arrangement without having to leave the trimmer.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + N
Cut trimmer
A schematic display of the selected transition and its handles can be found at the center of the trimming window.
Left arrow buttons (1): These buttons move the last frame of the first object while adjusting the second. The length of the transition remains. The display indicates the relative change in comparison with the starting situation when the trimmer was opened.
Position (2): Moves the second object. The length of the transition is changed.
This corresponds with shifting an object in the arranger.
Object content (3): Moves the movie under the second object. The length of the object and the object itself are not changed.
Crossfade (4): Changes the transition’s length between both objects. The objects remain of equal length. The length can be numerically entered.
Middle arrow buttons (5): Shifts the existing transition. Both objects remain in their positions, but the transition’s center point moves.
Transition (6): Displays the type of transition. A mouse click opens a popup window from which you can select a transition. www.magix.com
Objects
Right arrow buttons (7): Move the first frame of the second object. The first object and the transition remains. Only the length of the second object changes.
Start fade-out/Last frame (8): Switches the left monitor between the start of the transition and the last frame of the object.
First frame/End fade-in (9): Switches the right monitor between the first frame of the following object and the end of the transition.
Next cut (10)/Next object (11): The buttons below and to the right skip to the next/previous object and/or cut in the arranger. These buttons make it easy to move and trim cuts in the arrangement without having to leave the trimmer.
Keyboard shortcut: N
101
Extract sound from videos
Video with sound material appears in the arranger on two tracks as two objects (an audio object and a video object). The two objects automatically form a group.
To edit the video and audio material separately from one another, the objects
can be separated with the Ungroup (view page 286) function in the "Edit" menu
or button in the arranger. Now you can replace the audio or the video track, or process each file separately. Rejoin/regroup the tracks with the ”Export arrangement” function. www.magix.com
102 Objects
Transitions (fades)
When importing video files into the arranger, individual objects usually follow directly after one another. This is called a "hard cut". However, you can make scenes blend or “transition” into each other.
This means that for the duration of a transition, two objects are shown at once and can be mixed "faded" together in different ways. You will find numerous blends in the Media Pool’s transition directory.
Simple crossfade
A simple transition can be created in the arranger by dragging one object over another. A crossfade will be automatically created. During this standard transition, the brightness of both objects is increased, i.e. the first clip fades out while the second clip fades in. The duration of the crossfade is displayed in the arranger by white crossing lines. You can adjust the length of the crossfade by dragging the upper handle of the second object to the left or to the right.
To select a different fade click on the transition symbol displayed when an object is selected.
The fade menu opens. The transition icon will change, depending on your selection.
Fades from the Media Pool
To open the fade directory, click on the "Fade" button.
A click enables a preview of the fade on the preview monitor.
Simply drag the desired fade preset onto the border between the two objects.
Only when the mouse pointer with the transition preset is placed over a scene change will it turn into an object symbol. The object at the back will be shifted to the front to accommodate the transition.
The length of a transition is decided by you, if a transition is shortened, it means that the resulting effect is speeded up. www.magix.com
Objects
Some transitions can be adjusted even more exactly. To do so, click on the corresponding fade symbol in the Timeline or in the Storyboard and select
"Settings". Thus, an object's fade symbol in the Media Pool can represent an entire group of different effects.
The so-called alpha fades ("Iris", "Objects", "Random", etc.) are actually pre-produced black and white videos combined with the alpha keying effect.
Other fades use sound effects. Look around at all the contents to form an idea of what you can use in future projects.
103
Note : Use transitions economically! Most professional movies or TV shows use hard cuts as the rule and transitions less frequently. Videos appear unprofessional and too ornate if fade effects are added to every change of scene.
Exporting own fades
Alpha keying extends the range of transition effects used in MAGIX Movie Edit
Pro MX to produce black & white movie transitions or selected color fade-ins and fade-outs. You can create such a video from any video material (also color) by exporting it as a transition (File -> Export movie -> Export as transition).
The loaded movie is then exported as a black and white video in mxv format and stored in the fade directory. Afterwards, it will be available in the Media
Pool and the fade menu.
3D fades
General
3D effects offer exciting and varied opportunities to create transitions between two videos. 3D effects may be accessed via "Fades" in the Media Pool.
To achieve the smoothest display of 3D fades, the graphics card's acceleration function is used. 3D functions on graphics cards may be used via either of the software standards "Direct3D" or "OpenGL". These standards are both supported well by the respective graphics drivers. For this reason, these standards may be switched on or off alternately in the fade settings. www.magix.com
104 Objects
Settings
The fade settings enable the behavior and appearance of the 3D fades to be influenced. Click the corresponding fade symbol for the object and choose
"Settings" to do this.
The following options are available:
Anti-aliasing : The edges of three-dimensional objects often produce unpleasant step effects. Anti-aliasing (edge smoothing) reduces this effect, however this requires increased computing performance. The setting applies globally to all 3D fades, switching on anti-aliasing during 3D fades has the effect that all other 3D fades are also affected by this setting.
Mirror X/Y : These options enable the movement track of 3D objects to be influenced within the fades. The option "X-axis mirror" mirrors the movement of the object horizontally (along the X-axis). The option "Y-axis mirror" mirrors the movement of the object vertically (along the Y-axis).
3D series
The 3D series are a further development of 3D transitions (view page 103),
where the transitions are thematically sorted. For instance, you can let photos pop up and disappear on a notice board or make it look as if the photos were hung on the walls of a gallery.
There are several options to call up 3D series for photos or scene transitions:
Click on the "Fades -> 3D -> 3D series" button in the Media Pool. Select the desired 3D series and drag it onto the first scene or image transition where the
3D transition should start.
In the transitions menu between two scenes choose "3D series". Click on the desired 3D series to select it.
You can select how many of the subsequent fades should be replaced by the
3D series in the dialog. www.magix.com
Overview mode
Objects 105
The “Scene overview” mode is a special view that improves manageability and categorization of scenes. All scenes are listed one after the other (in multiple lines, like in a text program) and can be copied, cut, moved, deleted and inserted.
"Overview" mode does not indicate start, playback, or end markers. The scene which is currently being played has a frame around it.
The zoom slider enables the view to be enlarged or reduced.
This controller also specifies how many scenes are displayed. The smaller the preview pictures, the more will fit onto the overview.
Maximize: Use this button to maximize the scene overview to fullscreen mode. www.magix.com
106 Objects
Grid
The time range of the arrangement is displayed by the length of the horizontal track. A timeline with a grid appears above the first track, sectioning the track.
This includes time increments in the units hours: minutes: seconds: frames.
Snap
The arranger interface features a frame-exact snap grid. This ensures that video and image objects snap exactly to the borders of a frame.
The snap stages depend on the frame rate specified in the movie settings ("File
-> Settings -> Movie"). Choose between Europe's standard frame rate for PAL
(25 frames per second) and America's and Japan's standard frame rate NTSC
(29.97 frames per second) or any other manually set frame rate.
When moving an object, the position display indicates at which frame the first image of the object is shown. www.magix.com
Objects
The position is displayed in the form of a tooltip when moving the object.
This informs concerning the
"hours:minutes:seconds:frame".
In addition to the constantly active frame grid, an object grid may also be activated. This ensures that two consecutive objects will seamlessly snap together even if they are on different tracks. This avoids undesired gaps or overlaps.
The object grid may be activated/deactivated via the magnet symbol in the lower toolbar.
107
Zoom
Using the context menu, you can minimize or maximize the video monitor up to fullscreen view.
The video image in the video monitor can be minimized and maximized with the help of the zoom button. This comes into use (view
page 148) especially during effect
animation.
Note : This zoom applies only to the current view in the preview monitor and will not be applied as a video effect. www.magix.com
108 Markers
Markers
In MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX you can set various types of markers within your project.
The Lock button (at the very front, next to the time ruler) lets you lock all markers (jump markers, chapter markers) against accidental moving or deleting.
Playback marker
The playback marker indicates the point from which the material – either the arrangement or a selected file from the
Media Pool – will be played back. There is a playback marker below each preview monitor and an additional one above the timeline in the arranger.
The playback marker is displayed as a red triangle below the monitors. In the arranger it is displayed as a red triangle.
In order to move the playback marker, simply double click on the desired area below the monitor. Alternatively, you can click on the playback marker and move it by dragging it with the mouse. While being moved, the current image will appear on the monitor, letting you see exactly where in the material you are located.
The playback marker in the video monitor can also be moved by clicking on the lower section of the time scale in the arranger. The playback marker will also be moved on the program monitor, as both markers are coupled to each other.
The exact position of the playback marker can be seen in the time display at the top left, below the corresponding monitor. There, you can change the displayed values (Hour:Minute:Second:Frame) per mouse click to reach a certain point in time. Simply enter the desired value and the playback marker will jump to the corresponding position.
Tip : In the "Playback" tab under "File -> Settings -> Program", you can set whether repeatedly pressing the space bar resets the playback marker to the current position or moves it to the original position. www.magix.com
Markers
Project markers
The "Edit" menu or the keyboard shortcut "Shift + numerical keys 1-0 (0 for the
tenth marker) allow you to set a project marker (view page 288) at the current
position of the playback marker. They function as a mental marker or indicate certain positions or events within the project.
After selecting the menu item, a dialog appears to input a name for the marker to be created. The first ten project markers may be accessed via Ctrl + number keys 1-0. This allows you to jump to a particular position of a longer video immediately, without scrolling and searching.
Project markers may be deleted or renamed via the context menu at any time.
This does not provide direct influence on the result, but they do make the workflow much easier.
109
Area marker (in and out points)
Area markers are the start markers (in-points) and end markers (out-points).
The serve to mark a certain area, which will be played back by pressing the
"area playback" button at the bottom of the corresponding monitor.
To the left, you see a start marker, and to the right, an end marker.
The area markers in the arrangement serve to indicate the paste position of new video or sound material.
Hint: The value between both markers shows the length of the selected area following the pattern of Hours:Minutes:Seconds:Frames.
Ranges in the video monitor
There are various options for changing the playback area and the in/out points.
Set the playback marker at the desired position and press "Set range start" or
"Set range end" underneath the monitor to set the in and out points.
Click on one of the markers below the monitor and move it to the desired position by dragging it. www.magix.com
110 Markers
Click one of the markers in the upper-most bar in the arranger and drag it.
Right clicking on the bar moves the out point to the position of the mouse cursor. The area grows or shrinks in size correspondingly. Left clicking moves the in point, whereby the area size stays constant (out point is moved as well).
You can adjust the position of the entire range by clicking the blue bar between the markers and moving it by dragging while holding down "Ctrl".
Keyboard shortcut:
Set the start of the range (in point) at the position of the playback marker: "I"
Set the end of the range (out point) at the position of the playback marker: "O"
Chapter markers
The chapter marker defines the start of a new chapter. Chapters serve to improve navigation when burning the project to disc.
The following options are provided via "Edit -> Marker" or by right-clicking on the playback marker.
Marker > Set chapter marker
Places a chapter marker at the position of the playback marker. This creates a chapter entry in the disc menu in case the movie is being burned to disc.
You can rename the chapter markers by right clicking and selecting "Rename".
The new name will appear in the chapter menu (view page 242).
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + Enter www.magix.com
Markers
Marker > Automatic chapter markers
This option automatically sets chapter markers in the arrangement according to specific rules that will then appear in the film menu of a disc as chapters.
This is useful if a disc should be burned immediately after recording.
111
There is a selection of options available for automatic chapter generation:
At the beginning of the movie : The movie only contains one chapter in this case.
At the start of objects on a track...
: Every object in a track creates a chapter; track 1 is preset.
At the position of existing title objects : Subtitles, for instance, as faded-in subheadings, give the position of the chapter markers.
Provide interval (in minutes)/provide quantity : If the chapters are separated without any particular method and are just needed for quicker navigation, chapter markers may also be inserted in pre-defined intervals or as a pre-defined number of chapter markers. www.magix.com
112 Markers
Titling of chapter markers : To title the chapter markers, a user-defined name featuring consecutive numbers or the object name or text from the text objects may be used.
Optionally, existing chapter markers may be deleted and the automatic chapter marker function may be limited to the area between the start and end markers.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + Enter
Marker > Delete (all) chapter markers
Delete one or all chapter markers. This removes chapter entries in the disc menu if the film is burned to disc.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + Enter
Scene markers
Scene markers separate a complete video into scenes. You can load any video into MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX and have it divided into scenes.
Simply drag the desired video into the arranger. Then, right click on the video and select "Scene recognition". The following dialog appears:
After clicking "Start search", an overview of the detected scenes will be displayed underneath the scene control. www.magix.com
Markers
Delete scene markers : Here you can delete individual markers by selecting them from a list.
Delete all markers : Deletes all project markers.
Action on OK : You have three possibilities: Either MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX splits your video into individual scenes ("Cut at all markers"), you select a scene and cut only at this position ("Cut at selected marker") or you can save the scenes as "Takes".
After deciding in favor of one of these options, red scene markers will appear on the timeline in the arranger. The scenes can then be split according to the selected option and edited.
Note : An important difference between a scene and a chapter marker is that a scene marker can be set only within a continuous video, while a chapter marker can include several videos consecutive videos.
113
Additional information about scene recognition is provided in chapter "Insert
objects into the project (view page 201)".
Keyboard shortcut for scene detection: Shift + Z
Ad markers
Ad markers indicate detected ad pauses. For more on this, please read the "Search for and remove ads"
www.magix.com
114 Multi-cam editing
Multi-cam editing
Multi-cam editing enables easy cutting of various recordings of the same scene from different camera perspectives. The preview monitor shows the image material from two sources next to each other, from which the "program" can be cut in real time using your mouse – just like in a real studio.
Preparation
Multicam editing is a special arranger mode. The top two tracks serve as target tracks for copying sound and video from two different source tracks. The two top tracks must be empty when switching into the multicam mode, otherwise existing objects will be moved to a different track.
Next, load various video recordings of the same scene one under the other starting on track 3 in the arranger.
It is important that the individual sources are synchronized to each other exactly. It is best to find a noticeable movement, or an "o" sound, if audio was recorded.
Hint: To localize the sound in the audio track exactly, you may have to create a wave display of the track. Right click on the sound track and choose "Create wave form display".
You can use a clapperboard during filming, since this offers both sound and motion; an actor's clapping in front of running camera before the start of the scene is also helpful. Set a grid point at this position in the object ("Alt + Shift +
P"). You can now move the source objects over each other, so that the grid points are aligned.
Two video sources with sound tracks can be automatically synchronized using their audio material. Move the video and audio objects with the mouse to the right position, until the sound of both videos is exactly synchronous.
It is also important that you make all effect settings for the output material (e.g. video or audio cleaning) before the multicam edit on the objects on the source
track and on the master audio track (view page 117). These effects will be
transferred to the objects in the target track with the edit. Otherwise, you will have to apply the effects from every single object to the target track. www.magix.com
Multi-cam editing
You can activate "Multicam" mode with this button or with the
"Multicam" command in the "Edit" menu.
Source tracks and preview images
The assignment of tracks as source tracks for the multicam cut takes place automatically. When the multicam mode is activated, the source tracks will be assigned to all tracks containing video objects starting from track 3.
You can also conduct or change the assignment manually. To do so, right click on the trackbox of the corresponding track to active or deactivate a track as a source track. In this way, you can use more than two tracks for multicam editing, but no more than two simultaneously. The source tracks are marked using color.
115
A preview appears in the program monitor for every assigned track, and the source track's color corresponds to the preview images so that you can quickly assign each preview image.
If the objects created using multicam cut are located on the target track, a preview image of the corresponding source track highlighted with a yellow frame will be shown for length of playback. www.magix.com
116 Multi-cam editing
Multicam edit functions
You can edit various sources in the the target track during playback in real time or during stopped playback.
Real-time Multicam editing
You can edit various sources together during playback in real time:
Start playback.
Click on the desired source in the preview monitor. The corresponding video is added into the target track starting from this time point.
To switch the source, click in the source monitor on another source. A new object will be created using the new source from this point in the target track.
You can repeat this process as often as you like.
For precise editing in the target track, use the usual edit functions or the
Trimmer. Keep in mind that as long as you are in Multicam mode, only the object borders are moved, and not the objects themselves. Otherwise, gaps or image jumps could form while you use the Multicam edit function again later.
Replacing an object's source
Replacing an object's video material in the target track with another source:
Select the object for which the source is to be replaced in the target track.
Click the source you want to replace the video material with in the source monitor object.
The video material will now be replaced by the new source. The project length is not changed.
Insert cut
Insert material from one of the sources between any position on the target track and the next object.
Place the playback marker at the desired position.
Click on the desired source in the preview monitor.
The material from this source will now be inserted into the target track. The new object ends at the next object. The portion below an existing object is overwritten in the process. www.magix.com
Multi-cam editing
Overwrite range
You can overwrite a selected area of the target track with one of the source videos.
At the upper edge of the arranger, select an area to edit by determining the in point by clicking with the left mouse button and the out point by right clicking.
Or use the corresponding buttons in the transport control.
Click the desired source in the program monitor.
The target track will be overwritten with the video material from the selected source in the selected area.
Master audio track
Normally, videos in the source track are edited together with their audio tracks.
Since the original sound can differentiate from camera to camera due to different camera positions, you will probably prefer using either the soundtrack from only one camera for all settings, or to replace the soundtrack completely
(for music videos, for example, you will use the studio version of the original track).
Right click on the track box of one of the source audio tracks or a different audio track and select "Multicam: Master audio track" from the context menu to assign a master audio track for multicam editing. The master audio track will be appear in a dark color.
Now, during every multicam cut, material from the master audio track will be inserted on track 2, independent of the source track used.
117 www.magix.com
118
Title
Title
Titles can be used for many applications: as a running text (ticker), subtitles, speech and thought bubbles, to display date and time, and much more.
Creating titles using a template
The Media Pool includes the tab "Title" with folders filled with additional, thematically named title templates.
Open one of these entries and select any title template. A simple mouse click provides a preview, and double clicking creates a title object using the template.
Note : Templates may be applied to an existing title object. Settings outside of the text will be lost!
Creating titles without a template
Try clicking on the entry "General" under "Title" in the Media Pool.
Next, click in the video monitor on the location where the title should be positioned.
Next, simply enter the text via your keyboard.
After the text has been entered, click the check mark in the preview monitor to confirm your entry.
You can later format your title in the Title Editor in the Media Pool. www.magix.com
Title
They can be displayed in all kinds of fonts and colors.
119
If you want to format individual words or letters, select them with the mouse and choose a different format or color.
If no selection is made, the entire text will be formatted.
You can open the Title Editor via the T button.
Edit title
Click again on the title in the video monitor window or the title object in
"Timeline" mode.
Now change the text however you like.
Confirm your entry by clicking the check mark next to the positioning frame.
Positioning titles
Click in the video monitor once on the title; a positioning frame will appear.
Simply move the positioning frame via drag & drop.
The size of the positioning frame may be adjusted via the corners, and the size of the text will also change accordingly. www.magix.com
120 Title
Clicking the "Center position" buttons in the Media Pool under
"Title -> General" puts the title exactly in the middle.
Advanced settings
Only use visible TV area : The text will be zoomed so that it will always be within the TV's limits, which is specified in the Movie effect settings (view page
Background: Specify here whether the text's background should appear black or white. This is only meaningful if no other video or image object is in the background.
Text effects: Here you can edit different text effects in detail. One color may be set for each effect.
Shadow : The position of the shadow may be set on the horizontal and vertical axes.
Transparency makes the background "shine through" more or less.
Soften: Makes the edge of the shadow harder or softer.
Outline: A border appears around the letters in the text.
Width: You can enter the width of the frame in points.
Color: Clicking on this button opens a color selection dialog, where you can set the frame color. www.magix.com
Title
Filled in: The text will be filled with the color selected in the Title Editor. If the option is deactivated, only the frame will be visible, and the background will appear instead of the color fill.
3D: The text appears with a 3D-style outline. The width and thickness of the
3D contour (H) can be set in points.
3D text
Note: This function is available only in the Plus/Premium version.
3D text can be created directly from the title editor.
Click the title editor and then press the 3D Title button.
The title object will now be turned into a MAGIX 3D Maker object. If you have also installed MAGIX 3D Maker, the program will open when you want to edit the text. Presets are also located in the Media Pool under "Titles -> 3D". You can enter or edit text here.
Note: For more information about MAGIX 3D Maker, try its help file. You can open it by pressing "F1" from within the program.
121
Fade in date as title
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX can add a time or date (“time code”) to the picture material. To add a time code, right-click the video object and choose the
“Fade in date as title” option from the context menu.
If you’re using a DV-AVI file (a digital recording from a camcorder, for instance), the recording date will be used from the chosen place. If you’re using a different file, the creation date will be used as the time code. The title editor is then opened in order to customize the entry.
In the preview monitor context menu you will also find the "Display play time" option. This will create a time code. www.magix.com
122 Effects
Effects
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX offer a large palette of various video effects. The video effects used the most can be found directly in the Media Pool, while others can be found in the object context menu or in the "Effects" menu.
Apply effects to objects
There are various approaches for applying effects:
Video and audio effect presets are loaded into the corresponding object from the Media Pool using drag & drop.
Effects that can be animated (in the Media Pool under "Effects -> Video effects
/ movement effects") will be applied directly to the objects selected beforehand as soon as changes are made in Media Pool.
This button resets all of the current effect settings.
Note : If you animated the effect using keyframes, resetting will affect the entire
animation. Individual keyframes may be deleted via click + Del (view page 145).
Transfer effects settings
The items video effects (view page 123), movement effects (view page 131),
and Stereo 3D (view page 188) on all effects pages provide the option to
transfer the current effects settings to other objects or to load previously saved settings. Use the above right arrow button to open the video effects menu.
Save/load video effects : The current effects settings may be saved for later use in other projects or previously saved settings may be loaded. A dialog allows the effects to be selected. www.magix.com
Effects
Reset video effects : Resets the effects settings for the selected object.
Copy/paste video effects : Copies or inserts the current settings as a new object. Use the dialog to select which settings should be copied.
Apply video effects to all : Copies the current effects settings to all objects in the arrangement. Use the dialog to specify which settings should be copied.
Apply video effects to all the following objects : Copies the current effects settings to all of the following objects in the arrangement. Use the dialog to specify which settings should be copied.
Load effects mask
(in the Plus version): An effects mask (view page 139) may
be loaded for a selected object.
123
Video effects in the Media Pool
Video effects in the Media Pool can always be opened independently from the selection of an object.
The program monitor displays the starting image of the video. The playback marker enables you to jump to a specific position in the video in order to check the results of the effects by starting and stopping playback.
Brightness & contrast
Auto exposure : This button automatically optimizes the exposure, contrast, and color with a few clicks. The other settings options in the dialog provide more precise results.
Brightness/contrast : Use the sliders to increase or reduce the brightness and the contrast of the picture. www.magix.com
124 Effects
Gamma : "Gamma" specifies the mean gray value provided by the various color ranges. In the preset list, select various envelope curves to edit only the dark, median, or brightest areas of the image.
The fader also sets the intensity of the brightening or darkening.
Color
White balance: An incorrect white balance can lead to an unnatural blue or red hue. Instructions: To use the white balance, click on on the button to the right of the label "White balance" and then select a point which represents white or a neutral gray to the "outside world". The color temperature is then corrected automatically.
Tip : Interesting color effects can be achieved by setting a color other than white. There is definitely room for experimentation!
Red Eye removal: Using this photo function you can remove unnatural red eyes that are the result of using a flash. Click on the eye symbol and then select the red pupils in the preview monitor using the mouse. www.magix.com
Effects
Saturation: Use the saturation slider to increase or reduce the hue proportions in the image. A newly developed algorithm is applied which makes color changes related to other parameters (for example contrast settings) in order to achieve the most natural coloration possible. With some experimenting, you can achieve some amazing results – such as turning summer images into autumnal pictures, or creating funky pop art...
Color: Select a color for coloring the image from the color chart.
Red/Green/Blue: Changes the color portion mix using the slide controller.
Color correction
125
Secondary color correction allows individual colors in video and image objects to be adjusted. The two layers, the front and background, are separated from each other using a mask. Both can be edited separately. The master layer may also be used to influence the overall image.
The foreground layer corresponds with the mask created, and editing in the background changes all of the areas outside of this mask. This is how you can create a mask for the background:
Activate "Add".
Place the mouse over the preview monitor. The mouse pointer turns into a pipette.
Click with the pipette tool on the color in the program monitor that you would like to assign to the mask. Unwanted colors can be removed from the selection again by selecting "Remove" and clicking the corresponding color. www.magix.com
126 Effects
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX displays the mask in black and white stripes to highlight the current selection.
Adjust the color using the color selection slider until you like it.
Chroma key
This section contains the mixing effects for chroma keying used to mix together a foreground and a background video to create an overlay effect.
Note : The background video must be present in the track above the object for the foreground! For example, track 1: background, track 2: foreground
Stamp : The currently selected object is "stamped" onto the video on the track above the object. This is only possible if the bottom video takes up only a part of the image, as otherwise only the bottom (currently selected) video would be visible. Normally, the object should be reduced or moved first. This is done
with the help of the "Position/size" (view page 131) effect or via the submenu
"Section" in "Effects -> Video object effects".
Color : Select the range with the color that should be transparent in the video monitor. The video is made transparent in the areas featuring this color, and the video on the top track can be seen "through" these areas.
Mix : This button mixes the two videos together. Brighter areas accumulate and quickly seem white; darker areas have less of an effect on the result.
Green/blue/water/black/white : All green/blue/black/white areas of the video below appear transparent. This studio-style effect makes it possible to "place" www.magix.com
Effects a person who has been recorded in front of a blue (or green, white or black) background into any type of landscape or background.
Alpha : This video effect uses the brightness of a video to control a cross-fading effect between two other videos on neighboring tracks. The additional videos should be arranged directly above and below the alpha-keying object.
In all black parts of the alpha-keying object, the top video is faded in, while in all white passages the bottom video is shown. Gray passages are permeable for both videos and create a mixture of the two. In the case of colored passages, the brightness of the color is used for control purposes.
Water : Only the contours of the upper video are mixed, which results in a sort of water effect.
Video level : The video level essentially changes the brightness of the video before other video effects are applied. This can have significant influence on the effects, especially in case of chroma keying. The level setting may be automated so that two videos mix dynamically with each other. Read more
about this in the chapter "Animating objects (view page 143)".
Artistic filter
127
Erosion : The image is broken-up by means of small rectangles and resembles a "patchwork".
Dilate : This works like erosion, but uses light surfaces instead of dark ones to form the rectangle. www.magix.com
128 Effects
Emboss creates a relief of the image edges, in which case strong contrast differences are interpreted as edges.
Substitution : Using the rainbow scale red, green, and blue components are exchanged. Quickly create surreal landscapes or a green face!
Shift : The color values are inverted increasingly. Blue colors turn red, and green appears purple.
Quantize : Depending on the setting, colors are either rounded up or down so that the overall number of colors is reduced. This creates interesting grids and patterns.
Color fill : Using this slider, color in the video with red, green, and blue colors
(the basic TV colors).
Contour : The image is reduced to its contours in two sizes (3 x 3 or 5 x 5). It is possible to select either vertical or horizontal contours.
Distortion
Motion : Moving parts of the image are enhanced and warped.
Echo : The moving images create an optical "echo"; previous images stand still and gradually turn paler until they completely disappear.
Whirlpool : The image is twisted into an "S" shape.
Fisheye : The perspective is distorted as if the image were viewed through a fisheye lens. www.magix.com
Mosaic : The video is depicted as a mosaic.
Effects
Lens : The image is dynamically distorted at the edges.
Sand : The image is depicted in a granulated manner.
Kaleidoscope : The left upper corner is mirrored horizontally and vertically.
Mirror horizontal/vertical center : The object is mirrored vertically or horizontally – it appears on its side or upside down.
Sharpness
129
Sharpen: The fader allows you to regulate the level of image sharpness or apply a soft filter.
Apply to: Allows you to set just how much the sharpness settings should be applied to surfaces or to edges. This enables you to effectively reduce ongoing image distortions (noise).
Artificial blur: Here you can apply various soft filters. The achieved effects are much stronger compared to simply sliding the controller under "Sharpen".
Tip: Artificial blur achieves good effects when used for transitions. To do so,
you can animate (view page 143) the first video so that it is strongly blurred
and let the second video begin with blur and slowly return to normal focus. www.magix.com
130
Speed
Effects
The playing speed can be adjusted with the slider control. The range between
0 and 1 plays the video slowly; values above 1 accelerate playback. If playing speed is increased, the object length in the arranger is automatically shortened.
Note:
You can also set keyframes (view page 143) in order to adjust the speed
of certain segments of a video. The corresponding audio material will be adjusted in accordance with the video.
Frame rate: Here you can set the video's frame rate directly. Changing it directly affects the speed factor, while moving the slider conversely results in changing video frame rate.
Algorithm: Here you can determine how the soundtrack should be treated.
"Timestretching" changes the playback speed, without influencing the pitch:
"Resampling" changes the playback speed together with the pitch (the faster the playback, the higher the pitch).
Reverse: With this button the playback direction will be reversed (with the same tempo).
Interpolate intermediate frames: Activate this option if your video is jerky as a result of being slowed down. MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX then automatically fills in missing frames so that your video can be played back smoother. www.magix.com
Movement effects in the Media Pool
Size & Position
Effects 131
Values in: Set whether the values are applied in percent or pixels.
Position
Left: Enter the start position from the left image border.
Top: Enter the start position from the top image border.
Center: Based on the current image size, the image starting points (left and top) will be positioned so that they are centered.
Note: Negative values can, of course, also be entered. The image borders will then be outside of the visible area.
Size
Width : Enter the width of the image.
Height : Enter the height of the image here.
Maximize : The image will be maximized according to the movie's resolution.
Set original size : The image will be scaled to its original size. www.magix.com
132 Effects
Retain proportions : This option makes sure that the image will not be stretched or distorted. The proportions of width to height will remain the same.
The size and the position of the image can be roughly entered in the program monitor by simply moving the image into it and dragging on the handles. The frame of the video monitor with handles can also be moved with the keyboard.
Keyboard shortcuts for moving the edges of the frame that are visible in the video monitor:
Nudge the screen 1 pixel:
Nudge the screen 5 percent:
Arrow keys
Shift + arrow keys
For animated movement effects, it often makes sense to zoom out of the video monitor and use the resulting workspace to, for example, let a minimized image or text object move through the picture.
Keyboard shortcuts for the preview picture:
Thumbnail zoom in/out:
Move thumbnail:
Ctrl + mouse wheel
Ctrl + left mouse button + drag
See the "Animation from outside of the image" (view page 148) section for
more detail.
Section
Sections may be used to display only a portion of the image.
Note : In order to move the section with a movement effect across the image, please refer to the following section "Camera/zoom". www.magix.com
Effects
The program monitor enables an image section to be specified. Use the eight handles to reduce the frame displayed in the monitor and move it to the desired position.
Preview: With this button you can preview how a segment will look like in the movie. Click on this button a second time in order to keep editing this segment.
Keep proportions : In this menu, you can select the format for the section. The format of the original picture is used as the default.
Fill screen : If this check box is selected, the section will be zoomed to fullscreen. If this option is deactivated, only the section of the image within the frame will be displayed and the edge will remain black or filled with the object behind it.
133
Camera/zoom
With this effect, you can move a previously selected frame inside the image, creating an impression of camera movement or zoom.
Movement in direction
Determine the direction in which the selected section or image will move in the process during the time selected under "time period". In addition to horizontal and vertical movements, diagonal movements are also possible.
Preview : Displays a preview of the section at the playback marker location. www.magix.com
134 Effects
Zoom out : The selected picture section is displayed and is then zoomed out to display the entire picture according to the time set in “Length of movement”. If no portion is previously set, a central portion of 50% of the picture is set.
Zoom in : The entire picture is displayed and then zoomed in to show only a smaller picture section according to the time set in
“Length of movement”. If no portion is previously set, a central portion of 50% of the picture is set.
Direction & time
The option selected here sets the position where the keyframes of each movement effect are set by default. You determine the positions where a movements begins and ends.
Note : Automatically placed keyframes may be edited retroactively, and the option will then be set to "User defined". Read the section "Change the
keyframes of an effect after the fact (view page 144)" in the chapter "Animate
objects".
Reset: This option applies a static zoom to show the selected section of the picture only.
The size and the position of the image can be roughly entered in the program monitor by simply moving the image into it and dragging on the handles. The frame of the video monitor with handles can also be moved with the keyboard.
Keyboard shortcuts for moving the edges of the frame that are visible in the video monitor:
Nudge the screen 1 pixel:
Nudge the screen 5 percent:
Arrow keys
Shift + arrow keys
For animated movement effects, it often makes sense to zoom out of the video monitor and use the resulting workspace to, for example, let a minimized image or text object move through the picture.
Keyboard shortcuts for the preview picture:
Thumbnail zoom in/out:
Move thumbnail:
Ctrl + mouse wheel
Ctrl + left mouse button + drag www.magix.com
Effects
See the "Animation from outside of the image" (view page 148) section for
more detail.
Rotation/Mirror
135
Rotate
Rotates the image on the horizontal axis.
Rotates the image on the vertical axis.
Rotates the image around its center point.
Straighten horizon
The image can be rotated around the axis via the slider. The image is automatically zoomed to avoid black edges.
Show guidelines : Activating this check box displays a grid in the program monitor for orientation during horizontal straightening. www.magix.com
136 Effects
Rotate/Flip
Mirrors the image on the vertical axis.
Mirrors the image on the horizontal axis.
Rotates the image 90° clockwise.
Rotates the image 90° counterclockwise.
3D distortion
This enables the perspective of images to be distorted and moved. This produces a 3D impression by causing several components of the image to appear further in front of others.
Enter the individual corner points numerically or move them in the program monitor using the mouse here.
Note : Compared to Stereo3D, this does not involve genuine 3D positioning.
The image is only distorted so that it appears three-dimensional on a normal two-dimensional monitor.
Stereo3D in the Media Pool
This accesses the program's Stereo 3D functionality. Please read the
corresponding chapter "Stereo 3D". (view page 188)
Note: This function is available only in the Plus/Premium version. www.magix.com
Effects
Audio effects in the Media Pool
The Media Pool offers various opportunities to add effects to your audio objects. Another advantage of this so-called "object-oriented" working method is that automations are moved automatically with objects when they are moved, since they are attached to the object and not to the track itself.
See the "Audio effects" (view page 158) section below for more detail.
Another advantage of this so-called "object-oriented" working method is that automations are moved automatically with objects when they are moved, since they are attached to the object and not to the track itself.
General
Under "Effects -> Audio effects
-> General", you will find audio effects that can be animated using effects curves (view page
effect settings can be changed during playback.
137
Effect curves are always object related, i.e. they only apply to one object and are moved or copied together with the object.
Note : The faders AUX 1 and AUX 2 control the volume at which the object's signal is sent to the corresponding FX tracks in the mixer.
Audio Cleaning (view page 159), Echo/Reverb (view page 164), and
Timestrech/Resample can also be accessed here.
Note : Volume and balance curves are also present in the track. The set values in the curve are also active, respectively. www.magix.com
138 Effects
Audio effect templates
Here you'll find a broad palette of effects settings which you can add to audio objects via drag & drop.
Design elements in the Media Pool
In this category you will find a large selection of decorative elements: templates for image juxtapositions (multiple picture-in-picture) and collages, moving objects (balloons flying through the frame, trains moving across the picture, snowfall....), color fields for your own backgrounds, intro videos, outro videos, visuals...
You should first look through all the options and take stock of what there is.
Open the categories one after the other to get a general impression. You can see a preview of all deco elements.
A simple example for use are the frames (Media Pool > Effects > Design elements > Image objects > Frames“). These are much like picture-frames that can be modified by video mix effects. Simply drag them directly on an object, which will then appear as if inside a picture frame.
The design elements create own objects on a different track. You can use the lower handles to adjust the size of the borders to fit any length of the video.
You can also achieve interesting effects by inserting and discarding borders within a video.
Personalized templates in the Media Pool
You personal effects configurations in the Media Pool can be saved and applied again later. You can reach these customized configurations in the
Media Pool folder "Effects > My templates". They may be dragged onto objects as usual.
First, this folder will be empty, of course, because you still have to create your own configurations. www.magix.com
Effects
Effects masks (Plus/Premium version)
Effects masks help you to apply effects in different areas of one video image with varying intensity. A specific image is used as a mask to determine the specific areas where the effect should be applied.
Typical applications include:
Image optimizations. A typical example is a horizontal pan with a horizon, where the upper or lower area of the image is brightened or colored in.
Eye-catching color gradients, colorations, etc.
Special effects such as automatic license plate anonymization.
Effects masks are regular image objects, and as such may be animated or attached to a certain image position to use them as moving video images.
Note: This function is available only in the Plus/Premium version.
Proceed as follows:
Select the object in the arrangement to apply the effects mask to.
Open the desired effects page in the Media Pool.
Click on the down arrow button and select the "Load effect mask" entry from the menu.
When using color images, the brightness values are used. The lighter the area in the effect mask is, the stronger the effect will be applied: black means no effect, white means full effect strength.
To apply the mask at a certain position in the video, you must edit it again.
There are many options available for editing effects masks:
You can define the size and the position of the effect mask in such a way, that the mask fits exactly over the image element to be edited. Please read more
on this in the section "Position/size" (view page 131).
139 www.magix.com
140 Effects
You can attach the mask to the position in the video so that it moves together with the image element. To find out more, read "Attach to picture position in
Or animate the effect mask object directly. Read more about this in the
chapter "Animate effects" (view page 143).
In the effects overview, the effects mask can be deactivated for certain effects. The effects are applied to the whole image.
Click on the down arrow button again and select the "Delete effect mask" entry from the menu to remove the effect mask.
T
Tip : You can use your own effects masks, too. Any image or photo in JPG format can be used. You can draw a fitting image in a graphics program, save it as a JPEG and load it using the "Load effects mask" option in Movie Edit
Pro.
Additional effects
Video effects plug-ins are additional programs of third-party manufacturers that can be used to add additional video effects to video objects. MAGIX Movie Edit
Pro MX supports the plug-in format of the freeware video editing software
"VirtualDub", as well as the "VitaScene" and "Adorage" program by "proDAD".
A selection of tested VirtualDub plug-ins (.vdf files, also called VirtualDub filters) and Adorage plug-ins can be downloaded as an installer package directly from within MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX.
Important examples of using plug-ins are, for instance, removing channel logos, disturbances or adding special effects.
Using video effect plug-ins
In order to be able to use plug-ins, they must be installed first. MAGIX Movie
Edit Pro MX checks whether plug-ins are already available. If not, it will offer to download them from the Internet or to set the plug-in path manually.
In order to use a video effect plug-in, select the video or image object first, then open "Effects -> Extra effects -> Plug-in manager" in the Media Pool menu. This lists all available plug-ins on the right side of the dialog. www.magix.com
Video plug-ins manager
Effects 141
Effects templates for plug-ins : MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX does not include plug-ins due to licensing reasons. However, presets for removing the channel logo are provided for some TV channels with the "logoaway" plug-in.
You can save your settings by pressing the " Save " button and remove them by pressing " Delete ".
Available plug-ins : All available plug-ins are listed here.
Add plug-in : The selected plug-in is added to the editing chain ("Plug-ins for the current object" list on the right). You may load as many plug-ins as you like simultaneously. These will be processed according to the list sequence. The plug-in order in the list may be changed via drag & drop.
Plug-in settings : Open the settings dialog for the selected plug-in here. All of the plug-in settings in the entire list may be saved as a preset (effect templates for plug-ins) .
Advanced...
: Opens the Advanced settings dialog.
Navigation buttons : Switch to the previous or next movie via the navigation buttons in the lower part of the dialog.
Apply from previous : Uses the settings of the most recently set movie. This option is only active if you are editing objects in sequence with the navigation buttons (see above). www.magix.com
142 Effects
OK : The adjustments made to the settings will be applied to the current movie.
Apply to all : The effects will be applied to all video and picture objects in the movie.
Cancel : Closes the dialog; the settings will not be applied.
Advanced...
In the "Advanced" dialog, you can specify the search path for plug-ins. MAGIX
Movie Edit Pro MX checks these for available plug-in files at program start and adds these to the list of available plug-ins. " Add search path " adds new search paths, and " Delete searchpath " removes them from the list again.
Check file extension : Accelerates the search for new plug-ins if a larger number of plug-ins are available by not checking if they are valid.
Scan sub-directories : Extends the search to subfolders below the selected paths.
Local settings
Recalculate video effects plug-in on bitmaps for each frame dynamically : If you apply a plug-in to a bitmap (image), then this option must be activated in case the plug-in creates moving effects. www.magix.com
Effects
Animate effects
The "Effects" tab under "Video effects" and "Movement effects" provide you with the effects which can animated using keyframes.
The following objects can be animated:
Video objects
Image objects (still images)
Title objects
Audio objects (in the Media Pool under "Effects" > "Audio effects" > "General")
MAGIX 3D Maker objects (3D texts)
Visual objects
Preparing animations
First, select the object in the arranger to animate. For complex animations, we recommend placing a marker beforehand for orientation.
In the Media Pool, open the "Effects" tab and click on the effect you would like to animate under "Video effects" or "Movement effects".
If necessary, set up the effect however you would like it for the start of the animation.
Using this button, at the bottom of the Media Pool, a timeline may be shown or hidden. You can see here which animated effects are currently applied to the selected object. Keyframes may be placed, selected, moved, and deleted.
There are two stippled lines in the timeline to help you orientate yourself while you edit movement. These lines will help you recognize the start or end of the transition.
143
Place keyframe
Click the timeline to set the playback marker at the locations where a keyframe should be added.
Note : You can also use the timeline in the arranger for exact positioning. Using
project markers (view page 109) is recommended in this case.
www.magix.com
144 Effects
This button places keyframes for all parameters required in the animation.
Additional keyframes may be added simply by placing the playback marker at the next keyframe location and changing the effects parameters directly.
The positioned keyframes may also be retroactively moved via drag & drop.
Copy keyframe
Select the keyframes to be copied by clicking them and then press the "Copy" button.
Next, set the playback marker at the location for insertion and the press the "Insert" button.
Display keyframes of individual parameters
Multiple keyframes are added simultaneously to effects if they include multiple parameters.
Click the small arrow beside the name of the animated effect to display all of its parameters.
Now all keyframes of the effects parameter can be individually moved, deleted, activated, and deactivated.
Note : Only those parameters are listed which are used for the animation. As soon as another parameter is required for editing the effect, it becomes visible to you here.
Retroactively editing an effect's keyframes
Previously set keyframes can be retroactively and temporarily moved and their values edited.
Keyframes may be moved via drag & drop. Simply click on the keyframe to be moved and drag it to the desired position.
To change an effects setting for an already positioned keyframe, click the keyframe and adjust the effect in the Media Pool. www.magix.com
Effects
Soft movement
Normally, a hard, unnatural pan is the result of set keyframes.
This option makes sure that the progression of these movements is executed more softly and more naturally.
It lets you activate the entire parameter group as well as individual parameter curves.
Delete keyframe
Select the keyframe to be deleted by clicking it.
145
This button removes the selected keyframe.
Editing an effects curve in the object
Activate effects curve : For each of animated effects parameter, a curve is created and placed over the object. Click this button to display the effects curve on the object.
Edit curve points: The curve point can either be edited with the individual curve points (in "Standard" mouse mode) or by freely drawing the effect curve (in
"Curve" mouse mode).
New curve points can be added to the curve in "Standard" mode via "Ctrl +
Shift" and clicking; existing ones can be deleted in the same way. Every curve point can be moved with the mouse horizontally and vertically.
Note : The buttons for activating effects curves are first displayed once the first keyframe has been placed. www.magix.com
146 Effects
Effects curves - Additional functions
The context menu can also be opened via the small arrow beside the effects indicator.
Delete effects : Removes the selected effect completely.
Delete effects curve : Removes the effects curve to be created again.
Copy effects curve : The effects curve is copied to the clipboard to be used at other positions.
Insert effects curve : A previously copied effects curve can be inserted elsewhere with this function at any time. This may be in the same object or in another object.
Note : If you would like to insert the curve into a longer or shorter object, then think about setting the option "Connect curve length with object length" correctly before copying .
Connect curve length with object length : If this option is set, then changes to object length will affect the effects curve accordingly.
In practice, this behavior is needed rarely, for example if objects are stretched or compressed. The option is deactivated by default for this reason.
Load effects curve : A previously saved effects curve may be loaded via this menu item. This is useful, for example, if you have added your own default animations.
Caution!
The current effects curve will be overwritten as another one is loaded.
Save effects curves : Effects curves can be saved as a separate file. This is useful, for example, if you want to add your own default animations and simply load them again at other positions again.
Tip : Be aware that during saving the setting "Connect curve length with object length" is saved as well and applied during loading. www.magix.com
Effects
Edit effect curve
This dialog serves to stretch, compress and move effect curves within an object. The info bar of the dialog will display the effect, whose automation curve is currently being edited.
Move position
Time axis: With each click on the arrow, you can move the effect curve forward or back by the displayed time value.
Effect: Every click on the arrow up or down moves the effect curve by the entered value. Depending on the effect, it is possible to enter exact or percent values.
Stretching & compressing
Time axis: The effect curve will be stretched or compressed by the entered time value. Invert reverses the curve on the time axis and reinserts it in
"reverse". The entire object duration will be considered.
Effect: The effect curve is stretched or compressed in its values, no time-related editing takes place. The selected option (see table) is decisive in editing.
Mirror: The entire curve is mirrored along the X-axis, whose position is determined by the following option (see table).
... around the object center: The X-axis lies exactly at the center of the object.
...at the center of the curve: The X-axis lies between the upper and lower automation point.
...at the curve minimum:
The X-axis lies at the level of the lowest automation point.
147 www.magix.com
148 Effects
...at the curve maximum:
The X-axis lies at the level of the highest automation point.
Animation from outside the image
Animated effects come in handy to let titles or images "fly" through the picture.
It is recommended to set the in- and out-points of the animation outside the frame of the image.
You will need a video object and a second object to be animated, for example a title or a small object that is to fly through the video image.
Let's roll:
Click on the preview monitor and zoom out of the video image (Ctrl + mouse wheel). This creates working room on the edge of the minimized preview image.
Select the "Position/size (view page 131)" effect.
Move the object to be animated to the work space where the animation should start, for example to the left of the preview image:
Position the playback marker at the position where the animation should start.
Create a keyframe for the animation start. www.magix.com
Effects
Move the object to be animated to the work space where the animation should end, for example to the right of the preview image.
Position the playback marker at the position where the object to be animated should disappear from the image.
Create a second keyframe for the animation end and play back the result.
The object to be animated should now be flying from left to right through the video picture!
149
Attach to picture position in the video
You can attach a video, picture or text object to moved picture content of another video. The attached object automatically completes the movement of a picture element from the film, making it appear magnetic. For example, you could use this method to insert a hat that stays on someone's head throughout, even if the person hops through the picture.
Let's roll:
Place an overlay object (e.g. a photo of a hat) on a track below a video with a moving image element (e.g. a walking person).
Right click the object and select the "Attach to picture position in the video" movie point.
Then click "Continue" in the dialog that appears.
Note : If you want to attach two objects, e.g. a title and a speech bubble, an additional dialog appears, which lets you select the objects you want to attach to your video.
The next dialog asks you to draw a frame around the image content to be tracked. The content should have high contrast to its background.
Movement will be automatically calculated and a series of keyframes that control the position and size of the effect according to your wishes will be generated. www.magix.com
150 Effects
Image stabilization
The motion stabilizer reduces unsteady camera motion and helps to smooth pans. This option can be accessed from the context menu of a video object or the "Effects" menu > "Open video objects".
Functionality
Image stabilization balances undesired picture movements. The motion stabilizer equalizes inadvertent movements in the image by moving the image in the opposite direction in accordance with the wrong movements. This produces unusable edges in the footage that are cut off automatically, and black strips, which are then removed using a zoom shot. The result: A clearly more stable, almost imperceptibly larger picture.
Application
First you have to check the movie material for shaky scenes. To do this click on the "Stabilize" button. Based on the preset parameters, a relative shift between the pictures is calculated. After concluding the analysis, take a look at the suggested correction, then use the slider for further adjustments. Once you are happy with the final correction click OK. If the first scan did not provide a satisfactory result, try changing the parameters below and repeat the process.
Image stabilization dialog www.magix.com
Effects
Stabilization radius for analysis : To prevent the image stabilizer from recognizing every camera movement as unwanted shakiness, you can determine the radius within which movement is accepted; the larger the stabilization radius, the more shakiness is corrected. Changing this parameter will require re-analysis of the source footage.
Section of analysis : This area determines the area of the footage that should be analyzed. The center of the image is preset. If shaking occurs in one area more than in another, then you can move the analysis area (e.g. a foreground element at the edge is especially shaky). To do this, use the mouse to
“capture” the shaky area. The smaller the area, the quicker the analysis will be calculated. Generally, changing this parameter will require re-analysis of the source footage.
Maximum displacement : Correction moves the image accordingly to the shaking movements. This means that the edge of the image will be removed.
This value determines how large the edge area is which may be cut away by the stabilization feature; the smaller the value, the less movement correction.
Changes to this value are immediately applied.
Temporal smoothing : This value determines the speed of the movements considered shaky. This allows you to differentiate between a panning shot and a nervous hand-held shot. Changes to this value are immediately applied.
Cancel : Exits the dialog without accepting changes to settings.
Reset : Resets the current settings.
151
Image improvements for the entire movie
You can open the effects from the the settings via the "Effects" menu. All of the settings made here influence the entire movie. Settings are made separately for each individual movie in the project.
On the right, you'll see a preview of the current setting. Use the position slider to jump to different positions in the movie or to various scenes in order to see how the selected setting affects the image material.
Brightness/Contrast
Brightness: Use the sliders to reduce or increase the objects' brightness.
Selective brightness (gamma): “Gamma” determines the mean gray scale that can be calculated from the various color ranges. "Selective brightness" is the www.magix.com
152 Effects most important function for image improvement. In the preset list, select the various envelope curves to edit only the dark, median, or brightest areas of the image.
Using the fader you can also set the power of the brightness/darkness adjustments.
Contrast: You can increase or lower the object's contrast.
Adjust color space : This option is effective against powerful colors that violate
TV standards and can no longer be displayed correctly on-screen. The color saturation of the affected material is thereby reduced until the maximum permitted value is reached.
Color
Saturation: Use the saturation slider to increase or reduce the hue proportions in the image. A newly developed algorithm is applied which makes color changes related to other parameters (e.g. contrast settings) in order to achieve the most natural coloration possible.
Hue : Use the palette to select a hue for coloring in the picture.
Red/green/blue : Changes the color mix using the slide controller.
Sharpness
This fader allows you to regulate the level of image sharpness.
The "fine tuning" option allows you to determine the level of focus for particular surfaces or borders.
Anti-flickering filter intensity: The anti-flickering filter affects only still images. It is especially intended for zooms in images with many edges and transitions with high contrast (e.g. fences, bars, brick walls). High-frequency images such as these begin to flicker when they are reduced in size. This filter smoothes these edges somewhat.
You should set the intensity of the anti-flickering filter according to your preferences, because smoothing is always a compromise between good contrast and fluid image sequence during playback.
TV picture
This option provides optimal adjustment of the image size for a real television screen (anti-cropping). Without this adjustment, the screen could cut off edges of the image in some cases. www.magix.com
Effects
Fade in TV display area in the preview monitor : This option displays the image borders of the television as lines in the preview monitor. The four image borders of the TV area may be specified via the four input fields. Of course, the real size of the TV image must be familiar for this. The following process is available to determine this:
The four input fields also enable the borders of the four sides to be adjusted freely in percent. In this case, the best approach is to determine a balance between reduction, bar formation, and the image section:
If all four edges feature the same value, then the image will be reduced proportionately. In this case no distortions will occur, but there will be bars along the edges.
If different values are entered for the 4 fields, the image size is reduced disproportionately. This will distort the image.
Apply margin to : With this option, the entered values for the four borders are applied as an image reduction. The result may be checked immediately in the preview monitor.
Determining the visible TV frame size
To determine the picture properties of your television as well as optimal image size editor settings, you should perform a test run:
Load the project "Visible TV image" from the folder "My Media -> Projects ->
Visible TV image" in the Media Pool.
Play back the film and read the instructions on the video screen.
Burn the project to CD or DVD
Place the disc into the player and play the film. Compare the TV picture to the picture displayed on your video screen by MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX.
Determine the proportional value of the borders cropped by the television with the four measurement scales along the edges of the test picture.
Enter the values in the "Full TV size" editor.
The image size is now optimized to your TV picture. Please note: Depending on device settings and disc media type, the cropping values may vary slightly.
153 www.magix.com
154 Audio editing
Image improvements for individual objects
The context menu or in "Effects -> Video object effects" features various adjustments for selected video and image objects.
Interpolation for interlace source material : Select this option to remove interlace artifacts from the (video) image. If, for instance, you extract still shots from a video, interlace artifacts appear in sequences which feature movement.
Anti-interface filter : Choose this option for still pictures with detailed structures and high contrast. This filter reduces line flickering during TV playback.
Border cropping offset : Select this option if the edges are cropped during playback on your television. Values stored in "Film effect settings (view page
Audio editing
In principle, any track in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX can be used as a sound track. There are no specific track types. But it is easier not to mix object types within one track.
Load and edit audio files
All importable audio files may be accessed in the Media Pool and previewed via the video monitor by a clicking on the file name.
The files may be dragged into the arranger by holding down the mouse button
(drag & drop). Tracks from audio CDs may also be integrated via drag & drop.
Edits, fine positioning, volume settings, and fading in and out may all be adjusted in the arranger using the object handles directly.
Various effect curves (view page 145) may be selected for audio tracks,
dynamically controlling selectable effects, volume or stereo panorama.
Edit volume curve
You can use volume curves to easily edit the audio track of an object as you wish.
1.
In a project, select an object, whose volume you would like to adjust. www.magix.com
Audio editing
2. Open the volume curve by going to "Effects" > "Audio object effects" >
"Volume curve".
You will now see an additional line in the audio track, the volume curve.
3.
When you touch this line with your mouse cursor, the cursor is transformed from a hand symbol to an arrow. Now if you click on the line, you will create a point (keyframe), which you can grab with the mouse cursor and drag to a lower position. This lowers the volume of the overall object.
155
4.
Create an additional point and move it down as well, lowering not the entire volume curve, but simply a section of it.
You can create as many keyframes a you wish, adjusting the volume curve section by section, until all segments play at the appropriate volume. Check whether the keyframes are positioned right by playing back the track (spacebar starts and stops playback) and listening to hear the effect of the keyframes.
If you would like to move a keyframe to the left or right, grab it with the mouse cursor and move it to the right position.
If you would like to delete keyframes, use the effect overview in the Media Pool under "Effects" > "Audio effects" > "General" as described under "Animate
objects, effect curves" (view page 143). Select the keyframe that you wish to
delete and click on the Delete button. .
Import audio CD
The steps are similar to transferring Wave files into an arrangement:
Insert an audio CD into the CD/DVD drive of the PC
Go to your CD/DVD drive in the Media Pool. The individual CD titles appear in the file list.
A simple mouse-click starts the playback of the CD title for sampling purposes
Drag & Drop the CD title into a track of the current arrangement, and it will be digitally scanned and copied to the hard-drive. The files will be saved in the www.magix.com
156 Audio editing import folder (may be specified under File > Settings > Program > Folder
(More information can be found in the section "Folders" on page 63)).
The audio object appears in the track and can be played back or edited immediately.
CD Manager
This option opens the CD Manager where you can select tracks from Audio
CDs and partially or fully import them into the arrangement. You can also select and configure the CD-R if you have more than one drive.
The CD Manager lets you import audio data using most CD and DVD drives.
You may have to contact your technical support to find out which drive is suitable. Data is imported entirely digital. Audio tracks are imported into the arrangement as wave files. The files are saved in the import folder. (Program
settings -> Folders (More information can be found in the section "Folders" on page 63)).
To import audio tracks you should proceed as follows:
Select the desired CD-R drive if you have installed more than one drive.
Click on the "Track list" button.
Select the desired title from the track list (using the key combination Shift or
Alt and the cursor keys).
Click on "Save selected tracks... ". The audio material is now copied from the
CD drive onto hard disk. The progress is displayed.
Close the track and drive lists. In your arrangement there are now one or several new objects that contaion audio material of the disc.
Drive list dialog
Tracklist: This button opens the track list dialog for copying one or multiple tracks.
Configuration: This button opens the configuration dialog where you can make various special settings, SCSI IDs, etc.
Reset: Restores the default settings of the drive.
Add drive: Creates a new drive entry in the list, which you may wish to adjust.
Delete drive: Deletes a selected drive from the list.
Save setup: Saves the current drive list and all configuration data in a *.cfg file. www.magix.com
Audio editing
Load setup: Loads the current drive list and all configuration data from a *.cfg file.
The tracklist dialog
Copy selected track(s): This button starts audio copy. A new object is created for every track in the arrangement and the corresponding track marker is created.
Play: Starts the audio playback of the first selected track on the list (for testing).
Stop: Stops playback.
Pause: Stops playback so as to start it later from the same position using the
"Resume" button.
Resume: Resumes playback if it had been paused before.
Select all tracks: All audio tracks are selected, for instance, to copy the entire
CD. Track markers can also be made using Shift or Alt pressed together with the arrow keys. Multiple tracks can be selected by pressing "Ctrl + mouse click".
Deselect all tracks: All markers are reset.
The CD-ROM configuration dialog
Drive name: Lets you edit the name of the drive in the list. This is useful if you create more than one entry accessing the same physical drive.
Host adapter number: Lets you specify the number of your SCSI adapter - normally "0".
SCSI-ID: Lets you set the ID of your CD-ROM drive. Be sure to set the correct
ID; there is no error checking!
SCSI-LUN: Select the SCSI-LUN parameter, normally "0".
Alias: Lets you select the manufacturer type of your CD-ROM drive.
Normal copy mode: Copies the audio data without any software correction.
Sector synchronization copy mode: Copies the audio data using a correction algorithm. This is especially useful, since many CD drives have problems finding an exact position again and gaps can occur. www.magix.com
157
158 Audio editing
Burst copy mode: Optimizes the speed of the copy process; no software corrections made.
Sectors per cycle: Defines the number of audio sectors that should be read from the audio CD in a read cycle. The higher the number of sectors, the faster the copying process. Many SCSI systems have problems with more than 27 sectors.
Sync sectors: Sets the number of audio sectors that will be used for software correction. A higher number results in a better synchronization but also in a slower copying process.
Scanning CD tracks with the recording dialog
Some CD-ROM drives do not support this mode (trying digital extraction results in an error message), or they only support it with difficulty (results in audio objects with crackling noise, skips, etc.). In this case, the CD may be
"scanned" by recording it into the computer. When recording the CD to the computer, the CD titles are simply played back from the CD-ROM drive and are re-recorded as .WAV by the sound card. Before recording a CD to your computer, change the program settings in the"File -> Audio/Video options" menu. To ensure easy recording of the CD titles via the "Recording" dialog, the audio output on the CD-ROM drive must also be connected with the sound card input. This connection is usually already set up on modern multimedia
PCs. If not, this is easily done by installing a cable inside the computer case.
Audio effects
Using audio effects
Track effects
Track effects always apply to all audio objects of a track. This sets the mixer
Audio effects plug-ins
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX supports VST as well as DirectX audio plug-ins.
These are usually effects modules such as reverb, equalizer, dynamics compression, etc.
Installation
Before using audio effect plug-ins, they first have to be installed – this process may be different depending on the plug-in. VST plug-ins are typically saved in www.magix.com
Audio editing a certain directory, which must be entered in the MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX
path settings (view page 63). After the path has been indicated, MAGIX Movie
Edit Pro MX scans it for working plug-ins and offers them to be used. You can also indicated multiple locations where VST plug-ins are installed.
Using plug-ins
Two so-called slots for track effects are located in the channel strip of the mixer for the corresponding track as well as in the FX tracks.
Clicking on the small triangle will let you select an effect from the list. Select "No effect" to remove a plug-in from the slot.
Master effects
Master effects influence the mixed sum of all audio tracks. For this purpose a
Master Audio Effects Rack and further plug-ins are provided. The
Plus/Premium version includes the special MAGIX Mastering Suite (view page
Sound optimization
This option opens an editor for correcting audio material discrepancies.
Select the cleaning function you desire from the upper part of the dialog:
The equalizer (on page 162) allows you to manipulate the frequency spectrum
– perfect for cleaning up muffled dialog.
The compressor is a dynamic volume control that lends the overall sound a deeper, richer quality.
The stereo FX processor justifies the position of the sound in the stereo panorama.
DeNoiser, DeClipper, and DeHisser are professional noise reduction tools that do exactly what their titles say they do.
Presets: You can try out the suitability of a number of presets in the preset menu.
Temporarily deactivate all effects: Switches all the effects off.
Apply to all scenes : Applies the selected cleaning settings of all effects to every scene of the movie.
159 www.magix.com
160 Audio editing
Declipper
Should the input level of an audio recording be too high, overmodulation may result at the louder parts (the signal peaks). This digital distortion is also called
"clipping": At the overmodulated area, the values that are too high are simply cut off, and typical, quite unpleasant-sounding crackling and distortion appear.
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX contains a special function for dealing with digital clipping and analog distortions. Of course, this only works to a certain degree.
Using the fader you can set at what level the Declipper should register a signal as being overmodulated and, if required, correct it (Clip level). This is important, as different sound cards show different clipping methods. The more the fader is turned up, the lower the level recognized by the program as overmodulated. If the clip level is set too high, unwanted sound modification may occur.
Get clip level : The clip level is gaged automatically.
Denoiser
The Denoiser removes persistent background noise like computer hum, hissing, noises from sound charts, disturbance from ground circuits, interference from audio equipment with high-impedance outputs (such as record players), impact noise, or the turntable rumble.
The Denoiser requires a noise sample. Some typical noise sounds are included in the "Preset" selection menu.
Set the degree to which the noise should be reduced with the fader . It is often better to reduce interference signals by 3-6 dB rather than as much as is possible in order to keep the sound "natural".
A different option consists of creating a noise sample yourself. All that's needed is a short section from the audio track in which the distortion can be found. To get it, switch to the DeNoiser dialog by pressing " Advanced ".
DeNoiser – Advanced settings
Step 1: Choose a noise sample
First of all, a sample of the distortion you wish to remove must be selected, i.e. a so-called "noise sample". www.magix.com
You have two options to choose from:
Audio editing
Pick out typical background noise: You can select and use a number of typical background noises from the flip menu. Select one and listen to it by pressing the "Play" button. If it is similar to the background noise in your sound track, go ahead and use it (see "Step 2: Removing background noise").
Extract a new noise sample from an audio track: You can also pick out a short passage (from the existing sound track) in which you can hear the background noise.
Automatic search: Searches especially quiet passages in which background noise is most noticeable.
Previous / Play / Next: These buttons allow you to play all of the passages found for easy comparison.
Save as: Once found, you can save noise samples to the hard drive. They then appear as entries in the "Typical background noises" flip menu to be used in other projects.
If you only wish to use the noise sample in the current project, you don't have to save. Instead just go to the "Remove noise" category.
Step 2: Removing background noise
Noise level: The level of the noise reduction function should be set as precisely as possible. Values that are too low are expressed at a low distortion dampening level and in artifacts, like noises or "twittering" (see below). High settings produce dull results – useful signals that sound similar to hissing noises are also filtered away. Try to find the best setting for the project at hand.
Reducer: This sets the balance between the original signal and the signal with the applied noise reduction. It's often better to reduce interference signals by
3-6 dB rather than as much as is possible, so as to keep the sound "natural".
In case of buzzing, it’s best to apply complete removal.
Dehisser
The Dehisser eliminates regular "white" noise typically produced by analog tape recordings, microphone pre-amplifiers, A/D converters, or transformers.
161 www.magix.com
162 Audio editing
Noise reduction can be regulated in decibels with the fader. It is often better to reduce interference signals by 3-6 dB rather than as much as possible in order to keep the sound "natural".
Noise level: You can choose between different noise levels. The level of the noise reduction function should be set as precisely as possible. Low settings result in incomplete deletion of the hissing. Incomplete deleting of hissing produces artifacts and should be avoided, since high settings will produce dull results and some useful signals (i.e. woodwinds) which are similar to hissing are also filtered away.
Equalizer
The 10-track equalizer divides the frequency spectrum into 10 areas (tracks) and supplies them with separate volume controls to allow you to achieve many impressive effects, from the simple rising of the bass to total sound transformation. If you raise the low frequencies too much throughout the whole level, it might cause distortions.
Fader: The volume of each of the 10 frequency bands can be set separately with the 10 volume controls.
Link frequency bands: The frequency fields can be bundled together flexibly in order to avoid artificial-sounding exaggeration in individual frequency fields.
Compressor
The compressor is an automated, dynamic volume controller. Loud passages become quieter and the total value is raised. This makes the volume more consistent and speech easier to understand. A compressor is mainly useful in case background noise or music interferes with speech and simply increasing www.magix.com
Audio editing the volume of the individual objects or tracks does not result in any significant improvement.
Level : Regulates the level of compression applied (the "ratio").
Function : Defines the compressor depending upon the sound material.
Stereo FX
The stereo FX processor provides adjustment of the alignment of the audio material in the stereo balance. If the stereo recordings sound weak and undifferentiated, an extension of the stereo base width can often provide better transparency.
Bandwidth control: Adjust the bandwidth between mono (on the extreme left), unchanged base width (center) and maximum bandwidth ("wide" on the extreme right).
Reducing the bandwidth can raise the overall level. In extreme cases, when the left and the right channels include identical material and the bandwidth control is pushed to the extreme left on "mono", the result can be a level increase of 3 decibels.
Raising the bandwidth (values of 100) diminishes the mono compatibility.
Audio effect dialogs
Some of the following effects can be opened individually (via the context menu), or as part of the track or master effects rack. However, the functionality remains the same.
Effect devices controls
Effects are controlled in the conventional way by the use of slider controls, turning knobs, or buttons or alternatively using the graphic sensor fields.
Sensor fields: Sensor fields may be influenced intuitively with mouse movements; the graphics and the respective effect setting change in relation to each other.
Power switch: Every effect device in the rack may be switched on or off separately. This button allows you to directly compare the neutral, unedited sound of the audio object with the effect setting you have chosen.
163 www.magix.com
164 Audio editing
Reset: Every effect has a reset button that restores the effect device’s initial default. In this state, the effect is not calculated into the sound, and the effect is not rendered.
Preset selection list: Each effect device features a selection of presets that are selected via the drop-down menu.
A/B: The A/B button compares two settings with each other. If you have selected a preset for the effect and make manual changes to it later, you can compare the original preset sound with the new settings by using the A/B button.
Note: The graphics displayed are only samples and these differ according to the effects devices.
Reverb/Delay
The reverb effect device offers newly developed and very realistic reverb algorithms to add more room depth to your recording.
Reverb
Reverb is probably the most important but also the most difficult effect to generate.
Parameters
The reverb effect has the following parameters:
Size: defines the size of the room (or the system for the plate and spring). The larger a room, the longer the sound travels between walls or objects. With some low "size" settings you can also reduce the distance between the individual reflections. This allows resonance to develop (accentuated frequency ranges), which can sound oppressive if the reverb sustain is too long.
Time: With this knob you can adjust the echo time and determine how much of it will be absorbed and, simultaneously, the reverb's decay. www.magix.com
Audio editing
Color : You may influence the sound characteristics of the effect within certain limits. The effect of this controller depends on the used preset. In rooms,
"Color" controls the dampening of the highs in the reverb (from dark to bright) as well as pre-filtering of the signal. With plate and spring presets, this fader determines the dampening of the basses as well.
Mix : This controller sets the mix ratio between the original and the edited signal. For rooms, you can therefore move a signal further into the room by increasing the effect share. The last four presets are intended for use in an
AUX channel of the mixer and are set to 100%.
Presets
The presets represent the basic settings for the various room algorithms, which can still be varied along with the other parameters. Hence, they are more than just simply parameter sets.
165
Delay
This effect is like an echo which delays the signal and repeats it.
Delay : This sets the period of time between the individual echoes. The more the control is turned to the left, the faster the echoes will follow each other.
Feedback : This adjusts the number of echoes. Turn the dial completely to the left, there is no echo at all; turn it completely to the right and there are seemingly endless repetitions.
Mix : This fader determines how much of the unprocessed original sound (dry signal) is subjected to the echo (wet signal). Application of this effect in an AUX bus requires the controller to be set to 100% (all the way to the right).
Timestretch/Resample
This effect device changes the object’s speed and/or pitch.
Pitch: This control changes the pitch independently of the object’s speed
(‘pitch-shifting’). www.magix.com
166 Audio editing
Tempo: This control changes the tempo independently of the pitch
("time-stretching"). The object acts as if it were compressed or stretched on the track.
Tones/BPM: These fields are used to numerically enter the pitch or speed change. Only MAGIX Soundpool files are suitable for numeric entries because they are equipped with information regarding pitch and speed.
Setup: This button opens a setup dialog where you can select various pitchshifting and timestretching procedures.
Standard : Timestretching and pitchshifting in standard quality. This method is suitable for audio material without a pronounced beat. Existing beat markers are evaluated to improve audio quality.
Smoothed : Timestretching and pitchshifting for audio material without pulsing elements. The method is suitable for several voice orchestra instruments, surfaces, speech and singing. Beat markers will not be evaluated.
Beat marker slicing: Beat-synchronous timestretching and pitchshifting via splitting and temporal repositioning. Precisely set beat markers are required at the beats or transients. Markers can be generated in real time (automatically) or read out from the source file, as long as they are available (patched). In the
Plus/Premium version's included MAGIX Music Editor, a patching tool is provided for users to set the markers themselves.
Beat marker stretching : Beat-synchronized timestretching and pitchshifting in high audio quality. The material is stretched between beat markers positions so that the impacts or attacks at the beat markers positions are not impaired by stretching. The markers can be generated in real time from the audio material (automatically), provided they are present (patched).
Beat marker stretching (smoothed) : Beat-synchronized timestretching and pitchshifting in high audio quality, even with extreme time extension. Beat markers are used at the beats or transients. The markers can be generated in real time from the audio material (automatically), or read out from the wave file, provided they are present (patched).
Universal HQ : Universal method for timestretching and pitchshifting in very high audio quality. Suitable for all types of audio material.
Monophonic voice: Time-stretching and pitch-shifting for vocal solos, speech or solo instruments.
Resampling: Pitch shift and tempo cannot be changed individually. This method requires comparably little CPU time. www.magix.com
Audio editing
Audio effects in the mixer
Audio devices are opened in the mixer via the "FX" button for each track or in the master area on the right. Mastering also features the MAGIX
Mastering Suite (view page 168).
Equalizer
167
The 10-band equalizer subdivides the frequency spectrum into ten areas
('bands') and equips them with separate volume controls. This way it is possible to create many impressive effects, from a simple boosting of the bass to complete elimination of a certain range of frequencies. Note: If low frequencies are boosted too much, the overall sound level is heavily increased which may lead to distortion. In this event, adjust the overall volume downward by using the 'master volume' control situated at the bottom center of the effect rack.
Slider control: Each of the ten frequency ranges can be separately boosted or turned down with the ten volume controls.
Link bands: Using this button randomly combines the frequency ranges with each other in to avoid artificial-sounding overemphasis of an individual frequency range.
Touch screen (right EQ section): This is the 'sensor field' of the EQ. Here you can draw any type of curve with the mouse. This will be immediately translated into a corresponding control setting on the left side of the EQ.
Compressor
The compressor is an automated, dynamic volume adjustment controller: louder passages become quieter and quiet passages become louder. A compressor is useful to make spoken passages more audible against www.magix.com
168 Audio editing background noise or music in case a simple increase of the overall volume is insufficient. Several useful presets are included for this purpose, however compression may also be set manually.
Ratio : This parameter controls the compression level.
Threshold : This sets the volume threshold below and above which compression is applied.
Attack : Sets the algorithm's reaction time to increasing sound levels.
Release : Sets the algorithm's reaction time to falling sound levels.
Gain : The gain controller amplifies the compressed signal.
MAGIX Mastering Suite
MAGIX Mastering Suite is a special effect rack for use with the mixer master channel. Its effects serve the so-called "Mastering" with which the finished mixed music file is given its last one-over.
The On/Off switches can switch the effects on and off individually. Each effect has a range of presets that can all be picked from a list along the lower border of the effect.
The settings of all effects can also be saved together as one preset so that you can use your ideal mastering setting again for other arrangements.
Each effect can be reset by pressing the "Reset" button. You can press the "Bypass" button to temporarily deactivate the effects.
Note: This function is available only in the Plus/Premium version.
Note
: 5.1 Surround mode only provides the compressor (view page 167) and
parametric equalizer devices in this case.
Parametric Equalizer
The parametric equalizer consists of four filter bands for adjusting the overall sound of the music track. Each band is a filter with a typical "bell shape".
Within a certain frequency range and around an adjustable middle frequency, you can increase or reduce the signal level gain. The width of this frequency www.magix.com
Audio editing range is called bandwidth. The bandwidth is defined by the Q value. The higher the Q value, the narrower and steeper the filter curve.
You can influence the basic sound of the mix by increasing and decreasing the broadband to give it more "depth" (lower center = 200-600 Hz) or more "air"
(highs = 10Khz). You can also decrease the narrow bandwidth (high Q value) in the frequency response, e.g. to remove disruptive frequencies.
169
Graphic: The resulting frequency path of the equalizer is displayed in the graphic. The frequency is spread out horizontally, the increase or decrease of the respective frequency, vertically.
The blue bullets 1-4 symbolize the four wave bands. You can move them around with the mouse until you find your desired frequency response.
Peak meter: The peak meter gives you control over the output level of the equalizer. The adjacent master gain controller can be used to balance the level with the EQ.
Edit: The "Edit" button opens the fine tuning for the four bands: www.magix.com
170 Audio editing
Parameter selection: With the buttons on the right you can select the parameter that can be adjusted with four faders of each band. Furthermore, there are number keys to enter every parameter of the bands.
Gain dB: These controllers allow you to raise or lower the filter. Setting the controller to 0 deactivates the filter and doesn’t use CPU power.
Freq. Hz: The center frequency of the individual filters can be set between 10
Hz and 24 kHz with the frequency controllers. Freely choosing the frequency enables multiple filters to be set to the same frequency in order to have a greater effect.
Q (bandwidth): Set the bandwidth of the individual filters between 10 Hz and
10 kHz.
There is still a peculiarity among bands 1 and 4; The filter curve for these bands can be changed from a normal "peaking" EQ filter ( ) to "shelving"
( ) (this is the basic setting) and high (band 1) or high-cut (band 4) .
When using the "shelving" filter, a soft increase or decrease in all frequencies happens above or below the filter frequency, and the Q parameter does not have a function here. With a low-cut or high-cut filter, all frequencies below
(low-cut) or above (high-cut) the set frequency are filtered out.
Multimax
MultiMax is a compressor with three independent frequency bands. The dynamics are edited separately for each band. www.magix.com
Audio editing
The advantage of a multi-band compressor versus a "normal" compressor is that the "pumping" tendency and other unwanted side effects are dramatically reduced while editing the dynamics. For instance, this prevents a bass peak from "reducing" the entire signal.
Multi-band technology also lets you specifically edit individual frequency ranges.
Link: When this function is activated and one fader is adjusted, all faders are changed at the same ratio. However, the way the dynamics are edited is not affected.
HiQ: If the "HiQ" ("high quality") setting is activated, an even more precise algorithm is used, however this requires more processing power. We recommend switching this setting on before exporting the project.
Setting the frequency bands: The settings of the frequency bands are changed directly via the graphic. Simply click on the separating lines to move them.
Bass/mid/high: These controllers define the level of compression for each frequency band.
Presets: Multimax provides access to presets for special applications, for example:
Cassette NR-B decoder: MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX simulates decoding of
Dolby B + C noise suppression if a Dolby player is not available. Cassettes recorded with Dolby B or C sound more muffled if played back without corresponding Dolby.
Leveler: This setting automatically sets the entire material to an identical volume level. The volume control knob is no longer required. Use this function to equalize greater volume differences within a song. To equalize volume variations between different songs, the function "Normalize loudness" is also provided in the "Effects" menu.
De-Esser: These special presets help to remove overstressed hissing sounds from speech recordings.
171 www.magix.com
172 Audio editing
Enhancer
The Enhancer enables the justification of the audio material in the stereo panorama to be adjusted. If the stereo recordings sound unfocused and undifferentiated, an extension of the stereo base-width can often provide better transparency.
Use the maximize function to move the echo and improve the stereo picture, for example, into the foreground.
Volume controller: Adjusts the volume of every single channel to adjust the complete panorama. The reduction of left and right levels is displayed under the control buttons.
Pan-direction: Use this controller to move the sound source from the middle into stereo panorama. The signals at the outer edges of the sound picture remain unchanged.
Multiband: This option switches from "Stereo FX" to "Multiband" mode. Stereo editing only applies to the middle frequency, the bass and highs remain unchanged.
Bandwidth/maximize sensor field: Adjusts the base width between mono
(extreme left), unchanged base width (normal stereo), and maximum base width (wide, extreme right). Raising the bandwidth (values over 100) diminishes the mono compatibility. This means that recordings edited this way sound hollow when listened to in mono.
Maximize strengthens the spatial component of the recording, which also increases the stereo transparency without influencing the mono compatibility.
Stereo meter (correlation gauge): This provides a graphical display of the phase relation of the audio signal. You can use it to review the orientation of the signal in the stereo balance and the effect of the stereo enhancer. To maintain mono-compatibility, the "cloud" shown should always be higher than it is wide. www.magix.com
Digital Audio Meter
Audio editing
On the lower border of the MAGIX Mastering Suite there is a digital audio meter which provides separate control method displays for 10 wave bands on each channel. This device is used for orientation purposes, e.g. selective equalizer editing.
Limiter
The Limiter prevents clipping by automatically lowering any volume levels that are too high.
Quiet parts remain unaffected. Unlike the
Compressor, this feature attempts to preserve the basic sound as much as possible.
Automatic track damping
This command from the context menu automatically dampens the volume of other audio objects. The volume of the selected object on the track remains unchanged.
173
Only original sound: Here you can also specify whether you want to dampen the original sound of the video or all audio tracks.
Transition length: In the dialog you can activate and deactivate the value of the
dampening. You can use this command while recording audio (view page 87)
(Audio recording, advanced options). www.magix.com
174 Audio editing
Adding a sound track using MIDI songs
A few words about MIDI: MIDI files do not contain the actual sounds like wave files, only the note control information. This data is interpreted to effect playback by the synthesizer chip on the sound card. This has several advantages:
MIDI files need a lot less memory than wave files, so more MIDI files will fit on a CD-ROM.
MIDI files can be adapted to any beat (BPM) without affecting the sound; only the playback tempo needs to be changed.
MIDI files are very easy to transpose to another pitch; a section in a song does not have to be saved in several different keys. The version in C major is sufficient, and it can then be transposed to any key by simply clicking with the right mouse button.
The disadvantage of MIDI files: The sound is not true audio. The audio is only produced when the synthesizer chip on the sound card plays it back. As a result, high-quality sound cards or external synthesizers will sound completely different and better than standard sound cards, depending upon the settings for playback "voices". Therefore, it is definitely worth using a good sound card or external MIDI synthesizer with MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX!
Arranging MIDI files
Integrating MIDI files in an arrangement:
Search for a directory containing MIDI files using the Media Pool located at the left edge of the screen. Click on a file, and it will be played back immediately.
Now drag the desired file into the arrangement to finish the process.
An object will appear which displays the MIDI notes as dots. The high notes are dots in the upper section, and the lower notes are the dots further down in the lower section. You can even see the velocity of the notes. The louder the note is played, the brighter it appears on the screen.
MIDI objects may be arranged, the volume may be modified (middle handle) or fades (in or out) may be added (top right and left handles) in the same way as audio, video, or synthesizer objects. The "element bar" lets you "open" an entire track instantly from a MIDI loop. If a MIDI file seems to be empty, check the MIDI replay device in the "Playback parameters" window ("P" key or menu "File -> Settings -> Playback parameters"). Your sound card driver or your MIDI interface must be set correctly to hear MIDI! www.magix.com
Audio editing
MIDI interface and external sound generator
Of course, MIDI objects can also be played back over a MIDI interface into external synthesizers, sound modules, etc. Start by setting FX to 1.0. The timing between MIDI and audio can be balanced later if you notice a delay between the two. This is important for very slow arrangements, since the sample rate on the sound card is not entirely. The MIDI drivers can be set in the "Playback parameters" window ("P" key or menu "File -> Settings ->
Playback parameters").
Convert MIDI files to audio files
Before exporting (as a video, for example) an arrangement, all MIDI objects must be converted into audio objects first, since these contain only pure control information for the sound reproduction before they are exported.
First, connect the MIDI synthesizer (usually the sound card) output to the sound card input. Now the MIDI file can be played back and simultaneously recorded as an audio file using the record function. The result is an audio file that can be processed and exported together with other multimedia files.
175 www.magix.com
176
Mixer
Audio editing
The Mixer can be opened by pressing the "M" key or via the button bar in the main window (also: "View" > "Mixer").
Mixer tracks
Each track has its own volume or brightness fader. This fader also affects added MIDI objects.
The stereo position for each audio track is defined with the Pan controls.
The "Solo" button switches a track to solo mode, i.e. all other tracks are muted. The "Mute" button mutes a track.
Double clicking any of the controls resets them to their default passive setting
(no boost or cut in level), and no processor output will be required.
Track effects always apply to all audio objects of a track. This sets the mixer
(view page 158). Please read the chapter "Audio Effects (view page 158)" for
functionality and handling of the individual audio effects. www.magix.com
DirectX audio plug-ins
Audio editing
The MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX supports DirectX audio plug-Ins. These are usually effects modules such as reverb, equalizer, etc.
The DirectX system must be installed on your PC prior to using the DirectX plug-Ins – a manual installation is only required on rare occasions. Generally,
DirectX is already available through the Windows installation. If your PC does not have the DirectX System installed or if it is out of date, you can find a
DirectX installer on the MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX disc. Of course, DirectX plug-ins have to be installed first, depending on the plug-in used.
Two so-called "slots" for track effects are located in the channel strip of the mixer for the corresponding track, plus in the FX tracks.
Clicking on the small triangle will let you select an effect from the list. Select "No effect" to remove a plug-in from the slot. A left click temporarily disables the plug-in. Active plug-ins are displayed in light blue. Right clicking on the slot opens the settings dialog of the plug-in.
FX tracks (effect tracks)
Two FX send controllers (FX1 and FX2) are located below the plug-in slots.
You can determine the volume at which you want the signal to be routed to the two available FX tracks.
177
Note: Individual objects can also send to an FX track. For more information, go to the "Effects and titles" chapter in "Audio effects" > "Audio effects in the
An FX track is a complete, additional mixer track which provides a complete track FX rack and two plug-in slots for use as a send effect. www.magix.com
178 Audio editing
A send effect differs from a normal effect found in the track (insert) insofar as it can edit the signals from multiple tracks or objects simultaneously.
It roughly corresponds to the scheme of a parallel switch, while an insert on a track is like a series switch.
A special feature offered by
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX is that audio objects can also send directly to the FX track.
The FX are usually hidden in the mixer. They will be displayed as soon as one of the FX send controllers is used.
In the first FX track the hall function is activated as standard as it is the most important application of the send effects.
The volume controllers serve to regulate the volume of the FX track and corresponds to an old AUX return controller. The mute button is used to switch the FX function on and off. The solo button enables you to single out FX individual tracks. The peak meters of the tracks, which send to the FX track, are displayed in grey.
Master track (Plus/Premium version)
The FX button and the plug-in slots function exactly like in the tracks. The FX button will open the master audio effects rack . The complete mixer settings including the FX tracks can be reset with the " Reset " button.
MAGIX Mastering Suite
: Opens the MAGIX Mastering Suite (view page 168).
5.1 Surround
: This button switches the mixer to "Surround (view page 183)"
mode.
Both faders control the total volume. www.magix.com
Audio editing
Link button : If you deactivate the link button, you can control the volume of the right and left channels individually.
Volume and panorama automation
You can automate the volume and panorama course of a mixer track. This means you can record this movement of the track volume faders and panorama controls while playing the movie. This way, for instance, you can simulate the movement of a sound source and volume adjustment from left to right instantly during playback.
As long as the " Auto " button in a track is active, all movements of the volume and panorama controller are recorded.
The automation is displayed as a curve in the arranger and can be edited later with the mouse.
Note: Unlike the automation curve of the Mixer, the Dynamic Effects are track-dependent, i.e. irrespective of the objects contained in the track.
179
5.1 Surround
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX supports playback and export in authentic 5.1 surround.
Note: This function is available only in the Plus/Premium version.
Requirements
You will require a sound card or a sound chip which is integrated into the computer's motherboard with six individual outputs to playback the individual channels:
front left ( L ) / right ( R )
centre ( C ) / subwoofer ( LFE )
back left ( Ls ) / right ( Rs)
Surround playback is possible with all audio driver models (see Playback
settings (view page 60)), (Wave, DirectSound, ASIO).
www.magix.com
180 Audio editing
DirectSound is supported by most of the standard sound cards.
Wave drivers are similarly supported by many standard sound cards; however, individual sound cards (for example, Soundblaster) require access to
DirectSound.
Note: 24-bit surround playback is often not possible, therefore please select
16-bit output.
For surround output with ASIO drivers, you will require a 6-channel-capable
ASIO driver (e.g. MAGIX Low Latency). Older multi-channel audio cards that activate their stereo output couples via multiple separate drivers are not suitable.
Output of the six output signals is achieved in all driver models in the output channels in the same (standardized) order:
Channels 1/2: L-R
Channels 3/4: C-LFE
Channels 5/6: Ls-Rs
When using WAV or ASIO drivers, the loudspeaker settings normally have to be changed to 5.1 playback in the control panel.
In order to do this you have to start the Control Panel for "Sounds and audio devices" and select "Loudspeaker settings", "Advanced", "5.1 surround loudspeakers".
On most systems the program does this automatically while using
DirectSound.
Importing and exporting surround audio files
Import
When importing MPEG-2 files with Dolby ® Digital sound (e.g. VOB files from
DVDs or DVB-TV recordings), you can choose from two different applications:
Mixdown : Surround sound is displayed as an audio object under the video object, playback of the Surround track is reduced and recalculated to stereo playback. Use this option if you don't wish to edit the Surround sound, but rather wish to export it. You can also use it if you think that a stereo export is enough to meet your requirements www.magix.com
Audio editing
Hint: To import Surround sound as a mix, activation of the Dolby ® Digital 2.0 stereo codec is required.
Surround mix : The individual Surround channel pairs (L-R, C LFE, Ls-Rs) are split into three audio tracks as separate objects and the mixer is then set to
Surround mode. This mode allows you to change the Surround mix.
Hint: A free activation of the Dolby ® Digital 5.1 codec is also required for this.
In MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX the import of Dolby ® Digital Surround is always executed as a mixdown.
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX Plus/Premium can also import interleaved wave files
(multi-channel wave files), multi-channel Windows Media Audio and MP3 surround files. A surround mix is always created
Export
Surround mix exports can occur in any one of the following formats:
6-channel PCM files (interleaved wave)
Windows Media files (as a Surround soundtrack of a Windows Media Video or
WMV-HD disc)
MPEG-2 files with Dolby ® Digital sound track (requires activation of the
Dolby ®
Digital codec (view page 331))
The files created are fully compatible with the normal file formats, this means that they can also be played on computers incapable of playing Surround (in normal stereo).
The export is performed via the same menu commands (e.g. "File -> Export movie -> Audio as wave") like the normal stereo export. You will then be asked if the export should be in stereo or Surround format.
Export Dolby Digital Surround via Smart Encoding
You can also burn material to be exported with surround sound again without the need for the Dolby ® Digital codec (in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX or MAGIX
Movie Edit Pro MX Plus/Premium without Dolby
®
Digital encoder activation) to
DVD or export the corresponding MPEG files while keeping 5.1 Surround
Sound. To do so, use the "Smart Rendering" option which transfers the unprocessed parts of the output material without renewed encoding. Read
181 www.magix.com
182 Audio editing more on this in the MPEG Encoder Settings annexe, General Settings (view
The import has to be executed as a mixdown, the audio material cannot be changed (no fades, no audio cleaning, no volume adjustment). Harder steps, for example, for removing commercials are allowed, they may not happen precisely according to the frame, but at the GOP (group of pictures) borders.
The mixer in surround mode
To activate surround playback, open the mixer (M key) and click on "5.1 surround" button in the master.
In the master, six peak meters for the individual channels are provided. The normal panorama button turns into a representative display of the surround editor (see below), which can be opened by clicking on the display.
The surround sound editor is also available to the effects tracks. For example, you can send the original track to the front L/R speakers , the FX track however will remain at the rear L/R speakers .
The master volume is applied to all channels, here the left controller influences channels L and Ls, the right controller; channels R and Rs and the middle value of both controller; the channels C and LFE. www.magix.com
Audio editing
The master plug-ins are only applied to the front channels.
The full effects palette of the mastering effects rack in MAGIX Mastering Suite is not available in 5.1 surround mode, but rather only the compressor and the parametric equalizer (from the Mastering Suite) are provided. The settings of these effects have the same effect on all six channels.
5.1 Surround editor
183
The selected mixer track's 5.1 surround editor allows you to arrange the audio signal of a track (displayed as two red sound sources) in stereo space. The signal is dispersed to the 5 (blue) loudspeakers which represent the individual surround channels.
There are 6 channels:
L: front left
R: front right
C: center
Ls: back left/left surround
Rs: back right / right surround
LFE subbass L ow F requency E ffect) channel
Dispersing the signal to the 5 loudspeakers occurs after the sound source emits a sound field of a certain level (displayed as red circles). The further away a loudspeaker's source is, the lesser its share of the corresponding loudspeaker channel. The position of the loudspeaker can be moved with the mouse. www.magix.com
184 Audio editing
The subbass share (LFE) is set directly from the corresponding value table. It can also be changed by dragging the mouse.
There are various modes in which you can use the source signal:
Mono: The (stereo) source signal is seen as mono material, the left and right channels are mixed together and arranged together. The original stereo information is lost here.
Stereo 1: Similar to mono mode insofar as the left and right channels are moved together, but only a portion of the left source is audible in the loudspeakers L and Ls and only a portion of the right source in the right channels R and Rs . The stereo information remains as intact as possible.
Stereo 2: The left and right channels can be moved individually. The distance between the left and right source is retained when you move the left source.
You can move an individual source by holding down the "Alt" key.
Center/LFE: Only the left channel is arranged. In return, the LFE share is drawn solely from the right channel. This mode is only important for importing
Surround material.
Width determines the level of the sound field of an individual source.
Automation:
Panning of the sound source on the loudspeaker can be automated to simulate movements in the room.
For this to happen "Automation" must be activated. There are two methods to create automations: record and draw.
To record (when automation is on), the sound source is moved between the loudspeakers during playback. When recording the automation, the "Record" check box lights up red.
The draw function is an alternative to drawing out complex movements. When drawing in active mode, all panning movements are transmitted to the time interval between the start and end marker (when the mouse button is held).
You can thus draw the entire movement curve for the selected time range.
"Reset" deletes surround automation from the track.
There is no automation of the parameters for width and LFE, of the distance between the left and right source in "Stereo 2" mode, or of the loudspeaker positions. www.magix.com
Audio editing
Scrubbing
The term "scrubbing" originates from the age of cassette players and provides quicker monitoring of passages of a film or a piece of music. The function plays short samples at the original speed.
Note : In order to preview individual audio objects completely, use "Preview
Activating "Scrubbing"
Scrubbing can be activated via the menu beside the speaker button on the upper edge of the arrangement window.
185
Scrubbing: Modes
No scrubbing : Scrubbing is inactive. If the playback marker is set or moved, then sound will not be played.
Scrubbing (1 frame) : Scrubbing is active and samples are only 1 (video) frame in length. The speed is 25 fps, i.e. 1/25 second. This mode is suitable for positioning the playback marker exactly.
Scrubbing (long) : Scrubbing is active, the sample length amounts to approx.
0.5 seconds. In this mode, locating specific events is particularly easy.
Play 1x during scrubbing : If this option is active, the current position will be played one time. If it is inactive, then it will be repeated.
Using "Scrubbing"
If scrubbing mode is selected, set the playback marker to a certain location in the timeline using the mouse. Hold the mouse key and move the playback marker to various locations in the arrangement.
Scrubbing may be used also by employing the jog and shuttle wheel on the video monitor, as well as through various hardware controllers, which gives the software the feel of an analog video editing system! www.magix.com
186 Audio editing
MAGIX Soundtrack Maker
The MAGIX Soundtrack Maker adds atmosphere. Music tracks corresponding to the specified mood are generated automatically. Even mood changes are possible.
Open the MAGIX Soundtrack Maker using the Edit > Assistants (view page
286) menu. The work is split into 3 steps.
Then close the dialog by clicking on "Apply". If you click on "Cancel", the dialog will be closed and all changes will be discarded.
Select music style
Choose a musical style first. The option "Apply only between start and end marker" limits the length of the background music you want to create. Start and end markers may be set with the left and right mouse button if MAGIX
Soundtrack Maker is open.
Set mood change:
You can select a mood from the list.
Preview audio : Preview the selected mood here.
Position : Use the position slider to skip to a certain position in order to set the mood for a certain position. The start marker may be moved instead with the left mouse button. The preview will be displayed in the video monitor simultaneously.
Add emotion : This button inserts the selected mood at the current position.
MAGIX Soundtrack Maker will then suggest a new position for the next www.magix.com
Audio editing emotion by repositioning the position slider. Of course, you may also position this elsewhere to insert further moods.
Delete emotion : Removes the currently set.
Generate background music
Clicking "Create soundtrack" creates a new soundtrack. "Progress" shows the current status.
187
Variations
If the background music that has been created is not suitable, a variation may be created. This process may be repeated for the entire background music as well as for individual emotions:
If you want to vary the entire background music, then simply click on "Create variations".
If you only want this to apply to a certain emotion, then move to it with the position slider first in the dialog (or the play marker on the main screen).
Activate the option "Vary only selected emotions". Now click "Create variation".
Automatic cut adjustment : This option re-arranges the video and photo objects in your project to match the music. Make sure this option is deactivated in case this function is unwanted.
Mixdown of audio objects
If the arranger becomes too full to manage, the system is out of RAM, or you just want to "summarize" your production, use the mix down function to convert the entire audio arrangement into a single audio file. Just click on the mix down button in the button bar or select the function from the "Processing" menu.
You can choose a name and a destination for storing the mix down object. The default directory is "My audio/video". www.magix.com
188 Stereo3D (Plus/Premium version)
Storage of the audio arrangement will take up a little more space on your hard-drive, but it requires less RAM for playback than an unmixed entire arrangement.
Note: The mix down effect optimizes the volume automatically. Even if the mix down function is used various times, you will not lose audio quality.
Stereo3D (Plus/Premium version)
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX Plus/Premium also enables creation and editing of
"genuine" 3D videos and photos. First, let's create an overview of this complex topic by familiarizing ourselves with the most important principles and the golden rules that are involved. Next, we'll look at the individual steps of the workflow in more detail.
Note concerning 3D content: Some people experience unpleasantness (e. g. headaches, straining, exhaustion of the eyes, or nausea) when viewing 3D videos. We recommend taking regular breaks for this reason. In case of problems, the user should immediately stop use and refer to a doctor or optometrist. Incorrect production of 3D-content may also produce these symptoms.
Warning for small children: The sight of small children (especially those younger than six years old) is still developing. We recommend referring to a doctor or optometrist prior to allowing your child to view 3D-videos.
3D basics
Human eyes perceive objects from 2 different angles and our brain "calculates" images from this information. This way we can tell the distance and position of an object. For this reason, 3D material should be shot according to this principle.
Viewing 3D
A regular screen or TV can show images only in 2 dimensions, and various technologies have been developed to enable perception of images in 3D. To this day, all technologies share the following: You need special glasses to deliver different information to the left and right eyes. We will examine these technologies in detail later. www.magix.com
The three golden rules
Stereo3D (Plus/Premium version)
Stay within limits during recording:
To make a 3D recording (view page 189)
with realistic depth information, certain limits must be respected. The most important rule is not to go below the point of minimum distance. Minimum point is the point in the picture, where the camera is the closest.
Frame closest point: In order to place the 3D effect behind the imaginary frame, both image components must over lay each other exactly at the closest point. At the same time, the same objects must be visible at the edges of both partial images, for which, if needed, you can use the Cropping function in the
189
Note: The imaginary window is a type of a plane, behind which the 3D movie plays. You select the closest, frontmost point. Not keeping up with this rule can result in the object to "jump out" of the imaginary window, which when used too much, can cause headaches.
Maintain realistic eye angles: Object with a 3D depth effect viewed as a red/cyan image (Anaglyph) without glasses will appear displaced. This displacement should, if possible, take up less than 1/30 of the entire image.
Otherwise, it will appear that the eyes are looking in different directions.
Notice: Displacement may only occur along the horizontal axis. Displacements on the vertical axis and rotated portions must be adjusted.
Record 3D
The distance between eyes in humans is ca. 65 mm, which forms the so-called
"stereo base width". But because our eyes are dynamic and we can even
"cross" our eyes, it is possible to focus on objects that are closer.
Various techniques exist for 3D recording. Each method has its advantages and disadvantages:
3D cameras with two lenses : The advantages are obvious; these cameras produce 3D material without excessive work involved. The disadvantage is that the stereo base width (lens distance) cannot be changed.
Two cameras on a special mount : This involves a little more work. Two cameras are mounted on a special support to record material for the left and the right side of the 3D image simultaneously; microphone booms for stereo recordings may also be used for this purpose. www.magix.com
190 Stereo3D (Plus/Premium version)
The disadvantage in this case is that the shutter releases have to be pressed at exactly the same time if there are moving objects in the picture. In case of video, both movies must be synchronized before being edited.
Advantages: Stereo base width may be changed by adjusting the distance between the cameras; larger selection of camera models.
Two photos via the same camera : This technique only allows still images.
The camera is simply used to record two images from different perspectives, and these are used as the right and left images. For best results, use a tripod.
Consistently fast camera movement, e. g. along a street : Only a single conventional camera is required in this case, but the range of applications is very limited. This is the most cost-effective method for creating 3D videos.
Material is filmed at a speed of circa 6-to 15 km/h. During editing, the edited video object is duplicated and one of the videos is played back with a time lapse. The movement direction determines which is the right and left image.
3D photos may also be created using this method.
Warning, minimum distance!
The position of the object closest to the lens is designated as the minimum point. This minimum point may not exceed a specific minimum point; this is easy to calculate via the following formula:
Note: Lens focal point (e. g. 25 mm) x stereo base width (e. g. 65 mm) x 1.5*
/1 mm= minimum point (2437.5 mm ~ 2.44 m)
*1.5 is a factor derived from the cut-off appearing when filming through a lens.
**1 mm is the so-called "deviation" or "spatial dimension". This only involves a rough value in this case.
Examples for 3D cameras:
Panasonic HDC-SDT750 ( base width 12 mm): minimum point is approx. 1.5 m.
Fuji REAL 3D W3 (base width 75 mm): minimum point at approx. 3 m; for long-distance recordings as much as 8 m.
This so-called minimum point has an important role in other aspects of 3D editing. www.magix.com
Stereo3D (Plus/Premium version)
Prepare 3D editing
3D videos are filmed and saved by different cameras, which means: depending on the camera model or recording method, the videos or images vary.
In one file
Many cameras, especially for photo recordings, create one single file containing the left and the right image next to one another.
Drag these files from the Media Pool directly into your arrangement.
Select the created objects.
Select the "Side-by-Side (left images left/right)" entry in the Media Pool under
"Effects > Stereo3D > Properties > Create stereo".
In multiple files
Some 3D cameras create a file for each the left and the right side. This working technique works also if you simply take 2 pictures with a regular photo camera.
In the Media Pool, open the folder in which the desired file can be found.
Sort the files in increasing order according to the date. This way, all files will lie in pairs one below the other.
Now, select the files and drag them from the Media Pool directly into your arrangement.
In the Media Pool select "Side-by-side (left image right/left) under "Effects >
Stereo 3D > Properties > Create stereo" for material with halved width.
Note: If you have created side-by-side material yourself (e.g. placed two photos next to each other in an image file), proceed as described, but at the end select the "side-by-side (left image left/right)" for material with full width.
191
Note: To load MVC material into MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX, you must first
activate this codec for a fee (view page 333).
www.magix.com
192 Stereo3D (Plus/Premium version)
Set playback mode for 3D
There are various techniques available for playback of 3D videos on the computer. Depending on the technology used, the corresponding playback mode may be activated in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX.
Select the 3D mode you want to work with in the upper left corner of the video monitor.
Here is a list of available techniques and the corresponding requirements:
3D mode Technique Requirements
Display occurs in rows Polarizing filter
Polarizing filter glasses
Special monitor, typically referred to as a 3D monitor or similar
Note: You can choose between right or left image first, depending on which type of display produces better results on your monitor.
Side-by-side display Shutter mode
nVidia 3D Vision Kit
120 Hz monitor/projector
Note: You can choose between right or left image first, depending on which type of display produces better results on your monitor.
Note: Both of these modes should only be set in case the preview image is output on a separate monitor. Shutter mode also requires a 3D-capable graphics card.
Anaglyph display Color anaglyphs
Red/cyan glasses
Align videos and pictures for 3D
Anaglyph display is recommended for this, which may be set via the video
monitor (view page 191). Only in this mode is precise geometric alignment of
images is possible. www.magix.com
Stereo3D (Plus/Premium version)
Note: In case you wish to edit 3D-video material, it is recommended to conduct scene recognition and split the video into individual scenes. This is necessary because the left and right side of each scene must be arranged individually.
The so-called minimum point is the point in the 3D picture that is closest to the lenses. This forms the "center" of the 3D image and must be defined as such in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX.
For this task, go to "Media Pool -> Effects -> Stereo 3D" and access the entry
"Aligning".
193
Move both images one over the other, so that the minimum point of both sides is at the same location on the screen.
You should first see whether automations for spatial adjustment and synchronization deliver desired results. Click on the button "Automatic".
If this does not produce the desired effect, proceed as follows:
Find the minimum point in the image.
If the images are offset vertically, then these need to be balanced via the lower of the two slide controllers under "Spatial alignment".
If the images have rotational differences, you have to adjust these with the knob.
Try to position the minimum points of both sides precisely one above the other using the upper slider. www.magix.com
194 Stereo3D (Plus/Premium version)
To test the results, put on the cyan/red glasses. In case the image has an exaggerated spatial depth, try to position the left and right sides closer to each other using the controls under "Spatial alignment".
Use perspective correction in case the left and right image haven't been recorded in quite the right perspective in relation to each other in order to be able to join them into a single clear 3D image. Enter values into the dialog or drag on window edges in the video monitor.
Turn camera movements into 3D videos
Camera movements may be transformed into 3D videos by being duplicated and converted via time displacement. To do so, you can simply record on the right or the left side while, for example, driving along a street.
The speed should be set between 6-15 km/h (approx. 4-10 mph) and depends on the frame rate, the focal point, and the distance of the objects being filmed
(among other things). At increased speeds, it may occur that the spatial impression is too strong and the filmed material seems unnatural and unpleasant.
If the video is in the arrangement, the stereo depth for the 2D object may be set in the Media Pool via "Effects -> Stereo 3D --> Properties".
Depending on the direction of the recordings, you will have to move the control either to the right or the left.
Check the results in the anaglyph display with red/cyan glasses
Correct any unrealistic effects by adjusting the controller in the opposite direction.
If the spatial depth is exaggerated, reduce the changed parameters. www.magix.com
Stereo3D (Plus/Premium version)
Note: Not only camera movements, but also other 2D materials may be arranged spatially.
3D material may be edited with the same functions as 2D material.
Create titles for 3D videos
Xara3D title objects (view page 121) automatically have "real" 3D properties
and for this reason may be used in the arrangement without any problems.
Export and burn 3D videos
There are no special requirements for export and burning. Only the desired 3D technique is specified.
Anaglyph: This technique is recommended for uncomplicated playback of finished videos or playback via conventional TV sets or projectors. Viewers must simply put on a pair of red/cyan glasses to be able to enjoy a 3D film.
Side-by-side: Create 3D movies for a 3D-capable playback device without having to compromise the quality. It doesn't matter initially whether your video is viewed in "Shutter" mode or via "Polarized filter".
Depending on your playback device, you should set double resolution in order to produce full resolution for both the right and the left image.
Not all playback devices are capable of double resolution. If this is the case for your device, 50 % pinched images will be displayed. The quality is nevertheless higher than output via the anaglyph technique.
Note: When exporting to side-by-side-formats, make sure that the vertical resolution is the sum of both images, but the aspect ratio (e. g. 16:9) refers to a partial image!
195 www.magix.com
196 Stereo3D (Plus/Premium version)
Export files/upload movies to the Internet
The standard path for all file exports is via "File -> Export movie or File ->
Internet". Depending on the export format and destination, the export dialog also allows the 3D technique to be used to be selected.
For direct selection as Windows Media Video 3D, click "Export" and select "3D film" from the dialog.
Burning
When burning a Blu-ray Disc or DVD, you must first open the encoder settings in the burn dialog and set the desired 3D technology. Next, you may proceed to burn the disc as usual.
During the burning process, MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX automatically creates an intro video with corresponding instructions that will play back when the disc is placed into a drive. www.magix.com
Special functions and wizards
Special functions and wizards
In this chapter, we will introduce you to some of the especially useful special functions.
Use movie templates
Use movie templates in order to tell a whole story using just a few mouse clicks.
You can open movie menus either in the start dialog or in an already open program in Media Pool > Menu templates. Double-clicking on a menu template will open it in Storyboard Mode.
Insert own material
You can add your own content everywhere you see a placeholder (indicated with an arrow in the illustration). Drag the desired video from the Media Pool in front of the placeholder, which it should replace. The placeholders' names indicated which type of material should be inserted here (e.g. "Group recording").
197
If your video is too long for a placeholder, you will see a green bar in the mini timeline below the video monitor. You can grab it using your mouse and move it in such a way that just the right section of the video appears in the placeholder. If your inserted video is too short, it will be rejected by MAGIX
Movie Edit Pro MX. www.magix.com
198 Special functions and wizards
Audio tracks of inserted material
Menu templates contain audio material. For this reason, the audio track of the inserted audio material will be muted. You can, however, switch it on again by clicking on the speaker symbol in the preview image.
A speaker slide controller appears, which lets you control the volume of the original audio track of the inserted video clip.
Design your own titles
Click on the T symbol in the preview image in order to edit the title included with the movie template.
The Title editor (view page 118) will appear in the video
monitor. You can enter your own text there.
Further use of movie templates
Burning (view page 241)and Export (view page 258) of filled-in menu
templates takes place as with all other objects, whether with templates or without. In the "Burn" screen you will find menu templates that are specially
adjusted to menu templates in the "Menu templates" (view page 243)
categories.
Preview rendering
You may also instruct MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX to render specific sections that you have almost finished editing. This is especially useful in case smooth playback is not possible due to the applied effects and transitions. The advantage versus the option "Combine audio and video" in the "Edit" menu is that all of the objects will be maintained in the arrangement. The rendered material will only be played in the background when the playback marker reaches the corresponding position.
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX offers two options: www.magix.com
Special functions and wizards
It can automatically indicate all sections that can be rendered.
Or, alternatively, you can indicate the section that should be pre-rendered manually.
Note : The format that is used to render may be set via "File -> Settings ->
Preview rendering (view page 70)".
Automatic preview rendering
When using automatic preview rendering, you don't have to think about which sections could be affected. MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX analyzes your computer's performance and determines which sections can be considered for preview rendering.
To perform automatic preview rendering, proceed as follows:
Step 1: Click on the undo button in the lower toolbar.
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX will then analyze which sections should be pre-rendered. A dialog will appear, indicating how many areas have been located.
199
These sections will be additionally marked in the MAGIX Movie
Edit Pro MX timeline using red bars.
Step 2: Select "Yes" in the dialog to start preview rendering. If you choose
"No" instead, you can still conduct preview rendering later.
The red bars will appear green after preview rendering is over. If you make changes in the pre-rendered section, it will appear red again and will have to
www.magix.com
200 Special functions and wizards
Manual preview rendering
In manual preview rendering you first have to identify the problem-prone section.
Step 1: First, place an in and out point above the range to be rendered.
Step 2: Click on the preview rendering button and select "Start preview rendering..." in the context menu.
A preview rendering dialog will appear.
Step 3: Select "Range".
The preselected range will now be rendered.
After rendering, a green line appears in the timeline to symbolize that this range has been rendered.
As with automatic rendering, the section will remain green as long as no further changes are made to it. The green line will then turn red and can be updated again.
Update preview rendering
Preview rendering is effective only as long as no changes are made to the pre-rendered area. You can recognize a pre-rendered area from the green bars appearing above it on the timeline. As soon as an object in the section has been edited, the green bar will turn red. You can update this section at any time.
1.
To do so, place the playback marker inside the section to be updated. www.magix.com
Special functions and wizards
2.
Click on the "Preview rendering" button.
3.
In the preview rendering dialog, select "Range" in order to update just the section selected by the playback marker. If you select "All", all non-rendered (red) sections will be rendered.
Automatic scene recognition
201
Automatic scene recognition can be opened via the "Effects" menu. The scene recognition function analyzes the film for scene transitions and scans for drastic changes in the brightness and color distribution within the picture.
Automatically created timestamps from digital video devices (the points in time at which the device was turned on and off) are also marked as scenes.
First, select "Start" from the "Scene change" box. The search for possible scene transitions will begin. If you have a large amount of material, then this may take a while, but the image analysis has to be done just once for each recording. The results are saved together with the video file.
If the scene recognition is performed again with the same source material, then the scene transitions found are immediately displayed. If you are still not happy with the resulting scene partitioning simply repeat and correct where necessary.
All found scene transitions in the list can be checked in the dialog. Every scene marker can be selected or deleted. Select a scene transition from the list of found scene transitions and use the preview images to check whether the found transition is really a scene change or not. www.magix.com
202 Special functions and wizards
Tip: This option is helpful, for example, if a camera flash was captured in the source footage. The flash from the camera would cause a sudden brightness modification even though there was no actual scene change.
The preview always displays the end of the previous scene and the beginning of the new scene. If the images do not differ except for the brightness, then the scene may have been falsely recognized. In this case select "Delete scene marker" .
Via the zoom +/- buttons you can enlarge the part of the arranger where the selected scene begins or previous scene ended.
You can use the "Sensitivity" controller to change the sensitivity of the scene recognition to detect different scene changes, depending on the settings.
"Action on OK" lets you specify whether the movie should be cut at the selected scene transition or at all scene transitions and whether the found scenes should be saved as takes. www.magix.com
Special functions and wizards
Travel route animation
Using the travel route animation, you can quickly create maps with animated travel routes. You can start travel route animation via the "Edit" menu >
Wizards > Travel route animation".
Note: This function is available only in the Plus/Premium version.
Program interface of the travel route animation
203
Map: Displays map material from openstreetmap.org.
Selected locations: All locations, searched using geonames.org or selected manually on the map, will be shown on the list and marked using pins.
Map section + zoom: The map may be moved by pressing the arrows.
"Zoom" enables you to zoom into the current section (+) to view more details or to zoom out (-) for a better overview.
Show lines: If at least 2 locations are marked on the map, then this function will be available for linking the locations. The line color and thickness may be changed.
Animation: You can animate your travel route and save as video in WMV format.
Save as image: The current map section may be saved as an image in the format PNG, BMP, JPG, or TIFF. www.magix.com
204 Special functions and wizards
Select locations on the map
There are several options for selecting locations on the map for creating a route.
Note : The map section will adjust itself depending on how many locations you select and where they are. If you would like to view details about a location, simply zoom in using "+" on the number block or the mouse wheel.
Search and select locations:
1.
Click on the "+" button below "Edit destinations" to add an entry. This new entry will appear blue below existing locations.
2.
Assign a name to the new location and press Enter. The destination will be added to the map. An additional marker is set for beginning and end of a tour.
Note: If multiple locations are possible, a list with possible choices will open. You can determine the destination by picking one from the list with your mouse.
If important intermediate stages of the route should also have a marker, click on the marker symbol in the properties
(cogwheel) of the destination.
Set destinations manually:
1.
Move the map boundary by clicking on the map and holding down the mouse key so as to make the desired destination visible.
2.
Click on this button under "Edit destinations" to activate manual entering of locations, or use the keyboard shortcut "M".
3.
Click the target destination on the map. A new entry to the list will be made. www.magix.com
Rename destinations:
Special functions and wizards
You can rename destinations by going to its properties
(cogwheel symbol) without changing it.
205
Search destination anew:
If the destination is incorrect, you can search the location again in order to adjust the position of the marker.
Enter a new name in the entry field and click on the magnifying glass or press enter.
Import GPX file:
If you have created a route with a GPS device and saved it as a GPX file, you can import it and show the route on the map.
Note: Depending on the length of the route, it can take some time for the file to be imported and displayed.
Adjust & delete locations
Change the sequence of destinations:
The order of destinations in the list corresponds to the sequence in which they were created. You can edit the order of the destinations by clicking on a location on the list and dragging it to a new place with the mouse key held down. The route on the map will be adjusted. You can see this especially well if
you've activated the line (view page 207) in order to optimize the travel route
display.
Adjust the position of the destination:
You can adjust the position of a destination by grabbing the marker on the map with your mouse and dragging it with the depressed mouse key to a new position on the map. The marker will be moved, the travel route adjusted and the new name of the destination will be automatically changed in the list. www.magix.com
206 Special functions and wizards
Note: If the destination marker doesn't appear, you can activate it in the properties (cogwheel) by clicking on the marker symbol.
Hide destination:
Click on the eye icon below the properties (cogwheel) of a destination. The destination will remain in the list, but will be hidden on the map and will not appear in the route. Click on the eye again to display the location again.
Remove destination from the list:
To delete a destination from the list and the route, click on this button next to the destination.
Save and load routes
The entire list of marked locations may be saved to load it later - without having to search for and select all of the locations again.
Save as file:
Click on this button under "Edit destinations" or use the keyboard shortcut "Ctrl + S".
Enter the save location and name of the location list in the dialog that appears.
Click "Save" to back up the list and quit the dialog.
Open list:
To load a saved location list, click this button under "Edit destinations" or use the keyboard shortcut "Ctrl + O".
Navigate to the save location and select the location list in the dialog that appears.
Clicking on "Open" closes the dialog and opens the list with saved destinations. www.magix.com
Special functions and wizards
Adjust map section
Use this button to move the map section upwards (north), to the right (east), downwards (south), or to the left (west).
The arrow keys on the keyboard may also be used to move.
Click on the point between the arrows to move the map window in order to center the selected destination.
Use this controller to zoom out of the map (-) or into it (+). The keys "+" and "-" on the keyboard or the mouse wheel may also be used to zoom in and out.
If you would like to show all marked locations and reveal as much of the map as possible, click this button and the map will be adjusted automatically.
If you would like to display only the route without the location markers, click here and the pins will be hidden. A repeat click will display them again.
207
Show lines (connect locations)
For two or more marked locations, the function "Show lines" will appear. This function connects destinations on a map with a line in order to better visualize the route.
Click this symbol to show lines connecting selected locations. The functions responsible for line transparency, thickness, and color are to the right.
Tip: The order of destinations in the list corresponds to the sequence in which they were created. You can edit the order of the destinations by clicking on a location on the list and dragging it to a new place with the mouse key held down. The route on the map will be adjusted and the line will follow a different course.
Hide line: To hide the line, click on the "Lines" button again.
Transparency and line thickness: Use the controller to change the transparency (left controller) and the thickness of the lines (right controller). www.magix.com
208 Special functions and wizards
Line color: Set the desired line color using the color field and slider.
Tip: You can also create animations for the connecting line in the "Animation"
(view page 208) section and save it as a video.
Animation
For two or more marked locations, the function "Animation" will appear.
This enables you to display your travel route in motion and even save it as a WMV format movie, e.g. to integrate it into vacation movies or to send it.
Scroll map : Activate "Scroll map" and the map will move from location to location when the animation is played back.
Animate line: The connecting line slowly connects all selected locations, from the first to the last. It is moving at the speed of an animated object.
Soft animation : The animation starts slower, speeds up, and then slows down before each location.
Animate object : You can select an object to follow the route of the trip, such as a car or an airplane.
Duration (seconds) : You can adjust the duration of the animation however you like, depending on the length of the route. Enter seconds into the filed and test the results via the preview option to see if you like the animation.
Preview: Before you save an animation as a video, test it to see if it looks the way you want it to by clicking "Play".
Click on this button to save the animation as a video. Enter the save location and name of the video in the dialog that appears.
Note : This button indicates the height and width of the future image. These values are adjusted as soon as window sizes are adjusted or when the location list is shown (arrow next to "Destinations").
Close: To leave the animation area, click "Close". www.magix.com
Special functions and wizards
Create a picture of a map
You can create a picture from a section of a map (including location markings), e.g. to print it.
Step 1 : Zoom into the map until you have reached the desired level of detail.
Step 2 : Click this button (shortcut "Ctrl + E") and enter the save location and the name of the image in the dialog that appears. You may also select the format for the picture.
209
Note : This button indicates the height and width of the future image. These values are adjusted as soon as window sizes are adjusted or when the location list is shown (arrow next to "Destinations").
Step 3: With one click on "Save", the image is saved and the dialog is closed.
If you want to, you can hide the list of locations to the left to show a larger section of the map.
Another click on this symbol will show the list again.
Keyboard shortcuts
Manual selection of locations
Zoom into map
Zoom out of map
Save location list
Load location list
Save map section (with location markings) as image
Move map section north (upwards)
Move map section east (right)
Move map section south (downwards)
Move map section west (left)
Cancel video export
"M"
"+" on the number block
"-" on the number block
"Ctrl + S"
"Ctrl + O"
"Ctrl + E"
"Up arrow"
"Right arrow"
"Down arrow"
"Left arrow"
"Esc" www.magix.com
210 Special functions and wizards
Produce panorama pictures
This special function may be selected for highlighted photos under "Effects >
Video object effects > Create panorama". Using it, you can combine several photos into a wide panorama photo. You don't need to create exclusively
"proper" panoramas; Let your imagination run wild and put together anything you want to.
Tip: Optimize you photos beforehand, so that the transitions are not to be seen in the finished panorama.
Select pictures for panorama
Load all necessary images into the film project as usual. The images that should make up the panorama should be selected one after the other while holding down the "Shift" key. Select the entry "Create panorama" from the
context menu "Effects" (view page 291) > "Video object effects".
Invert image sequence for panorama image
Sometimes photos are accidentally loaded in the wrong sequence or were created from left to right. If you forgot to sort your photos correctly beforehand, then simply click "Invert sequence". www.magix.com
Special functions and wizards
Calculating the panorama image
If you click "Create", the panorama image will be processed. Depending on the resolution and number of original images included, this may take some time.
The original photos are replaced in your slideshow with the panorama image you've created, but the original files on the hard drive will remain intact.
211
Hint: You can create a panorama image from a maximum of six images. Click on "More options" for more information on the upgrade.
Finished panorama (2 images)
Finished panorama from 2 images www.magix.com
212 Special functions and wizards
Slideshow Maker
Slideshow Maker is ideal for converting still images into moving pictures, adding background music, and effects.
Open Slideshow Maker via "Edit -> Wizards".
Style templates
Select a template that best matches your needs.
Save/delete style template
Homemade style templates appear in the list of included style templates.
If you like, these can be deleted again.
Intensity
Controls the portion of video and image objects that feature effects.
Transitions
The different sliders are used to set the portion of individual fade types. www.magix.com
3D / Other :
Special functions and wizards
Fade duration : Set the length of the fades in seconds.
Random fades : The fades are set to random values.
Effects
The faders enable the respective effects types to be specified.
Random effects : The faders that control the amount of effects are set randomly.
Treat special image formats intelligently : Panoramas and portrait photos can be treated "intelligently". If this option is activated, then panoramas and portraits will be treated with special effects adjusted to the format. These effects can also be selected in the detail view.
If this option is selected, then these images will use the same effects as all other images.
Details activates effects or fades in the corresponding category. The arrow below the preview monitor plays a preview.
Properties & title
Film length
Resulting film length : This is an estimation of how long the film will be after applying Slideshow Maker.
Available music : This is the complete length of the music that is currently
selected. Background music (view page 214) enables detailed settings for the
pieces of music to be used.
Adjust film length to the music : An attempt is made to adjust the length of photo objects to the background music. If the film is too short the music will be cut off. If the film is too long, the music will repeat.
Adjust music length to the film : Photo objects have a set length, and the resulting film is filled with music. The music at the end of the movie is simply faded out.
Including video objects
Process videos : If this option is set, then videos will be automatically processed with effects and transitions. www.magix.com
213
214 Special functions and wizards
Length : Settings may be made here about whether the original length of the video should be maintained or if it should be shortened.
Opening and closing credits
Set the text for opening and closing credits here.
Text : Enter the corresponding text for opening and closing credits that should be added by Slideshow Maker.
File : A title template, a video, or an image file may also be used.
Note : Titles created using Slideshow Maker may also be edited at any time.
Group associated images together
If this option is active, an attempt is made to detect associated events via their date information and to separate them from each other optically. Detection of individual events is based on the time span of these events to achieve a sensible separation.
Begin group with black fade :A black fade is added between the different events.
Begin group with title and black fade :A black fade is added between the different events.A title is also faded in with a suitable duration, e.g. 1st/2nd/3rd day, provided the events take place over multiple days.
Begin group with title and picture :A black fade is added between the different events.A title is also faded in with a suitable duration after the black fade, e.g.
1st/2nd/3rd day, provided the events take place over multiple days.
Background music
Specify if and which music should be used for the background here.
Use background music : Adds background music.
Load file(s) : A file selection dialog will open to choose a folder featuring music; select one or multiple files.
Remove : The selected pieces of music are removed from the list and will not be used. www.magix.com
Special functions and wizards
Insert random : MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX selects random pieces of music from the folder "Import -> My Media -> Slideshow music" in the Media Pool.
Preview : This button previews the selected piece of music.
Volume ratio : This slider controls the volume ratio between the original sound and the background music.
Tip : Pieces of music in the first track are listed and used for the background music, provided they are not removed.
215
Musical cut adjustment
Behind this option for audio object is an option to "control" video objects by music. This way, you can synchronize image sequences with music to, for example, produce video clips.
Requisite for this is that as many as possible different video objects lie in track
1, separated by "hard cuts", without any special fade effects. To prepare, first create a material track with various video clips that should be combined into one video clip.
Load a fitting song and select "adjust edit according to music" from the context menu.
Now, the song's audio object already has beat information. Normally, this will not be the case.
You will then be asked, if the Beat Recognition Assistant should be opened.
Click on "Open Assistant". www.magix.com
216 Special functions and wizards
The "MAGIX Remix Agent" dialog will open. This tool will now analyze the song's rhythm. Beat markers will be created, forming the base for adjustment according to music.
After determining the BPM value of the song, the song will be subdivided into short passages of equal length. The individual objects having the duration of exactly one bar at first stay grouped, so as not to accidentally "rearrange" the song.
Tip: (Of course, if you like you can do just that! Choose menu "Ungroup to edit graphics".
When editing according to music, only the resulting object edges are important. Because all objects can always latch to each other on their edges, videos can be arranged to transition exactly to the beat of the music.
Prerequisites for using the beat recognition assistant
Songs must be longer than 15 seconds www.magix.com
Special functions and wizards
Songs must be "rhythmic" (i.e. they can be danced to)
Songs must be in stereo format
Preparation - Setting the start marker and object end
Before opening the Auto Remix Assistant, you should set the start marker at the position in the song object in the arranger where you want detection to start. If the song contains a long intro without beats, set the start marker after the intro. As a rule of thumb, the Auto Remix Assistant should always be "fed" dance music.
The start marker should be set before a quarter note beat or, better still, briefly before a beat at the start of a bar.
If the start marker lies before the song object, the object is examined from the beginning.
If detection is not performed by the end of the song, the object can be shortened accordingly with the object handle at the end of the object.
Automatic Tempo Recognition
When the Auto Remix Assistant is launched, the selected song object is analyzed and played back. A metronome begins to click according to the result and lines visualize the positions of the quarter notes found in the wave-shaped display.
The following cases are differentiated:
Position of the start of a measure (the one): red line.
Position of the other quarter notes (the two, three, and four): green lines.
Reliably recognized positions: thick lines.
Unreliably recognized positions: thin lines.
When tapped, blue lines appear.
If the tact and tempo information is already present, points are indicated above the display at the appropriate positions. The metronome volume can be regulated below and to the left of the wave-shaped display. To the right, the
BPM value is indicated. If a valid BPM value was found, it is displayed in green.
If the metronome clicks in time with the music, the measure start is correct. If not, you can correct the tempo manually.
217 www.magix.com
218 Special functions and wizards
Setting the manual and Onbeat/Offbeat
If the result is incorrect, you can help the Auto Remix Assistant with a few mouse clicks on the correction buttons.
There are two possibilities:
On the one hand, the "Tempo correction" list offers alternative BPM numbers which could also fit with the music. The adjustable BPM values are detected automatically – the total BPM can therefore deviate from song to song.
For more difficult audio material, we recommend using the "Tapping input" mode. Either the "T" key must be pressed or the "Tap tempo" button must be clicked with the mouse in time with the music. With repeated tapping of the tempo correction button, one should keep an eye on the color in the BPM display. In the "unlocked" condition (red), the tapping is not in time with the music. One should tap until the "locked" condition is displayed. After a short time, you will hear if the result is correct via the metronome.
Subsequently, offbeat correction takes place as required. If the detected quarter note beats lie around the length of an eighth note (transferred behind the real positions of the quarter note beats), one or more alternatives can be selected from the onbeat/offbeat correction list.
Determining the start of a measure
Next, the starting point of the measure is corrected. The beat at the start of the measure must always agree with the high tone of the metronome and/or the red line in the wave-shaped display.
Corrections can be made by tapping; If the start of the measure can be be heard, tap with the mouse or press the "T" key. Alternatively, you can also select how many quarter notes the "one" is to be pushed to back.
If the starting marker was set briefly before the first beat of a measure, this correction is not necessary.
Note: With all corrections, the metronome and visualization react to the lines in the wave-shaped display only after a short delay.
Using BPM and beat detection
Now you may select one of the actions to be adapted to the arrangement song
(or vice versa) or cut up the songs at the ends of a measure. www.magix.com
Special functions and wizards
Save only Tempo & Beat information
Only wave file data is stored. This makes sense if some manual post-correction is required for determining beat/tempo.
When the data is stored, tempo & beat regulation can be released for future tempo adjustments or to create object remixes.
219
Tempo adjustment
Setting the object tempo to the arrangement tempo
This fits the object length to the existing arrangement. Three different procedures are possible: timestretching, resampling, or audio quantization.
Timestretching keeps the pitch of the song constant, but sometimes the sound quality can suffer.
Resampling changes the pitch (similar to changing the speed of a record player), and retains the sound quality of the song as much as is possible.
During audio quantization, the audio file takes the tempo adjustments into consideration as if the first remix object (see below) were created and combined immediately into a new audio file. If the recognition is uncertain, extreme tempo fluctuation may result. It is particularly important to set the starting marker so that the tempo is recognized definitely. The advantage of audio quantization is that small tempo fluctuations in the music balance out.
The start of the measure always agrees with the start of the arrangement measure and never plays out of time.
Setting the arrangement tempo to the object tempo
The arrangement adopts the detected BPM value. If you would like to use the cut-up song as the basis for a new composition (e.g. for remixes), then this option should be active.
Creating remix objects
The song is cut by beat into individual objects. Some applications may include:
To produce loops from complete songs which can then be used with other material. Most importantly, not all remix objects are suitable as loops. Ideally, less complex material should be used, e.g. drums from an intro.
To remix songs, thus changing the sequence of the objects, cutting or doubling beats or to enrich the song with other loops or synth objects.
To mix two songs: If percussion and tempo fit perfectly, can you blend the songs without "side effects"? www.magix.com
220 Special functions and wizards
This option can be activated later from the "Object" menu, provided that the tempo data is stored.
The "Audio quantization" option: Audio quantization fits new objects exactly in time with the arrangement.
With homemade music, tempo fluctuations are common, and therefore different measure lengths may result. Nevertheless, so that the objects fit into the rigid timing pattern of the VIPs, the time processor is activated automatically and object timestretching is used to correct the different lengths.
Setting resampling for small corrections: If the necessary corrections are very small, better quality resampling can be used instead of timestretching.
Afterwards, you should not change the master tempo any longer, since definite pitch changes may arise.
Remix objects in "Loop" mode: New objects are set in "Loop" mode. When extending the object with the right object mouse handle, the original length of the object is played again and again.
Setting the arrangement tempo to the object tempo: (see above)
Note: Time correction assigned to objects can be subsequently cancelled if the time processor is called up and edited ("Timestretch/Resample object", or double click on the object to open the FX racks associated with the time processor).
Cancel: The dialog is closed.
Batch conversion
Batch conversion makes it is possible to convert multiple video files, movies, objects, or whole projects into another format in just one step.
Open batch conversion
Batch conversion can be opened using different presets. A pre-selection appears only if you have loaded a film or a project.
The following scenarios exist:
Batch conversion has been opened from the context menu in the Media Pool
(view page 21, view page 44): The file selected in the Media Pool beforehand
www.magix.com
Special functions and wizards will be transferred to the task list and can be converted to the available formats. In case of projects which contain multiple movies, all movies will appear as individual tasks.
Only one empty movie is open: A dialog opens additionally for batch conversion, in which video files that have to be converted to other formats can be selected and loaded.
A movie with video material and more than one object in the first track is opened. A dialog opens, in which you can select which tasks should be created for batch conversion.
All scenes in the movie: All objects present in the 1st track will be used as starting points for the video files to be exported. An application for this could be that all scene beginnings of a movie should be exported as bitmap files or a backup for a movie is to be created as individual scenes.
-
Multiple movies: The opened movie will be exported as a whole video.
Additional movies can be added to the list in the dialog.
Multiple movies with video material are open: The opened movie will be exported as a complete video. This is especially useful for large projects with a lot of individual movies, eliminating the need to export each one individually.
Administration
Save and load your settings here. These include the list of files to be exported and the export settings and names of all entries.
221
Caution! Batch conversion references the projects, movies, and the objects contained therein directly. Keep in mind that when converting entire movies, the source material must also be available. During conversion of individual objects from movies, you have to make sure that the movie file has not been changed between loading and saving.
Queued entries for batch conversion
This is the list of all objects that have to be converted into the indicated format.
Each task can have its own export settings.
Add files (not during conversion of individual objects from movies) : Manually add files, including video files and projects.
Remove selected : The marked tasks will be removed from the list.
Duplicate selected : If you would like to export tasks in multiple formats, you can simply mark and duplicate them and assign individual export settings to them. www.magix.com
222 Special functions and wizards
Format settings for the selected conversion process
These are settings for the currently selected tasks, and multiple tasks can be given a setting simultaneously. Select one or more tasks from the task list.
Note on format setting for multiple tasks: If one of the marked tasks already has an individual setting, its will be lost after another format is selected. To prevent this, remove the selection for each task using Ctrl + mouse-click.
Set the target format in the flip menu. Windows Media Video format (*.wmv) is the default.
Advanced settings: This opens the dialog for the advanced format settings.
This corresponds to the dialog for normal video export of a movie.
Tip: If you give several tasks the same file name, the files created will be documented intelligently. For example, you can easily convert and simultaneously line up multiple movies that belong together thematically.
Shut down PC automatically after successful export
This option is especially useful when you export long movies and are using an especially high-quality and resource-demanding export format. You can leave the computer to work on the individual tasks and after finishing them it will turn itself off.
Start batch conversion
Click on "Start conversion" to start the process. After ending conversion processes, a list of all export processes with a message informing of its success will appear.
Hint: During batch conversion, messages that appear during normal file import will be for the most part suppressed. This is to enable the smoothest conversion of all tasks. Therefore, please make sure that all files to be converted or the project can be easily loaded before starting a batch conversion. www.magix.com
Special functions and wizards
Search for and remove ads
223
This wizard in the context menu for video objects may be used to locate and remove advertising blocks in the recorded material automatically.
The principle: The program searches for typical signs of a beginning and end of an ad break, these sections are selected and cut out, so that the ad is removed. The ad-remover works particularly well for movies in 16:9 format.
These movies in wide screen format have a black stripe at the top and bottom of the screen. When the ads start, these stripes often disappear. MAGIX Movie
Edit Pro MX searches for and removes those sections. "Get black values" allows you to click on the black stripes in the video monitor with the eyedropper tool to determine the black value for improved detection. Another general sign of advertising is increased volume.
The dialog enables you to select whether you simply want to mark commercial breaks initially or delete them immediately. Additional search and display options are also available. www.magix.com
224 Video recorder
Video recorder
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX provides you with a PC-based TV and video recorder. A functional TV card/TV tuner box or DVB-T/S card is required to use
Video recorder.
Hook up TVs, monitors or projectors
With Video recorder and other suitable TV cards/TV tuner boxes you can transform your PC into a TV. You can have your TV program displayed on devices connected to your computer like PC monitors, video projectors or TV devices. Simply connect up the desired output device to the VGA output (TV symbol) of your graphics card.
Tip: When connecting video projectors to notebooks "No signal" may be displayed. In this case, switch to the VGA output of the laptop using the key combination Fn+Screen key. www.magix.com
Buttons overview
Video recorder 225
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15
Reset to start view
Recording
Timeshift mode
Instant record
Favorites + Channel list
Switch back to previous channel
Switch to next channel
Mute : Turns off sound
Turn down sound
Turn up sound
Hide/Show info area
Setup : Open settings dialog
Timer : Program timer control
Program : Electronic program guide (EPG)
DVB TV guide or (MAGIX Online TV Guide).
Open recordings folder www.magix.com
226 Video recorder
If you have opened the Video recorder directly, you can easily edit the program that you have just recorded using the main program.
VCR settings
The button opens the settings dialog for the VCR. www.magix.com
Video recorder
Video driver: Configure the driver of your TV card here. You can also select
DVB-S and DVB-T cards. In this case the dialog is replaced with a simpler version (see below).
Audio driver: Configure the audio driver of the sound card or the sound device you would like to use for recording and playing TV sound.
The peak meter indicates an existing audio signal. It is optimally calibrated if the loudest parts just reach 0 dB.
Level: Here you can open a level fader to customize the controls.
Automatic mixer control: Adjusts audio playback to the record status, i.e. you will hear the input signal while you are watching live TV. The wave output is muted. The line input is also automatically selected as the recording source.
Deactivate this option only if you want to use a different sound card input. With the Mixer button you can select the input manually.
Save in the following folder: Select the folder to which you wish to save your video file. The standard recording folder (TV recordings) is set as the default folder.
Edit after recording: This option opens the "Edit after recording" dialog. Read more on this in the chapter "Recording interface".
Select record format: Choose from different recording formats according to your needs, or define your own via "Configuration ".
Advanced opens the special settings options of the TV card (More information
formats.
Optimize image for PC: This option activates a special deinterlacing function for optimizing TV playback on your PC's screen. It is not supported by every graphics/TV card combination and in any case requires a DirectX-compatible graphics card driver.
Cable/Antenna: Specify whether you are receiving the TV signal via cable or an antenna.
No picture while recording: To reduce the CPU load you can suppress output of the TV picture while recording.
227 www.magix.com
228 Video recorder
Remote Control
Here you will find a selection of remote controls from various manufacturers for controlling the Video recorder. If you find that you own none of the remote controls, simply try out various settings.
Hint: Some remote controls require that their reception software is running, otherwise they will not be recognized by MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX.
Setup for DVB cards
No picture while recording: This option serves to free up processing power on your computer: Pictures will not be displayed while recording.
Call up EPG information in the background: EPG information is open in the background while you watch TV. Once you open the timer dialog for programming a recording, the information will be made available to you immediately. www.magix.com
Video recorder
Synchronize time: The system clock is synchronized with the DVB time.
Analyze commercials while recording: Commercials are recognized while recording. The programs are edited directly after recording (see dialog: Edit after recording).
Prefer Dolby® Digital Audio: If the channel offers Dolby® Digital sound in addition to the normal stereo sound, Dolby® will be chosen automatically.
To edit Dolby® Digital Audio in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX a Dolby® Digital codec has to be activated.
Play Dolby® Digital in surround mode: If you own a Dolby® Digital Surround sound stereo, you can playback all programs with 5.1 Surround sound on your system by choosing this option. First, make sure that the channel you've selected broadcasts in 5.1 format. To be able to receive the corresponding programs in 5.1 Surround, you must either select the "Prefer Dolby® Digital
Audio" option, or select an Dolby ® Digital audio channel for the network in the advanced mode.
Edit after recording: This option opens the "Edit after recording" dialog. Read more on this in the chapter "Recording interface".
Remote Control
Here you will find a selection of remote controls from various manufacturers for controlling the Video recorder. If you find that you own none of the remote controls, simply try out various settings.
Hint: Some remote controls require that their reception software is running, otherwise they will not be recognized by MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX.
229
Configure channels for analog reception
For digital TV reception (DVB-T/S) MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX is already equipped with a pre-configured channel list.
With analog TV reception (antenna or cable), however, you will have to set up the TV channels you can/wish to receive before using the TV or the VCR for the first time. This is done much in a similar way to using a "real" TV by using the in-built channel search function. www.magix.com
230 Video recorder
In the start view of the Video recorder click on the "TV" button switch it on.
On the transport control below click on the television symbol to open the favorites and the channel list.
The empty favorites list will now open.
At the top of the list click on the
"Channel list" button. You will now be shown the list of set channels.
The favorites list is empty, but that's what is about to change.
Click on "Advanced" to access the channel list options. www.magix.com
Video recorder 231
In the options field to the right you can start the channel search function and configure the channel list.
Tip: The option "Switch on fine-tuning during autosearch" increases the likelihood of finding TV channels accurately. Reception will improve, but it will take longer for the channel search function to complete.
Channel list for analog programs
You can access the channel list by clicking on the corresponding symbol in the transport control and then on the "Channel list" button. Open the "Channel list" dialog options by clicking on the "Advanced" button. www.magix.com
232 Video recorder
Channel list: The programmed channels are displayed in the channel list to the left.
Add/Remove channels: Use these options to add/remove channels from the list.
Start channel search function: After opening the dialog for the first time, the first thing you should do is activate the station search function. Here, according to the selected reception option (cable or antenna), the frequency range will be searched for channels that it can receive.
Switch on fine-tuning during autosearch: This option increases the likelihood of finding TV channels. Reception will improve, but it will take longer for the channel search function to complete. Found channels will be numbered in the channel list.
Move channel : Use the arrows to move the position of a channel up and down in a list.
Channel name: The corresponding channel name can be added to each channel entry. This has to be done manually, because channel networks are www.magix.com
Video recorder not numbered uniformly. Select the channel from the list and enter the appropriate name on the right.
Video frequency: If the image of sound reception is poor, the frequency can be fine tuned using the "+" and "-" buttons to improve it.
233
Note: It's important that the channels are given the correct names as the
Electronic Program Guide programs the VCR using these names.
Import/Export: You can save the current MAGIX channel list using the Export button. Using the Import button, it is possible to import a channel list. This way you can, for example, use the channel list that you have created in an earlier program version or in a different MAGIX program with a TV function. www.magix.com
234 Video recorder
Channel list for DVB cards
If you select a DVB card as your TV tuner, a few details are changed in the station configuration. Furthermore, DVB includes its own EPG (Electronic
Programming Guide).
Stations are grouped together in so-called "Bouquets". The station list shows only these channel bunches, and individual stations can be displayed with a double click. They don't have to be renamed. At the top of the list is a favorites packet, which allows you to sort your favorite stations with the "Favorites" button.
Use "Advanced" to access the settings for the station search function and for the individual channels. With DVB-S the satellite can be selected, and with
DVB-T you can select the region. Using frequency lists, you can quickly find stations. With "Individual frequencies", you can make a specific station search through particular frequencies. It will find available channels and sort them into new or available "bunches". www.magix.com
Video recorder
Multi LNB configuration: Opens the hardware configuration for DVB-S cards. If the VCR opens correctly but you still don't receive a picture, you can make additional settings here. If you have several LNBs connected to your satellite system, you can also configure them here.
List channels automatically: All channels are automatically listed alphabetically
(irrespective of the bunch they belong to). The channels are automatically marked with icons indicating whether they are normal, encrypted ("crypt") or radio channels ("audio").
Search for channels: Entering the first letter will help you find your channel faster.
Edit channels: Here you can sort a channel into the favorites packet and specify whether or not EPG data should be requested or not. Since some stations have multiple sound tracks, you can select them with "audio channel".
This concerns especially channels with Dolby® Digital 5.1 Surround Sound.
Import/Export: You can save the current MAGIX channel list using the Export button. Using the Import button, it is possible to import a channel list. This way you can, for example, use the channel list that you have created in an earlier program version or in a different MAGIX program with a TV function.
In case you use a DVB-T card, you can visit http://www.linuxtv.org/vdrwiki/index.php/Main_Page http://www.vdr-wiki.de/wiki/index.php/DVB-T_channels.conf for more information.
235 www.magix.com
236 Video recorder
TV program
The "Program" button in TV mode of the Video recorder opens the TV program view.
This provides the option to get informed without any paper about TV programs: The free DVB-TV Guide offers a 14-day overview of the TV schedule. DVB reception via a DVB stick or a DVB card is required for this to work. The program overview can be selected via the "TV program" button.
The DVB TV replaces your conventional TV guide and provides more comfort than your standard guide:
You can search for specific programs, for example, if you can't quite remember which channel shows your favorite program.
Shows can be programmed directly as recordings without having to tediously program your video recorder, saving you time.
You can set the order of the channel list yourself, without having to stick to the order of your standard TV guides.
Additional information about the selected program
The "Additional information" dialog can be opened by double-clicking on a program. Here you will find detailed information on the selected program. This may also include an age recommendation if provided.
Recording : The selected program is added to the timer of the VCR if you click on the "Record" button.
This symbol appears in programs that are broadcast in
16:9 (widescreen) format.
Capture options
In this dialog you can specify actions that should be executed after the last programmed recording: shut down the computer and update the EPG files. www.magix.com
Video recorder
Recording time adjustment: If the EPG data differs from the actual starting and finishing times of the shows, you can set the buffer times here to start the recording earlier or finish it later.
237
Timer programming
The timer programming for time-controlled VCR recordings can be opened via the "Timer" button.
Note : If you use one of the two integrated EPGs (the DVB TV Guide or the
MAGIX Online TV Guide, the data of the EPG is used to make timer programming easier. If you choose not to use either of the EPGs, you can also
choose to execute the timer programming manually (view page 239).
If recordings have been programmed and you exit MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX, a small tray symbol makes sure that just before the recording starts, MAGIX
Movie Edit Pro MX starts again and the VCR turns on.
Note! The automatic updates from Windows XP (with SP2) & Windows Vista may force the computer to reboot, so that the programmed recording will be interrupted or not started at all. For this reason, it is recommended that you deactivate automatic updates for Windows.
To the left of the dialog, the program of the current show is displayed. On the right-hand side of the dialog you can see all of the pre-programmed recordings. www.magix.com
238 Video recorder
Recordings : First of all, select the program you wish to record from the list on the left. Then click on the "Record" button to move the show into the recording list on the right.
More information : Here you can check up on additional information relating to a show.
Edit : This button (or by double clicking entries in the recording list) opens the
"Program recording" dialog.
Remove : This button removes the selected shows from the recording list.
Manual programming : You can also insert, edit, or remove recordings manually. This is especially necessary if you use neither the DVB TV Guide. www.magix.com
Manual timer programming
Video recorder 239
Recording start/end: Here you can specify when the recording should start and end as well as the date. Clicking on the date opens up a calendar.
Channel: Here you can specify which channel is to be recorded.
Repeat: Here you can define a series of recordings to record daily or weekly shows.
Recording/Folder name: You can also give the recording a descriptive title and change the recording folder.
Correct time at end of recording (min): If the recording time was programmed via the EPG, you can add additional time to extend the record time. www.magix.com
240 Video recorder
Timeshift recording: Recording starts in Timeshift mode, i.e. you can already watch the program while it is being recorded.
Timeshift mode
In Timeshift mode for analog TV cards the program can be recorded and played back at the same time. This way, a TV show can be watched with a time delay if so wished.
As soon as you switch to Timeshift mode, the show is "stopped". Of course, it remains running in the background and is still being recorded. A transport console opens. Use this to move back and forth through the program. This way you can, for example:
Stop the program to take a telephone call. To do so, simply activate Timeshift mode. Once you're finished with your call and you wish to resume viewing, click on the playback button.
Fast forward the ads. Start the video recorder in Timeshift mode when the program starts. Then do something else for roughly the amount of time ads will show throughout the duration of the program. When you decide that you want to watch the program, press the play button. If an ad-block comes, simply use the
"Jump ahead 30 seconds" button to skip the ads.
Replay: Here you can rewind. Start Timeshift mode and playback at the exact same time. Now move the position slider to the far right. Playback is now in the "present". If something exciting happens, you can use the "Jump back 30 seconds" button to get an action replay, just like if you are watching a football match.
Save recorded programs
Use the video recorder button "Open recording folder" to access the folder with the recorded programs.
A standard dialog for file selection now opens.
You can sort the programs according to channel, name and record time, delete programs or view advanced EPG information for the program. DVB radio recordings are not played by the video recorder, but you can press a button to listen to the recordings using MAGIX Music Manager. www.magix.com
Burning
Burning
The "Burn" screen enables you to create a selection menu to burn the entire project including all movies and the selection menu to disc later on.
Switch to the "Burn" screen first by pressing the button displayed.
Preview and editing
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX provides two different modes for designing and previewing the disc menu.
"Preview" mode simulates the behavior of a playback device, e.g. DVD player or Blu-ray player.
You can select a template for the menu and burn the disc.
In "Editing" mode, you may adjust many features of the disc menu. Templates are also available here that may be flexibly adjusted to suit your needs.
Remote control
The virtual remote control is an important helper when it comes to checking how the disc will perform later.
When the disc featuring the project is inserted into the player, this remote control will control the preview picture just like a "real" remote control controls the picture on a monitor or TV. The menu navigation may be activated via the arrow keys or the "OK" button. Activated buttons are highlighted.
241 www.magix.com
242 Burning
The number keys select the corresponding entry on the menu page. All menu entries are marked with a corresponding number. Within a chapter menu, playback is started from the particular scene. In the movie menu, the corresponding chapter menu (if available) is changed or movie playback is started.
Navigation button : Use these buttons to navigate in the menu of the disc being burned. The individual entries may be changed and confirmed by pressing "OK". The remote control reacts exactly like a genuine DVD/Blu-ray player's remote control.
Skip/move forward/back : This allows you to skip to the next or previous scene while playing back your movie. In the menu, you can skip forward or back from one menu page to another.
Play : Starts the first entry in the menu. In case chapter
menus are available (view page 245), the chapter menu will
be displayed first. Press the play button again to start playback at the beginning of the first scene of the first chapter.
Stop : Pressing stop halts playback.
Disc : Switches to the first page of the film menu.
Sub : Switches to the chapter menu (if available) for the currently selected film.
Menu
The selection menu is also burned to disc and appears when inserted into your player. Just like with a store-bought DVD or Blu-ray Disc, you may easily select your movies with the help of preview pictures, or access particular chapters within a movie. www.magix.com
Templates
You will find the menu templates below.
Burning 243
To the left, you will see a tree structure for selecting various menu templates.
At the top, you should first select whether you would like to use templates in ratio "16"9" or "4:3".
Animated (DVD): These templates contain background and introductory videos as well as music. The control elements are displayed in various modes.
The templates can be used only for mini DVDs, DVDs and AVCHD discs.
Static (4:3 only, DVD): Here you will find templates made up of regular background pictures and control elements.
Custom: These templates adjust to your disc project; the movies and scenes you use are integrated directly into the menu.
HD static (16:9 only, DVD, Blu-ray, AVCHD, WMV HD): These templates contain super-sharp, high-res background images that are particularly noticeable on HD TV devices.
Movie templates (only 16:9): Here you will find menu templates that are
specially made for movie templates (view page 197) found in the Media Pool.
Note: These menus require "Film menu" and "Chapter menu" to be activated in the "Edit" screen under "Disc options".
If you've selected one of the menu templates, you can use the horizontal scroll bar to view all the others available. There are lots of options when using the templates:
To apply a template to all menu pages, double-click the desired template. The complete template will then be applied.
You can also combine various elements from different templates with each other. To do so, you must first switch into Editing mode. If, for example, you wish to combine the text format of a template with the background of another one, double-click on the template containing the background first. Then click on the "Font" tab and select a template for the font. www.magix.com
244 Burning
You can load the layout (or individual layout elements) for the current menu
(movie or scenes) as well as for all menus.
Note: Some menu templates include intro videos with a smooth transition to the menu page!
Edit disc menu
To edit individual menu elements and the menu structure, activate the "Edit" button.
Edit menu elements
Hold down the left mouse button and drag text boxes or graphical elements to the desired position. You can adjust the size by dragging out the corners and edges of the frame.
Undo: This command allows you to undo the last changes made.
Redo: This function undoes the previous "Undo" function.
Lock aspect ratio: To avoid distortion, use this button to lock the aspect ratio for the menu elements.
Group: Menu elements are moved or resized simultaneously as a group, including the description text and number.
Fade in TV display area in the preview monitor: This option
displays the image borders of the television (view page 152) as
lines in the preview monitor. www.magix.com
Burning
Grid : This button shows a grid to help position frames exactly next to each other as required. Using the small arrow next to the button you can open a dialog to fine tune the grid settings.
Navigation
Using navigation links above you can reach the structure of the menu entries.
All movies are listed as first entries. The corresponding menu level is the film menu .
All scenes are listed as second entries next to it to the right. The corresponding menu level is the chapter menu.
Removing the red check deactivates the corresponding entry in the chapter menu. The scenes are still displayed of course, but you can no longer select them directly from the menu.
You can open the movie menu for further editing by clicking on the movie above it.
If you click on one of the chapters, the chapter menu in the preview will be opened for editing.
245
Disc options
Here you can activate or deactivate certain elements or even complete menus.
Intro video : Press this button to load videos to be used as introductions to your discs. The following formats are supported: "*.avi", "*.mpg", "*.mxv",
"*.vob". The intro is played immediately after the DVD has been inserted into the player. The DVD menu will then appear. A check mark "Do not skip" ensures that the intro video must be played completely each time the disc is inserted and that it may not be skipped with the remote control or otherwise.
Film menu & chapter menu
The disc menu essentially consists of two layers: www.magix.com
246 Burning
Film menu: The upper layer includes the film menu, which is only used if a project contains multiple movies.
Chapter menu : This is the lower layer of the disc menu, which utilizes the chapter markers in a movie as menu entries. More information about this is
available in Chapter markers (view page 110).
Note: A chapter menu cannot contain more than 99 entries. If your movie should have more chapters, either burn it without a chapter menu or split your movie into multiple parts.
Preview pictures : Shows/hides the preview pictures in the disc menu.
Numbering : The numbers beside the menu entries may be selected directly using the remote control, but they might be unwanted at times. Use this option to show/hide them.
Frame : A frame borders the preview pictures. If this is unwanted, it may be removed easily using this option.
Create your own menu background
You can edit the existing menu background or create a new one from scratch.
A click on this button switches to the "Edit" interface and loads the selected menu background as video.
Here you can change and design the background as you please. The background movie will be set as the menu background automatically after pressing "Save".
Tip: If you would like to design a new menu background, simply delete all existing objects from the menu project and load new ones.
Design page
Only in the Plus/Premium version: New menu pages may also be added or irrelevant pages may be removed.
Adds a new menu page. www.magix.com
Burning
Removes the selected menu page.
Background: Here you have three options for creating a static background image for the menu:
You can set a certain color value for the background.
You can select an image saved on your hard drive
You can select a frame from your project.
Animated selection menus
Audio-visual animations may also be added to the DVD menus. As required, background videos are played as endless loops while the menu is shown on the screen. Add background music in various formats or use any background picture for each menu.
Sound/music : Load an audio file into the preview monitor and use it as an animation in the menu background.
Video : Load a video or graphics file into the preview monitor and use it as an animation in the menu background. In addition to the options for the background graphic (see above), you may also use a sequence from a loaded slideshow or from a different video file.
Background video options :
Create animated menu buttons : The preview images for individual movies in the movie menu are shown as small movie samples. Set the start point and length of the animation using the sequence options faders.
Use video's audio track : The audio track of the background video is used with the menu.
Play menu animation as a loop : The background video (audio and/or video) is played back as a loop.
Length of the menu view is set by : Audio/video or whichever medium is longer. You can specify how long the background video should be here. The other medium will be played as a loop.
Create a button design
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX enables easy editing of all buttons together with their menu entries.
Only in the Plus/Premium version: New menu pages may also be added or irrelevant pages may be removed, together with all corresponding buttons. www.magix.com
247
248 Burning
Adds a new menu entry with button.
Removes the selected menu entry with button.
Tip : If you would simply like to deactivate unused menu entries, this may be done via the Navigation.
Note
: The chapter menu is formed via chapter markers (view page 110) and
can be influenced in detail with these.
Pressing this button or double-clicking the menu entries allows menu entries you have created to be edited. The dialog with the
properties of the menu entries (view page 249) will open.
Edit in MAGIX Photo Designer : These buttons open
MAGIX Photo Designer for further editing of your background pictures or the selected menu elements.
Jump to linked page
To test the targets of menu entries, select the desired menu entry and click the button. www.magix.com
Burning
Menu entry/menu page properties
Double clicking the preview picture or a menu entry opens an editor for you to adjust the preview picture or menu entry.
249
Menu text
In the text input field, you can enter any text to match the chosen menu entry.
Set the vertical direction of the text (upwards, centered or downward).
Set the horizontal direction of the text (left, centered or right).
Font size: Set the height of the text in pixels.
Font color: Define the foreground color of the text.
Font: Set which font and which style (bold, italic, etc.) should be used.
Shadow: Set the color and size of the shadow that will appear underneath the text. www.magix.com
250 Burning
3D effect: If you would like to make your text appear three-dimensional, you can set the width, height, and color of the 3D effect.
Apply to all: Except for the text, all settings are applied to all entries in the current menu.
Menu image
Use frame from movie: Use the fader to set which frame should be used in the video as a preview picture. The numerical input fields are sorted as follows:
Hours:Minutes:Seconds:Frames.
Use different graphic: You can also load your own bitmap images to be used as menu pictures.
Hint: It may be the case that there are no menu pictures in some menu templates, so changing the menu picture won't have any noticeable effect.
Actions at the end of the movie (preview images in film menu only)
Enter which action should be carried out once the film has finished playing here. Select from:
Stop playback : This option depends on the DVD player being used. Most
DVD players show the DVD player's own menu (or background picture) after playback.
Jump to movie menu/chapter menu : Jumps back to the previously displayed menu.
Tip : If one of these two options is not available, please check which menu mode is set.
Jump to next movie : The next movie will be played without any additional action.
Play movie as endless loop : Any movie may be burned onto a disc as a loop.
This means that the movie will be played as a endless loop until the next menu entry is accessed using the remote control or playback is stopped. This way, you can transform your TV into an aquarium, a train journey, a fireplace or anything that you could watch over and over again.
Note : This option only functions for DVDs, Mini DVDs, or Blu-ray Discs. www.magix.com
Edit your own menu entries
Burning
Note: This function is available only in the Plus/Premium version.
There is another view in this dialog to edit menu entries you have created.
Menu links can be edited here. This makes it possible to link a menu entry with a certain action, menu page, or a certain position in the movie.
No link : The menu element cannot be selected and has no function other than to display menu text.
Link to page in current menu: Jumps to a menu page in the current movie or chapter menu in the current film.
Link to another menu: Opens another movie or chapter menu.
Link to chapter in a movie : If this option is selected, enter a film and chapter marker where playback should start.
Note : For DVDs, only chapters within the current movie may be jumped to.
Link to film start : The movie will play back from the start.
251
Burning wizard
Click "Burn" to open the dialog for creating DVDs,
Blu-ray discs, AVCHD and other video media, with a menu.
Under "Other options" you will find other disc formats. www.magix.com
252 Burning
Select what kind of disc you would like to create.
Proceed as follows to burn a disc:
Set up burner and burn speed : If multiple burners are installed, you may select which device you wish to use in this menu.
Encoder settings : Use the "Encoder" button to access the selection dialog to specify settings for the MPEG encoder (memory requirements, quality, and duration of the MPEG conversion). "Advanced settings" accesses a dialog featuring additional options. You can adjust all the fine settings for the MPEG encoder here.
Burning disc/starting video encoding : The button " Burn disc " starts the disc burning process. Every time you burn and every time a simulation is carried out, the disc project is encoded. Please note that the MPEG file is not deleted from the hard disk after the burn process has finished. Depending on the length of the project, encoding and burning may take some time. The time required can be seen in the dialog. www.magix.com
Burning
Burn dialog for DVD players
Here you can select your burner, the type of disc, the encoder settings.
MPEG-2 is used for DVDs. Blu-ray discs also use MPEG-2, and higher bitrates are employed in order to reach the higher HD resolutions. AVCHD discs use a much more complex MPEG-4/H.264 codec, which is documented in detail in
the "MPEG-4 encoder settings (view page 342) section of the PDF manual and
in Help (F1 key).
253
Options
Simulate first : If you are not sure about the write speed or memory requirements of the selected disc, you can simulate the write process before burning.
Activate buffer underrun protection: Many burners support techniques that prevent the much-feared "buffer underrun". Use this option to activate this protective feature and burn your files at higher speeds without risking making a coaster out of your blank disc.
Completely format DVD/CD-RW media: This option reformats the RW media and deletes all existing file material.
Shut down computer after burning: Activate this option to automatically turn off the computer after encoding and burning has been completed. You could, for instance, start the encoding and burning process in the evening, and you don't have to wait for the process to finish to switch off your computer. www.magix.com
254 Burning
Burn standard video DVD onto same disc : You can use this option with a
WMV HD disc to burn an additional normal DVD video. This ensures that your discs can also be played back on standalone DVD players. See Multi disc.
Activate the burner's defect management option: If a certain section of the disc is defective, then this will be recognized by the burner and labeled as such. No content will be saved there as a result.
Check data after burning disc: The finished disc will be checked for any mistakes after burning.
CD/DVD title : This is the title of the DVD as it will appear on the PC. The disc project name is displayed here by default.
Encoder settings
Use the “Encoder settings...” button to access the selection dialog to specify the properties of the MPEG encoder (memory requirements, quality, and duration of the MPEG conversion
Preset: This features useful presets for the selected disc type. Here are several sample DVD presets:
Longplay DVD Video DVD with extra-long playing time. The bit rate is reduced, which compromises image quality.
Longplay music DVD DVD with extra-long playing time for music. The bit rate for the soundtrack remains at the highest quality
Standard DVD
Widescreen DVD level.
Normal DVD
Normal DVD in 16:9 format
Note: For all settings, you can choose NTSC (USA and Japan) or PAL (Europe).
Bit rate: The bit rate determines the memory requirement of the completed video. The higher the bit rate, the larger the file, and the shorter the maximum playing time of the movie that fits on a disc.
Adapt bit rate: The expected file size of the finished video is estimated, depending on the set bit rate. If the movie does not fit onto the disc, the bit rate is corrected accordingly.
Quality: Specifies the quality of the encoding process. The higher the quality, the better the finished video will look; however, encoding will take considerably longer. www.magix.com
Burning
Smart Rendering: With Smart Rendering you can considerably reduce the encoding processing strain for MPEG files. During the production of MPEG files, only those parts of the movie that were changed in the program are re-encoded. Please note: The MPEG files contained in the movie must have the same format, i.e. the bit rates (variable or constant), audio formats, image resolutions and video formats must match.
Anti-interlace filter: This option should only be activated for playback on a TV screen, since it is intended to reduce line flickering.
Calculate video effects on your GPU: To accelerate export, video effects can be calculated on the graphics card. At this time this applies to brightness, gamma, contrast, color, saturation, image size, cropping and position effects as well as various fades and mixes. Please note that external effect plug-ins and elaborate artistic effects must be processed on the CPU and for this reason using this function will not yield any speed advantage.
Note: This function is specifically optimized for NVIDIA graphics cards. You can, however, experience acceleration with other types of graphics cards, too.
3D mode: In case your project features 3D material that has been edited with
Stereo 3D, a mode may be selected here for burning the material to disc. 3D is switched off by default.
To return to the standard settings, press the Reset button.
The "Advanced" button opens the "Advanced settings" dialog. Here you can adjust all the fine settings of the MPEG encoder. Details about the "MPEG
encoder settings (view page 357)" are available in the PDF manual and in the
help file.
Use Open CL or CUDA during rendering
OpenCL (from AMD) and CUDA (from NVIDIA) are two technologies for graphic cards that enable MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX to outsource processor-intensive rendering tasks to the graphic card's processor. When burning a Blu-ray or an
AVCHD disc, you will find the options "Use CUDA" and "Use OpenCL" under
"Advanced..." > "Video codec".
255 www.magix.com
256 Burning
Note: Depending on whether your graphics card is compatible with CUDA or
OpenCL, the options will be grayed out.
Activate these options during rendering in order to calculate the material to be burned noticeably faster.
Note: Ask your graphics card manufacturer whether your graphics card supports hardware acceleration and make sure that all the necessary drivers are installed.
Disk space
Disc type Storage media Menu Quality Length (optimal quality)
WMV HD CD/DVD
Blu-Ray disc
(view page
AVCHD (view
Multi Disc
Blu-Ray disc
DVD/Blu-ray
Disc
CD/DVD
Yes
Yes
Yes
*****
*****
****
107 min./DVD
15 min./CD
110 min.
160 min./Blu-ray Disc
45 min./DVD
7 min./CD www.magix.com
MiniDVD (view
CD Yes ***
Burning ca. 20 minutes
* The set duration for some DVD players may be determined by this table. The amount of image material that can be put onto a CD or DVD depends on the sizes of the picture files.
You may also use the menu templates from the category "TV Showtime DVD" for the disc types MiniDVD and DVD. Each picture of a slideshow is then displayed in fullscreen on its own menu page without having to playback the slideshow.
For the MPEG-2 encoder especially, which is used for SVCDs, DVDs, and
MiniDVDs (i.e. CD-ROMs written in DVD file format), it can be difficult to supply reliable relating to the required memory space. If the "variable bit rate" of the
MPEG-2 encoder is activated, encoding will occur according to the movements in the picture. The required memory depends on the film material; an action film would need more memory than a drama, for instance.
If you cannot save your disc project on a single blank CD, you will have to divide it up into different sections.
257
Further information on MPEG compression and formats can be found in the
chapter "Attachment: video and data storage devices (view page 333)" of the
PDF manual.
Test series with variable encoder settings
If you would like to know how much memory space you require for various encoder settings, you should run some simulations before burning.
So you don’t waste any blank CDs while testing, you should activate the
“Simulate first” option.
Then create, for example, a short (ca. 5 min.) disc project and simulate burning in multiple cycles with various settings.
After every simulation you can access the created file on the hard disk to check how large the file has become.
From the results, you can extrapolate how much disc space your disc project will require. The memory requirements of a 5-minute disc project would have to be multiplied by 20 in order to estimate the space required for a 100-minute
movie. You should also add buffer for the selection menu. (view page 242)
www.magix.com
258 Burning
Separate project onto multiple discs
Automatically: If the disc project requires more memory than is available on the CD or DVD, a dialog will appear before burning asking whether the disc project should be automatically segmented for multiple discs. Confirm this by clicking “Yes”. The disc project will then be automatically divided into individual disc projects and burned sequentially onto multiple discs. This is the easiest method since everything is automatic, and all you have to do is insert a new blank CD when required.
Manual
Case 1: If several movies do not fit onto a single disc...
In this case, switch back to the “Record” screen and delete as many movies as is needed until the remaining movies fit onto the disc. You can create a new disc project and load and burn the other movies afterwards.
Case 2: When a long film doesn’t fit onto a disc...
In this case, the movie has to be split into two or more parts that will be burned separately onto disc.
Switch back to the "Edit" view and place the start marker to the position at which you wish to divide the movie. In the "Edit" menu, select "Cut ->
Separate movie".
All passages behind the start marker will be removed from the movie and made into a smaller movie. Both movies can be moved using the "Select to edit" menu in the arranger. Save both of them separately to your hard disk
(“Save movie” menu option, for example, as “Part 1” and “Part 2”).
Remove one of the two movies (for example, "Part 2") from the disc project
("Manage movies -> Remove movie (view page 267)" menu option).
Switch to the "Burn" interface and burn the first film ("Part 1") to CD or DVD.
Create a new disc project (“New” button), switch to the “Record” view and load it into the second film (“Part 2”).
Switch to the “Burn” interface and burn the second movie to CD or DVD. www.magix.com
Export
Export
The "Export" button opens the export wizard, which features the most important export options for your videos. Please note that you will only export the current movie. Other movies in the project and the disc menu will not be included.
259
Export 3D movie
With this option you can recalculate a movie including all objects, effects settings, fades, text, etc. into a 3D video file and save it to a computer.
First, select a quality in the dialog. It only makes sense to use HD quality if you have high resolution material in your project.
Next, choose a 3D mode. Anaglyph videos are suitable for viewing on a standard television or monitor and can be viewed with red-cyan glasses.
Side-by-Side videos deliver a considerably better 3D experience, it does however, require special monitors, TV sets and playback devices.
Next, click "Save video".
Note: You will always export Windows Media Video 3D files using this dialog.
You can use other file formats via "File -> Export movie".
See the "Stereo 3D" chapter (view page 188) for more information on 3D video.
www.magix.com
260 Export
Output as video file
With this option you can recalculate a movie including all objects, effects settings, fades, text, etc. into a video file and save it to a computer.
Select a certain quality (e.g. DVD quality) and a file format (e.g. MPEG -4). The dialog provides further information about the properties of your selection.
Please note that MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX also adjusts the quality when you change file format, if this wasn't optimally selected for your chosen format. www.magix.com
Export
Upload to Internet
With this option you can upload your movie directly to YouTube, Vimeo or
Facebook. YouTube maybe the best-known portal for self-made clips of all kinds. Vimeo is an up-and-coming portal for more demanding videos.
261
Community : Select a platform: YouTube or Video.
Name: Here you can enter the name of your movie.
Description : Here you can create a short description of your movie to orient other community member as to its contents.
Category : Select the category for your movie here.
Send : Here you can select whether the film should be private, accessible only to you and authorized persons, or public, meaning freely accessible.
Export settings: Here you can set various quality settings. www.magix.com
262 Export
Upload to Internet (MAGIX Online Album)
This accesses the MAGIX Online Album login dialog directly. Next, present your photos together with videos and music in custom-designed online albums.
Note: If you don't have MAGIX Online Album, you can register to this service at
"Info & Registration"
After logging in, you can determine the desired quality, file location and status
(visible to the public or only for you), and then start the transfer. At the end, your material will be displayed in your Online Album.
Export to device
You can export your project to mobile devices made by Apple and mobile phones with Android operating systems.
Click on "Export to mobile device" in the export dialog.
Then select the mobile device from the list. www.magix.com
Managing video projects
Tip (only for Android phones): Normally your device will be correctly recognized as "Mass storage device by your computer. If this is not the case then change the connection detection settings of the device before connecting to your computer, so you can select the correct connection type (e.g. "Mass storage drive"). For more details, consult your device manual.
263
Export as Media Player
To be able to play back your film in an Internet browser or to embed it into web pages, you can export it as an HTML-enabled media player.
Select the desired quality and click on "Save video". In the target folder, an
HTM and an MP4 file will be created for further use.
Managing video projects
Backup copy
Files must be saved to be able to be easily retrieved in case of a hard drive crash or some other error.
Copy movie/project and media to folder
This menu option allows you to put a complete MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX arrangement, including all applied multimedia files, into one folder. This is especially useful if you want to archive an arrangement for later use or in case the files are on multiple data carriers (CDs, DVDs, etc) so that on loading you continually have to change them. Effects files used are also saved in a folder together with the other files.
If the option " Copy disc project, movies, and media in folder " is activated, all movies in the current disc project, including all of the related media, are combined and copied into the selected folder.
Note : MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX also features DV logging. Large DV-AVI and audio files no longer need to be backed up, since MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX saves the position of this material on the DV tape and imports missing files automatically when reloading the DV tape. www.magix.com
264 Managing video projects
A dialog opens to specify the path and name of the video.
Shortcut:
Copy movie and media into folder
Copy project and media into folder
"Shift + R"
"Alt + S"
Burn project/film and media onto CD/DVD
Use this option to burn the film as well as all associated files to disc. To do so, you must have a burner installed on your computer and a blank CD must be inserted.
If you choose the option "Burn project and media", the current project and all of the associated media files are grouped together and burned onto disc.
Even larger projects can be burned straight to disc. The project, if necessary, will be split up and burned automatically to multiple discs. A restore program which is burned to the first disc of this type of backup guarantees that the backup can be restored without any problems.
Restore disc project from (S)VCD/video DVD
This command restores a project backup that has been saved on a disc. The disc must have been burned with the option " Add project backup " (see "Burn disc" dialog options).
Choose which of the movies contained on the disc should be restored by selecting it from the list and highlighting and selecting the corresponding directory. You must also indicate the directory where the project should be saved. A subfolder "Backupxxx" will be created in this folder where all project files from the disc will be saved. All of the restored movies will be loaded into
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX for editing.
Select the option " Restore image files only " and only the original image files contained on the disc will be restored.
Load backup project...
This option loads an automatically created slideshow backup. This type of automatic backup gets the file extension MV_ (underscore). This command is only intended for use in emergencies, for example, if you unintentionally saved your change and wish to return to the previous version of the movie.
Ctrl + Shift + O Keyboard shortcut: www.magix.com
Managing video projects
Tip: Under "File -> Settings -> Program...", you can determine how often an automatic backup will be created in the "System" tab under "Automatic backup".
265
Clean-up wizard
The clean-up wizard helps delete projects from the hard drive, including all of the media files used. Use this function to free up disk space for future projects.
Caution : If the files you used in the movie have also been used in other movies
(like trailers, opening music, etc.), then you should make backup copies of these files beforehand.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + Y
Delete specific files
Choose this option if you would like to select certain files for deletion. In the file selection dialog, you can select the desired files. In the next step, the clean-up wizard searches for other files which belong to your selection. Using this method, you can delete an entire movie with all of its accompanying media, help, project, and backup files. Before they are deleted, you will receive relevant information in a dialog and a confirmation request.
Search and delete superfluous files
Choose this option if you would like to find unnecessary files or free up some space on your hard drive. The clean-up wizard automatically looks for extraneous files created during use of MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX. Before they are deleted, you receive relevant information in a dialog and a confirmation request.
Advanced
"Advanced" lets you set which files and folders should be included in the cleaning process. www.magix.com
266 Menus
Menus
Certain menu items are not available on the "Record" and "Burn" screens. The menu reference describes the full menu as found on the "Edit" screen.
File Menu
New project
Creates a new MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX project. A dialog with settings
for a new disc project or a new film (view page 55) opens to get started.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + N
Open
With this option you can load a project or a media file. Please note that all media files associated with it must be loaded along with a project.
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX will search for all used sounds and video files in the folders in which they were located when the move was saved.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + O
Save project
The current disc project is saved with the name displayed in the project window. If you have not specified a name for your project yet, a dialog will open for you to do so.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + S
Save project as...
A dialog opens where you can specify the path and name of the video for saving.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + S
Manage movies
New movie
Use this option to create a new movie for your recordings and imported files.
Since a film is normally already opened, you will have to decide whether the www.magix.com
Menus movie should be inserted into the existing project or if a new project should be created.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + N
Delete movie
This option lets you remove the current movie from the project. However, it is still available on the hard drive and can be loaded again at any time.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + F4
Attach movie
Using this function you can attach a movie to an opened one. This is then attached to the end of the movie and automatically takes on the original movie's settings.
Rename movie
You can enter a new name for your movie here.
Import movie file
Use this option to load a movie into your disc project. Please note that all media files associated with it must be accessible. MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX will search for all used sounds and video files in the folders in which they were located when the move was saved.
The "Select movie for editing" button lets you switch between movies.
267
Export movie file
A dialog will open to enter a file name for the movie to be exported. The movie may then be imported into other projects again.
Note : The movie file (*.mvd) includes all information about the media files used, cuts, effects, and titles, but not about the image and sound material itself. This is always contained in the recorded or imported media files, which remains unchanged during editing with MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX. In order to save a movie in its own folder, e.g. for use on another PC, use the function "Copy film and media to folder".
Keyboard shortcut: www.magix.com
Ctrl + Alt + L
268 Menus
Export movie
A movie may be exported in different video formats via "File -> Export movie".
The options available vary according to the selected format.
Presets : These are typical settings for the selected format for the most important applications.
Click " Save " to save your own settings and " Delete " to remove them from the list.
Export settings : Specify general export parameters like resolution, aspect ratio, and frame rate here. Select the most frequently used values from the list fields; to set your own values click on the " ...
" button. The " Advanced " button opens the specific settings for the selected video format. " File " enables you to export your file to another folder than the preset (More information can be
found in the section "Folders" on page 63) one. The option "
Overwrite file without confirmation " option allows you to execute multiple exports in the same file.
Other : "Other" also provides the option to switch off your computer automatically after long encoding processes and to limit export to the selected area (between the in and out point).
Output after export: Some formats allow special playback options (e.g. DV-AVI on the camera or WMV export with output via Bluetooth to your mobile phone).
Video as AVI
When exporting to AVI video, you may set and configure the size and frame rate of the AVI video and the compression codec for audio (audio compression) and video. Please see the general information about AVI video
formats (view page 335) as well.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + A
Video as DV-AVI
This option exports the video as a DV encoded AVI. You will be asked for which video standard you want to export DV data. PAL (Europe) or NTSC
(USA/Japan). The arrangement can be easily transferred to the Digicam via the
FireWire interface. The window will provide further information on all available options. You can access it via the button " Advanced...
" in the "Export" dialog.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + D www.magix.com
Menus
Video as MPEG video
MPEG stands for "Motion Picture Experts Group" and is a high-performance compression format for audio and video files.
Details on the settings of the MPEG encoder can be found in the "MPEG encoder settings" appendix.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + P
MAGIX video export
Exports the movie in MAGIX video format. This format is used for video recording by MAGIX video software and is optimized for digitally edited high-quality video material.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + M
Video as Quicktime Movie
Exports the movie in QuickTime movie format. This enables streaming playback of audio and video files over the Internet. As with RealMedia export, appropriate adjustments can also be made for video site, frame rate, and codec settings. However, the export dialog does not permit you to add commentary to the video.
For QuickTime files (*.mov) you have to install the QuickTime library.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + Q
Uncompressed movie
When exporting an uncompressed AVI video file you can adjust the size and frame rate of the AVI video you wish to create. The video material will not be compressed by a codec.
Note : This will create very large files!
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + U
Video as MotionJPEG AVI
Opens the export dialog for AVI video in MotionJPEG format. This format is supported by digital picture frames, for example.
Ctrl + Alt + O Keyboard shortcut: www.magix.com
269
270 Menus
Movie as a series of individual frames
This option exports the video as a sequence of single frames in bitmap format.
This means a graphic file will be created for every frame of the video. The image count may be determined in the export dialog under "Frame rate".
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + E
Windows Media Export
Exports the arrangement in Windows Media format. This is a universal audio/video format from Microsoft. The setting options in the Advanced dialog are correspondingly complex.
Manual configuration
Audio/Video codec: Various codecs corresponding to the many versions of
Windows Media (7, 8, 9) are possible. If playback compatibility problems arise, try an older codec with a lower version number.
Bit rate mode: Constant and variable bit rate modes are possible; however, most devices and streaming applications require a constant bit rate. For VBR two-pass modes, the movie is compressed in two passes for optimal use of the bandwidth required for highly-compressed movies on the Internet.
Bit rate/quality/audio format: The bit rate substantially determines the display and audio quality. The higher this is, the better your videos will look and the larger the files and the required encoding time will be. For variable bit rates, the bit rate is adapted dynamically to the requirements of the corresponding picture or sound material. Here, either the quality value of between 1-100 can be set or, for two-pass encoding, an average or maximum bit rate. For audio, the bit rate is set additionally by the audio format.
Import from system profile (export type): For the most used methods (other than for playback on mobile devices; for this you should use the supplied presets), e.g. Internet streaming, Microsoft provides a diverse selection of system profiles. If you have the Windows Media Encoder 9 installed (available from Microsoft as a free download), then you can edit the profiles or create your own. These can be loaded by pressing the "Import from profile file" button.
Go to Clip info to insert title, author name, copyright details, and a description.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + V www.magix.com
Video as MPEG-4 video
Menus
Hint: In order to use the MPEG-4 video export feature, you will have to activate
this function first (view page 331).
271
MPEG-4 is the most advanced video format available at the moment. Unlike others, it can provide high-quality pictures at the same file size.
Behind MPEG-4, you'll find a highly complex "academic" standard that operates and is supported variably according to make. To go into detail on these differences and parameters would be beyond the scope of this documentation. For this reason, indications, along with the operational manual of your device, are given that should help create executable MPEG-4 files. For more experimental users, the complete setup options of the MPEG-4 codec can be found behind the "Advanced settings..." buttons.
Video/Audio: The MPEG-4 format and the advanced AVC format are also available but have, as of yet, only been used in a few devices. MPEG4 video can be combined with AAC or AMR sound, the latter mostly in conjunction with mobile phones. The combination ACC/AAC doesn't appear very often (Apple iPod Video), ACC with AMR in contrast, not at all.
Multiplexer: Here you can find the so-called container formats and special options for Apple iPod and Sony PSP. MPEG-4 is usually used as an output format , mobile phones mostly use 3GPP.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + G
Activate CUDA and OpenCL support
Similar to Burning (view page 255), you can also use OpenCL or CUDA to
accelerate the rendering process for MPEG-4/H.264 during export. If you own an OpenCL or CUDA enabled graphics card, you will find the option to activate it under advanced settings in the MPEG 4 export dialog. Simply click on
"Advanced...".
Under "Video codec" set whether CUDA or OpenCL should be used.
Note : To import and export AVC(HD) and MPEG-4 files, the MEPG-4 codec
must first be activated (view page 331). A dialog will open if the codec is
required. www.magix.com
272 Menus
Audio as MP3
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX supplies an optional MP3 Encoder for especially fast and good-sounding conversions into the popular MP3 audio format.
Warning: In order to use the MP3 export function, Windows Media Player 10 or higher has to be installed to your system.
Hint: The MP3 Encoder cannot be used as a codec for the audio track of AVI audio files.
Transmission format
Here you can specify how you wish to send the audio file to the mobile device.
Read more on this under Transferring files.
Options
In the "Options" section you can set the format and the compression of the audio file.
Bit rate: The "Bit rate" selection specifies the level of compression: The higher the bit rate, the higher the quality of the exported audio file. On the other hand, the bit rate determines the final file size: The smaller the bit rate, the smaller the files.
Mono/Stereo/5.1 Surround : Most mobile devices have only one loudspeaker.
To save on memory, you can export in mono as well. In 5.1 Surround Mode
(see Mixer in Surround Mode) you can also export in MP3surround.
Normalize: This function should always be activated. It guarantees that the music is not too loud/overmodulated or too quiet.
Audio as wave
The movie's audio track is exported in the wave (*.wav) audio format.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + W
Export as transition...
Please see "Creating custom alpha transitions (view page 103)"
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + T www.magix.com
Menus
Single frame as BMP
Exports the image at the position of the start marker and displayed on the video screen as a BMP file.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + B
Single frame as JPG
Exports the picture located at the current start marker and displayed in the video monitor as a JPG file.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + J
Animated GIF
The video will be exported as an animated GIF file (also called "AniGIF). This file format is supported by many mobile phones.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + F
273
Record audio / images / video
A selection window will open to choose the desired recording type. This may also be accessed via the "Audio or video recording" button in the transport controls.
Keyboard shortcut: R www.magix.com
274 Menus
Import Audio CD track(s)
A CD track may be imported via drag & drop from the Media Pool just like a normal file. If this convenient method fails for some reason, then this menu command may be accessed via the CD manager to insert tracks from audio
CDs directly into the arrangement. More about this is available in the section
"Import audio CD (view page 155)".
Scan image
Select scanner
The twain interface connects MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX with almost all current scanners or digital cameras. Here's how to proceed the first time you scan via the twain interface:
1.
Install the twain software for the device.
2.
Restart your computer.
3.
Start MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX.
4.
Click on "File -> Twain scanner -> Select source", if the scanner works with
32-bit software.
5.
Click the device that you want to use in the dialog. This step will no longer be necessary as long as the same device is used.
Start the scanning process
The scan window of your scan software will appear. Specify the resolution and color depth in this window. Once the scan process is finished, the twain software will normally switch off by itself – the scanned image file will be added to MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX automatically. If the twain dialog remains open, you will be able to scan multiple images in succession.
Export to device www.magix.com
Menus
This window lets you transfer your finished video onto external devices. Select the target device from the list.
Export to mobile devices
Most devices require certain format settings (file format, resolution, bit rate, picture repeat rate, etc.) to be able to play a video.
The menu is divided into various device classes to make choosing your device easier. The last three selections are saved as favorites in the top part of the device list if you have more than one device or want to present your movies to your friends.
If your device is listed here, you don't have to worry about the format settings,
as the necessary settings of the export dialog (view page 268) are
automatically customized to the target device. Simply select your device and click "OK".
Output DV/HDV
For digital output please select "File" > "Output audio/video" and then select
Camcorder in the device menu. For DV cameras you can select the device DV camera for HDV camcorder HDV1 or HDV 2 Camcorder.
With Settings you can open the respective export settings dialog (DV-AVI export for DV camcorder, MPEG export for HDV camcorder). For most applications you should use the settings defined here. Advanced takes you to
Now connect your camera and follow the displayed instructions.
If you want to export a rendered (already edited) movie to DV, there’s no need to render it again. Simply activate the “Play own DV file” option and select your
DV video from the “My audio video” directory.
275
Tip: Digital cameras that can digitally record via a PC connection are usually more expensive. You may be able to reduce your purchase costs considerably by buying a digital camera that cannot transfer digitally and have the function activated by a camera specialist. You should enquire about this option before making your purchase. www.magix.com
276 Menus
DV export settings
PAL/NTSC: The PAL format is used in Europe, and the US and Japan use
NTSC. This option usually does not require changing.
Render changed parts...: Non-edited original files are simply copied into a completed DV AVI. Normally, you have to decompress the DV data, add the set effects calculations, and recompress it. If no effects processing is pending, then these steps may not be necessary. This option can be permanently activated.
Use references to original material...: Unedited original files are exported directly to the device. Effects are rendered in real time. Use this option for finished movies without edits and effects, since real-time effects processing of
DV data causes high processor loads that often result in output errors.
Transfer DV back to device after export...: Deactivate this option if you are only rendering your movie but do not want to export it. You can export your movie later by clicking "Export own DV file" from the "Export" dialog. www.magix.com
My device is not in the list, what should I do?
Menus
User-defined:
If your device does not appear in the list after the online update, you can set up the export settings manually. No need to worry though; you only have to do it once, since these settings can be saved as a preset.
Read the instruction manual of your mobile device to find out which file format is required for this. If your device supports multiple formats, then you can experiment with the formats to get the best results.
Specify the file format by opening the target device's menu and selecting
" User-defined -> Video -> ...Format
". If you then click on "Export", you arrive
at the Export dialog (view page 268) of the selected file format where you can
set all the advanced settings.
For details on these settings, please consult your device manual.
Explanations for the file format's settings can be found in the Overview of the device classes chapter, for the special settings of the export dialogs see
"Export movie" in the "File menu" chapter.
277
Tip: If the format settings for your device are not accessible, then you can try out a different device from the same manufacturer and, using it as a template, make adjustments accordingly.
If you find settings you like, we recommend saving these as a preset for further use.
Transfer with Bluetooth
Warning!
The procedure described here refers to Windows XP with Service
Pack 2!
Dialogs may be different depending on the Bluetooth driver and operating system version, or their order may vary (e.g. for password allocation) when transferring to your mobile phone. However, the process is usually similar if other drivers are used. Read more on this in the help file or the corresponding chapters of your operating system's manual and Bluetooth adapter.
If you own a Bluetooth device, you can export the movie straight to your device. To do so, your device and your PC must both have Bluetooth www.magix.com
278 Menus interfaces. If your system has a Bluetooth device, you can activate the
"Transfer via Bluetooth" option.
After converting the movie into the desired format, the Bluetooth file transfer assistant opens.
The first time you try to transfer files to your device via Bluetooth, you have to specify your device as the receiver in the dialog by clicking on " Search...
", selecting your device and then pressing "OK". The name of your device in the
Bluetooth network is specified in the Bluetooth settings of the device. Check your device manual for this. Select your device and confirm your choice by pressing "OK".
Now enter a password of your choice, which you will later have to confirm on your device and click on the "Continue" button in the assistant. Since connections between multiple Bluetooth devices can be set up simultaneously in a room, the password serves to identify certain connections as well as to safeguard your data.
The order may be the other way around, depending on the Bluetooth device driver, i.e. the mobile phone will request a password which must be confirmed on your PC. It's important that you use the same password in each case.
You may be asked once again to enter the file name and path of the movie. In this case, we recommend using a folder that you will be able to find again quickly to export the file (e.g. "...My Files/My Videos").
Click the "Scan..." button, open the set up folder, and select your video file by double clicking it. Now, in the wizard, click the "Continue" button.
Next, you may have to activate the reception of files on the device and re-enter the password. Afterwards, the transfer of the videos will begin automatically.
Once the transfer has been completed successfully, "1 new message" will display on your device. Read more on how to save and play videos in the corresponding device manual.
Warning!
We only recommend activating data reception via Bluetooth on your device once this function is actually required, e.g. for transferring files. Once you have completed the uploading process, you should deactivate Bluetooth again, since permanently activated Bluetooth reception constitutes a security risk! www.magix.com
Menus
Burn CD/DVD
Manually compile files
Opens MAGIX Speed burnR to burn videos or other files onto CD/DVD. File selection is done via drag & drop from MAGIX Speed burnR's Explorer.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + B
Copy CD/DVD direct
The dialog provides several options for creating a copy:
Copy: Here you can directly copy a non copy-protected CD or DVD.
Shrink : Compresses a DVD to the size of a regular single layer DVD+/-R/RW.
All files of the original DVD have to be on the hard drive.
Analog copy: Copies your video onto a disc via analog recording.
Read more about this in the chapter "Record (view page 70)".
Burn an already created (S)VCD/Video DVD
All necessary files, menus, and encoded video files needed to burn a CD/DVD will be temporarily stored on your hard drive. After your disc is burned, these are not automatically deleted. Using "Disc image" multi-copy, you can uses these images to burn as many discs as you would like without having to encode the files again.
In the dialog, choose the image you want. All necessary files are then transferred to the MAGIX Speed burnR burning tool.
For more information on using MAGIX Speed burnR, read the program's help file.
Internet
Quack access to MAGIX Online World. Find out more about the Services, manage your access data, download media from your Online Album, etc.
MAGIX Online Album/MAGIX Online Print Service/Catooh
For MAGIX Online World please read menu item Share!
279 www.magix.com
280 Menus
Export to magix.info
This command allows you to export your movie to magix.info.
First, export your project in one of the following formats: asf, mov, mpg, mpeg, mp4, wmv, 3gp, or avi. Next, access "File -> Internet -> magix.info -> Present videos on magix.info" to reach a page where you can upload your video. You may need to register with magix.info.
Online login details
In this dialog, you can save your login information (login and password) for
MAGIX Online Album and all other MAGIX Online World as well as for Catooh, making it unnecessary to login each time you access MAGIX Online World.
The saved data are valid for all other MAGIX programs for the corresponding computer user.
Backup copy
Files must be saved to be able to be easily retrieved in case of a hard drive crash or some other error.
For detailed information, read the Backup (view page 263) section in the "Video
project management" chapter.
Load backup project
This option loads an automatically created slideshow backup. This type of automatic backup gets the file extension MV_ (underscore). This command is only intended for use in emergencies, for example, if you unintentionally saved your change and wish to return to the previous version of the movie.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + O
Clean-up wizard
The clean-up wizard helps delete projects from the hard drive, including all of the media files used. Use this function to free up disk space for future projects.
Caution : If the files you used in the movie have also been used in other movies
(like trailers, opening music, etc.), then you should make backup copies of these files beforehand.
Ctrl + Shift + Y Keyboard shortcut: www.magix.com
Menus
For detailed information, read the clean-up wizard (view page 265) section in
the "Video project management" chapter.
Settings
Movie settings
Opens the movie settings of the currently selected movie.
Program settings
Opens the program settings (view page 60).
Keyboard shortcut: Y
Keyboard shortcuts...
This menu entry opens a dialog for editing keyboard shortcuts (view page 325);
this enables you to adjust MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX however you like.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + U
Preview rendering
This menu opens the dialog for the preview rendering (view page 70) settings
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + R
Exit
Closes MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + F4
281
Edit Menu
Undo
With this command you can undo the last changes you made. This way, it's no problem if you want to try out critical operations. If you don't like the result, then you can always revert to the previous state by using "Undo".
Clicking on the arrow next to the button opens a list of changes made until now, allowing you to undo several changes made in sequence. www.magix.com
282 Menus
Note: You can adjust the length of the list to your needs in program settings
(view page 60). In general: The longer the list, the more RAM is used.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Z
Redo
This function undoes the previous "Undo" function.
Clicking on the arrow next to the button opens a list of changes made until now, allowing you to undo several changes made in sequence.
Note: You can adjust the length of the list to your needs in program settings
(view page 60). In general: The longer the list, the more RAM is used.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + Y
Cut objects
This function deletes the selected scene (or the selected object in
"Timeline" mode) and copies it to the clipboard. You can then use the
"Paste" command to copy it into any movie.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + X
Copying objects
This function copies the selected scene (or the selected object in
Timeline mode) to the clipboard. You can then use the "Paste" command to place it into any movie.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + C
Paste objects
This command inserts the clipboard material (photo or object) at the current position of the start marker.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + V
Duplicate objects
This command duplicates all selected objects. The copies appear beside the original and can be placed in the correct position using drag & drop.
D Keyboard shortcut: www.magix.com
Menus
Delete items
This function deletes the selected scene (or the selected object in the
Timeline mode).
Keyboard shortcut: Del
Select all objects
All objects in the arrangement will be selected.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + A
Save objects as takes
The selected objects are saved in the takes directory. To use takes, please read the chapter "Saving objects separately" in the PDF manual.
Keyboard shortcut: Strg + F
Cut
Editing functions are also accessible using the toolbar. The last selected function will appear in the toolbar as a button.
Split scene
This command cuts a scene at the point where the playback marker is positioned. This way, two free-standing objects are created.
Keyboard shortcut: T
Remove scene start
This command cuts a scene at the point where the start marker is positioned, and deletes all material that precedes the start position simultaneously.
Keyboard shortcut: Z
Remove scene end
This command cuts a scene at the point where the start marker is positioned, and deletes all material behind the start position simultaneously.
Keyboard shortcut: U
283 www.magix.com
284 Menus
Remove scene
If you want to cut a scene out of a movie retroactively, this option automatically moves all objects, titles, and transitions on all tracks forwards so that no gaps result.
Objects on other tracks which project into the area of the selected scene will not be moved automatically; they will remain at the current position.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Del
Split movie
This command divides the movie into two individual movies at the position of the playback marker. The current arranger retains the portion that is located in front of the playback marker.
The remaining part will be erased from the current arranger and turned into a new movie, which can be found in the "Window" menu.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Y
Musical editing
If your background music is edited using the beat recognition assistant (view
page 215), you can automatically adapt your cuts to the tempo with this
option. All hard cuts (no crossfaded objects) are shifted across the musical quarter note positions.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + M
Range
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX provides object-based functions as well as
"band-oriented" editing functions. These always refer to the whole arrangement from the first to the last track as well as to the area between the start and end marker.
Cut range
The section between the in and out points is cut from the current arrangement and placed on the clipboard. This section can be reinserted elsewhere.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + X www.magix.com
Menus
Copy range
The section between the in and out points is copied from the current arrangement to the clipboard. This section can be reinserted elsewhere.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + X
Delete
The section between the in and out points is deleted from the current arrangement and not copied to the clipboard.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Del
Insert range
The contents of the clipboard are inserted at the current arrangement's position of the in point.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + V
Extract
The section between the in and out points is preserved, and all of the material in front and behind it are deleted. Use this option to isolate a specific part of an arrangement for further individual editing.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + P
Insert blank space
An empty section the length of the period between the in and out point will be added to the first track. The objects following this will be moved.
Keyboard shortcut: C
Form group
Orders all selected objects into groups. As soon as an object from the group is selected, all other objects in the group will be highlighted as well so that you can work on them collectively.
Keyboard shortcut: G
285 www.magix.com
286 Menus
Ungroup objects
This turns all selected objects into free-standing objects again.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + G
Wizards
Slideshow Maker
Opens the Slideshow Maker (view page 211)
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + M
Soundtrack Maker
This command opens MAGIX Soundtrack Maker (view page 186).
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + S
Travel route animation
This menu entry opens the separate Travel route animation program. This enables simple creation of animated travel routes with the help of online maps.
Note : In order to be able to use current map data, maps are fetched by Travel route animation directly from the Internet. This requires an active Internet connection.
Mixdown Audio
This option joins all audio objects in one audio file. The sound material will only occupy one track of the arranger and will hardly affect the RAM, but it will occupy approximately 10 MB (in stereo) on the hard drive. This will give you more control over the arranger and more space for additional objects.
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX automatically normalizes the audio file, i.e. the loudest part of the wave audio object is identical with the highest figure of the
16-bit resolution ceiling. This guarantees the same sound quality, even if you repeat the mix down procedure or you combine the mix down file with other wave audio objects again and again.
The mix function is very helpful if you want to go on using the mixdown object.
For the final AVI or WAV (or any other multi-media) file, which is designed for burning a CD or for use on other PCs, use the "Export arrangement" submenu options from the file menu instead of the mixdown function. www.magix.com
Menus
Tip: Instead of using the mixdown function, you can use the various options of the submenu "Export movie" in the File menu to create a final final *.avi or
*.wav (or any other multimedia) file.
287
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + D
Audio and video mixdown
In addition to the "Combine audio" function (see above), all video objects including effects, fades, and edits are combined in a single MAGIX video file
(view page 269). If your computer starts to approach its limits, this enables you
to free resources for further editing.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + M
Start preview rendering...
Starts Preview rendering.
Remove range(s) for preview rendering...
Removes preview rendering ranges. If multiple sections were defined and the playback marker is placed over one of these sections, you will be asked whether you would like to remove only this "Secton" or "All.
Edit snap point
Objects, object edges, markers or the playback marker will spring automatically to particular "Key positions", when you move them close enough with the mouse. This is called "snapping". This helps to position objects exactly, even if the project is zoomed out. Per object, one snap point may now be placed within an object to mark positions where other objects should snap to. This can be helpful, for example, in case a title should be shown at a specific position of a video object.
To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker at the position where you would like the snap point to be.
With the "Set snap point" option, which you can find in the menu "Edit" >"Edit snap points", a snap point will be set. "Delete snap point" deletes a snap point. If in the object the "Set snap point" option is selected at another position, the snap point will be moved.
"Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects in a film. www.magix.com
288 Menus
Shortcut for "Set snap point": Ctrl + P
Marker
Set project marker
This option places a project marker at the current playback position. More information about project markers is available in the chapter "Markers" under
"Set project marker (view page 109)".
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Enter
Delete project marker
Deletes the selected project marker (view page 109). Project markers can be
deleted and renamed via the context menu.
Set chapter markers
Places a chapter marker at the position of the playback marker. This creates a chapter entry in the disc menu in case the movie is being burned to disc.
You can rename the chapter markers by right clicking and selecting "Rename".
The new name will appear in the chapter menu (view page 242).
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + Enter www.magix.com
Menus
Set chapter markers automatically
This option automatically sets chapter markers in the arrangement according to specific rules that will then appear in the film menu of a disc as chapters.
This is useful if a disc should be burned immediately after recording.
289
There is a selection of options available for automatic chapter generation:
At the beginning of the movie : The movie only contains one chapter in this case.
At the start of objects on a track...
: Every object in a track creates a chapter; track 1 is preset.
At the position of existing title objects : Subtitles, for instance, as faded-in subheadings, give the position of the chapter markers.
Provide interval (in minutes)/provide quantity : If the chapters are separated without any particular method and are just needed for quicker navigation, chapter markers may also be inserted in pre-defined intervals or as a pre-defined number of chapter markers. www.magix.com
290 Menus
Titling of chapter markers : To title the chapter markers, a user-defined name featuring consecutive numbers or the object name or text from the text objects may be used.
Optionally, existing chapter markers may be deleted and the automatic chapter marker function may be limited to the area between the start and end markers.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + Enter
Delete chapter markers/delete all chapter markers
Delete one or all chapter markers. This removes chapter entries in the disc menu if the film is burned to disc.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + Enter
Marker -> Set range start/end
Sets a range start/end marker at the position of the playback marker.
Keyboard shortcut: I/O
Marker -> Jump to range start/end
Sets the playback marker at the position of the range start/end.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + I/O
Marker -> Reset selected range
Deletes the range start and the range end.
Move screen view
Using these commands, a viewable portion together with the start marker will be moved in the timeline. You can quickly skip between different markers (skip, chapter, scene, ad-marker) and object edges.
Keyboard shortcut:
See "Keyboard shortcuts", "Arranger". (view page 320)
Multicam
This command switches to Multicam mode (view page 113).
www.magix.com
Menus
Menu effects
Master effects
This menu item accesses the movie's effect settings (view page 151). The
settings affected here apply to the entire movie.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + H
Video object effects
Scene recognition
Calls up the automatic scene recognition, which "cuts up" longer videos into scenes for storage in the "Takes" directory.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + Z
Image stabilization
Opens the image stabilization dialog to correct "wobbly" recordings. Read
more about this in the chapter "Image stabilization (view page 149)".
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + L
Searching for and removing ads
Opens the dialog for searching and removing advertising (view page 223).
In MAGIX Photo Designer bearbeiten
Graphic files (BMPs or JPEGs) from the arranger can be post-edited in an external graphics program. The selected image file is loaded automatically and, once editing has been completed, is used in the MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX instead of the original material. For this, MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX offers the high-performance photo editing program MAGIX Photo Designer.
Save photos with effects
This allows you to save photos used in the movie and add the object effects used in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX (e.g. StoryMaker) to the photo.
Create panorama...
Opens the dialog for setting a panorama. Place as many photos in the correct order as you like, and align brightness and color settings to get the best results. You should make sure that the photos harmonize at the transitions. www.magix.com
291
292 Menus
Video effects
Here you can find adjustable effects for video and photo objects. The effects can be set only after selecting an object in the respective effects dialog. For
more information, go to the "Video effects in the Media Pool (view page 123)"
section in the "Effects" chapter.
Video effect templates
This features general templates that can be added to the video objects via drag & drop and several video mix effects that can be quickly and easily applied, e.g. bluescreen.
Movement effects
These are movement effects you can use to animate the frame by using zoom or camera movements. For more information go to the "Effects" chapter,
section "Movement effects in Media Pool" (view page 131).
Movement effect templates
These are templates for movement effects. These can be added from the
Media Pool into the arrangement by double-clicking or via drag & drop.
Section
Places video objects in a particular part of the screen. Please read the "Video effects" chapter for more details.
Background design
Select a color, a picture, or any video on your hard disk which you would like to serve as the background for the photo displayed. This function is especially useful when photos have black bars around them, or if they are reduced in size.
Reset background
Resets the background design (view page 292) settings to default settings.
Set as background
Uses the selected photo or video as the background. www.magix.com
Menus
Load video effects
This command enables a saved effects combination to be loaded for the currently loaded object. If multiple objects are selected, then the effects combination will be applied to each selected object.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + O
Save video effects
This command saves the current effects combination for each object separately.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + S
Reset video effects
This option allows you to deactivate all currently used effects. The material will be reset to the state it was in before you applied the effect.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + H
Copy video effects
Effects settings for an object may be copied to the clipboard to add (view page
Keyboard shortcut: -
Insert video effects
Video effects may be inserted into the selected object from other objects. The
settings must be copied (view page 293) beforehand into the clipboard.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + -
Apply video effects to all
The current effects settings will be applied to all scenes and photos in your movie.
Apply video effects to all of the following
The current effects settings will be applied to all scenes and photos in your movie which lie behind the selected object.
293 www.magix.com
294 Menus
Audio object effects
Normalize
The function "Normalize" raises the level of an audio object to the maximum possible level without clipping the material. This searches for the largest signal peak in the audio material and raises the level of the object so that this position matches exactly 0 dB (maximum overdrive).
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + N
Automatic track damping
Please see Reduce volume (view page 173) in the audio effects chapter.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + L
Set volume
This function, located in both the effects menu and the context menu, controls the sound volume for individual objects, just like the object handles in the arranger.
Audio cleaning
Opens the "Audio Cleaning (More information can be found in the section
"Sound optimization" on page 159)" dialog.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + A
Echo/Hall
Please see "Reverb/Echo" in the chapter "Audio effects".
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + H
Timestretch/resample
Read more about this in Timestretch/resample.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Q
Load audio effects
This command enables a saved effects combination to be loaded for the currently loaded object. If multiple objects are selected, then the effects combination will be applied to each selected object.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + + www.magix.com
Menus
Save audio effects
This command saves the current effects combination for each object separately.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + +
Reset audio effects
This option allows you to deactivate all currently used effects entirely if you want to undo the changes.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Alt + +
BPM Wizard
Read the section concerning the Tempo and beat recognition (view page 215)
in the chapter "Audio" for more about this.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + K
Volume curve
The most important effect, the volume, is available here directly. The volume is also available via the Media Pool under "Effects -> Audio effects -> General
(view page 137)", where it may also be animated.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + V
Title Effects
Title Editor
Opens the Title editor for the selected photo, video, or title object.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + T
Load title template
Use this command to load previously saved title effects for the current object.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + T
Save title template
You can save the current effect combination for each title object separately and apply it to other title objects later.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + T
295 www.magix.com
296 Menus
Design elements
Multi picture-in-picture: Various effects presets for image stacking.
Collages: These work similarly to normal picture-in-picture effects, but more objects are used. Depending on the collage, arrange the selected objects one after the other and drag the collage onto the first object.
Color spaces: The color spaces are a collection of various backgrounds.
Professional test images are included for calibrating your system. You can also use the colored backgrounds for your own color transitions, for instance. The special "User" template opens a color selection dialog where you can choose the desired color.
Backgrounds: Here you can find static and animated photo and video backgrounds. Video backgrounds are capable of being looped, meaning that their length can be extended by duplication.
Image objects: Here you will find various image objects like black bars, thought bubbles for cartoons, etc.
Intros/Outros: These are beginning and end scenes for films with various themes.
You can find additional information in the "Effects (view page 138)" chapter, in
the section "Design element in Media Pool".
Effects library
Using these menu choices, you can control the corresponding directories in
the Media Pool (view page 21, view page 44).
Windows menu
Cut Trimmer
Shows or hides the "Cut trimmer" window. This allows you to make fine adjustments to the position of the selected video or image objects and their handles – as well as the transition characteristics (transition type, length).
Please read the "Fine adjustment of video ("Trimming")" chapter for more details.
Keyboard shortcut: N www.magix.com
Menus
Object trimmer
Shows or hides the trim window. This enables the position of the selected video or image object and its handles to be adjusted more finely. Read the chapter "Adjusting videos precisely" ("Trimming").
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + N
Mixer
With this option you can open and close the real-time mixer. Further
information can be found in the Mixer (view page 176) chapter.
Keyboard shortcut: M
Master audio effect rack
Opens or closes the master effects rack; you can also use the "Master FX" button in the mixer window for this.
Keyboard shortcut: B
Mastering Suite
This opens the Mastering Suite (view page 168).
Program monitor
Opens and closes the video window. If the standard layout is chosen the
Mediapool can be shown in a freely scalable and moveable window.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + V
Media Pool
With this option you can hide the Media Pool or make it visible again.
Keyboard shortcut: F
Project
Shows/Hides the arranger
Reset window arrangement
This option resets the window arrangement to its default state.
F9 Keyboard shortcut: www.magix.com
297
298 Menus
Display settings
See program settings -> "Display presets (view page 67)" in the PDF manual.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + V
Show movie overview
With this option, you can display an overview of the entire arrangement on the video screen. It is particularly suitable for long and complex arrangements to prevent you from losing track. You can view the whole movie and you are, despite this, able to access the object you're looking for in a split second – you can zoom in directly on the video monitor or move around the clip displayed in the arranger.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + A
Optimize movie view
The zoom level is set to 100% so that you can see every object and the entire film.
The start and end markers are set to the beginning or end, so that the entire movie can be played.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + F
Zoom horizontal
Here you will find a range of functions for altering the visible time axis section.
Zoom vertical
The number of simultaneously visible tracks can be changed here. The more tracks are visible, the smaller they will appear.
Remove all movies from project
Closes all opened movies. www.magix.com
Menus
"Share" menu
Here you will find many options for for quickly and easily publishing your data from the program on the web. Additionally, data transfer into other programs for specialized editing, if you have such programs installed, is enabled.
Youtube / Facebook
This is a direct connection between MAGIX and different communities like
YouTube or Facebook.
Youtube / Facebook
Uploads the current film to the selected portal or to the selected community.
Enter the data for video into the fields provided, so that the search function for this portal can also find this video.
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX partially uses the H.264 format for this, which is a component of the MPEG-4 codec. Since Flash supports this format directly and most communities and portals use the format, the film does not need to be re-rendered on the corresponding server. This avoids loss of quality.
When HD material is uploaded, a resolution of 720p is used for the HD format.
Upload all selected media in Media Pool
Uploads the media selected in the Media Pool to the corresponding portal or the selective community.
299
Note : To import and export AVC(HD) and MPEG-4 files, the MEPG-4 codec
must first be activated (view page 331). A dialog will open if the codec is
required. www.magix.com
300 Menus
Tasks menu
In this menu you will find direct solution and short video explanations on how to perform tasks in different topics. Not only will you find step-by-step instructions for sound and pictures here, but you also find quick access to many of functions. If you click on an entry with a camera symbol, then you will open a short tutorial video which displays a solution. Entries without camera symbols offer a solution to the problem immediately.
Help Menu
Help
This command is available for almost every feature of the program, and it opens the "Help" file for the corresponding topic. Use this command to get help on any of MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX's functions.
Keyboard shortcut: F1
Content
Use the command "Content" in the "Help" menu to open the start page of the help file. You can read through the help file step-by-step and jump to specific sections via the tree structure on the right hand side.
Context help
The mouse cursor will turn into an arrow with a question mark.
Click on any button of the main screen, to open program help which will describe the control element in question.
Shortcut: Alt + F1
Quickstart/Recording/Editing/Burning and exporting tutorial video
Displays tutorial videos on different video editing topics in MAGIX Movie Edit
Pro MX.
Tip : If you are using MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX for the first time, we recommend you view the tutorial videos first. They will give you a quick introduction to the most important topics. www.magix.com
Ask questions online in the Knowledge Community
Ask magix.info a question.
Menus
Find knowledge & workshops
Have a look at the newest workshops at magix.info and read useful tips from other MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX users.
Online tutorials
Interesting tutorials and useful tips for working with MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX can be found on the MAGIX website.
An online connection is required.
Get in contact with other users
MAGIX Screenshare allows you to transfer the contents of your screen to other users (Screen transfer as guest) or view the screens of other users (Screen transfer as host).
To transfer the contents of your monitor to another user, select the menu item
" Transfer screen as host ". The MAGIX Screenshare start screen will appear.
Now click "Start session".
301
Note : Clicking your name allows you to change it as it appears in the session.
In the start screen, you can also set if you would like to view the guest's screen as the host via the "Settings" tab under "Options".
Two windows will open. A large one which shows other screen contents as required, and a smaller one which displays your session ID.
Provide this number to all users who would like to view your screen.
Note : The session ID changes with every new session.
If you would like to receive another user's screen contents, you will require the session ID. Select the menu item " Transfer screen as guest ". In the dialog that opens, enter the session ID you received and click "Start session". www.magix.com
302 Menus
About MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX
Displays copyright info and version number of MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX.
Register online
This option opens the MAGIX homepage for online registration where you can register yourself as a MAGIX user.
Registration grants you access to the MAGIX support website http://support.magix.net (see support) where various program updates and help programs can be downloaded.
With the registration form supplied (start menu under "MAGIX Movie Edit Pro
MX -> Service and support -> Register") you can register via post or fax.
Simply print it out, fill it in, and send it off!
Shortcut: F12
Online Update
Connects directly to the online update page where you can get the latest version of your program.
Download video effects plug-ins
This command lets you download new video effects plug-ins (view page 140).
Display Tool Tips
Tooltips are small information windows that open up automatically if the mouse pointer stops briefly on a button or some other area. They provide information about the function of the button. These information boxes can be switched on or off with this option.
Shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + F1
Reset Program Settings to Default...
Use this function to reset all program settings you made in MAGIX Movie Edit
Pro MX to their original settings. www.magix.com
Menus
Context menu (right click)
Context menu can be reached by right clicking on a selected object. It offers functions which are available and can be expected in the given context.
Video objects
Scene recognition
Calls up the automatic scene recognition, which "cuts up" longer videos into scenes for storage in the "Takes" directory.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + Z
Image stabilization
Opens the image stabilization dialog to correct "wobbly" recordings. Read
more about this in the chapter "Image stabilization (view page 149)".
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + L
Create frame table (new)
Sometimes, rebuilding a frame table can get rid of problems in certain MPEG files. For example, such problems can be present if the navigation (positioning of the playback marker, transport) is bumpy or doesn't function at all.
Normally, when loading MPEG video, a frame table is not created in order to speed up the loading process. If you do create one anyway, MPEG files are normally noticeably faster and easier to edit.
Cut Trimmer
Shows or hides the "Cut trimmer" window. This allows you to make fine adjustments to the position of the selected video or image objects and their handles – as well as the transition characteristics (transition type, length).
Please read the "Fine adjustment of video ("Trimming")" chapter for more details.
Keyboard shortcut: N
Object trimmer
Shows or hides the trim window. This enables the position of the selected video or image object and its handles to be adjusted more finely. Read the chapter "Adjusting videos precisely" ("Trimming").
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + N www.magix.com
303
304 Menus
Edit snap point
Objects, object edges, markers or the playback marker will spring automatically to particular "Key positions", when you move them close enough with the mouse. This is called "snapping". This helps to position objects exactly, even if the project is zoomed out. Per object, one snap point may now be placed within an object to mark positions where other objects should snap to. This can be helpful, for example, in case a title should be shown at a specific position of a video object.
To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker at the position where you would like the snap point to be.
With the "Set snap point" option, which you can find in the menu "Edit" >"Edit snap points", a snap point will be set. "Delete snap point" deletes a snap point. If in the object the "Set snap point" option is selected at another position, the snap point will be moved.
"Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects in a film.
Shortcut for "Set snap point": Ctrl + P
Create still frame
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX can create a still frame of an object at the position of the start marker.
Motion
Lets you move video objects on the screen. See "Movement" in the "Video effects" chapter.
Section
Places video objects in a particular part of the screen. Please read the "Video effects" chapter for more details.
Attach to picture position in the video
This can be used to attach the current video, image, or (3D) text object to a movement path in another video object. Read more about this in the chapter
"Magnetic objects (view page 149)".
Interpolation for interlace material
Choose this option to remove interlace artifacts from your video image. If, for instance, you extract freeze frames from a video, ridge structures appear in sequences which feature movement. www.magix.com
Menus
Anti-flicker filter
Choose this option for still pictures with detailed structures and high contrast.
This filter reduces line flickering during TV playback.
Border cropping adjustment:
Select this option if the edges are cropped during playback on your television.
Values stored in "Movie effects settings (view page 152)" ("Effects" menu) will
be applied.
Video effects
The entries for this submenu are directly available in the Media Pool.
305
Fade in date as title
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX can add a time or date (“time code”) to the picture material. To add a time code, right-click the video object and choose the
“Fade in date as title” option from the context menu.
If you’re using a DV-AVI file (a digital recording from a camcorder, for instance), the recording date will be used from the chosen place. If you’re using a different file, the creation date will be used as the time code. The title editor is then opened in order to customize the entry.
In the preview monitor context menu you will also find the "Display play time" option. This will create a time code.
Object properties
This function displays all the information about the currently selected objects such as file name, position on the hard-drive, tempo, etc. The Object Editor also defines the foreground and background color of every object in the arrangement. Depending on the type of object, the elements displayed will vary. www.magix.com
306 Menus
General information
The name of the selected object, the fore/background color and aspect ratio for the object in unselected status can be changed here. Additional information is also displayed about which file the selected object points to.
Calculation of intermediate images
Interlace/Deinterlace (only for video objects)
The tab "Interlace/Deinterlace" lets you specify the interlace editing of the video material.
Interlace properties: Normally, MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX automatically makes suitable settings for this. Adjustments still need to be made to faulty video footage. If playback of the exported movie is very jittery, if flickering occurs, or if some effects do not look how they should, you can reverse the source material frames.
Deinterlace options : Normally, the setting "Automatic interlace processing" does not have to be changed. The frames are processed separately and passed to the encoder when exported. If necessary, MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX will perform high-quality interlacing. If "No interlace processing" is set, then it is assumed that the source material contains full frames.
For more information on interlacing, please see "Interlace" (view page 366).
Interpolate intermediate frames: Activate this function in order to smoothen motion during playback in order to get a more fluid image.
Tempo/Pitch (audio objects only)
If there is information about the tempo, then the tempo can be doubled or halved here. You set the tempo with the BPM wizard.
Metadata (only when metadata is found in the object):
If you open object properties of images or AVCHD video with metadata, they will appear here. In this way you can find additional information about the object. www.magix.com
Menus
Image objects
Scene recognition
Calls up the automatic scene recognition, which "cuts up" longer videos into scenes for storage in the "Takes" directory.
Keyboard shortcut: Shift + Z
Edit snap point
Objects, object edges, markers or the playback marker will spring automatically to particular "Key positions", when you move them close enough with the mouse. This is called "snapping". This helps to position objects exactly, even if the project is zoomed out. Per object, one snap point may now be placed within an object to mark positions where other objects should snap to. This can be helpful, for example, in case a title should be shown at a specific position of a video object.
To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker at the position where you would like the snap point to be.
With the "Set snap point" option, which you can find in the menu "Edit" >"Edit snap points", a snap point will be set. "Delete snap point" deletes a snap point. If in the object the "Set snap point" option is selected at another position, the snap point will be moved.
"Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects in a film.
Shortcut for "Set snap point": Ctrl + P
Change photo length
This dialog gives exact values regarding the display duration for the selected photo. You may select multiple photos beforehand to change their display duration at once.
Motion
Lets you move video objects on the screen. See "Movement" in the "Video effects" chapter.
Section
Places video objects in a particular part of the screen. Please read the "Video effects" chapter for more details.
307 www.magix.com
308 Menus
Attach to picture position in the video
This can be used to attach the current video, image, or (3D) text object to a movement path in another video object. Read more about this in the chapter
"Magnetic objects (view page 149)".
Cut automatically to fit screen
This function ensures that images don't have black edges (in case they don't fit into the given format).
Anti-flicker filter
Choose this option for still pictures with detailed structures and high contrast.
This filter reduces line flickering during TV playback.
Border cropping adjustment:
Select this option if the edges are cropped during playback on your television.
Values stored in "Movie effects settings (view page 152)" ("Effects" menu) will
be applied.
Background design
Select a color, a picture, or any video on your hard disk which you would like to serve as the background for the photo displayed. This function is especially useful when photos have black bars around them, or if they are reduced in size.
Export to MAGIX Online Album
Log in to the MAGIX Online Album service and load images and music into the album to share them with your friends and acquaintances in the Internet. The assistant will lead you step-by-step through the uploading process. After the process is finished, you can access your updated MAGIX Online Album.
Export to MAGIX Online Print Service
Use MAGIX Online Print Service to order high-quality photo prints or fantastic printed photo gifts of your valuable digital photos simply with one click. www.magix.com
Menus
Video effects
The entries for this submenu are directly available in the Media Pool.
309
Object properties
This function displays all the information about the currently selected objects such as file name, position on the hard-drive, tempo, etc. The Object Editor also defines the foreground and background color of every object in the arrangement. Depending on the type of object, the elements displayed will vary.
General information
The name of the selected object, the fore/background color and aspect ratio for the object in unselected status can be changed here. Additional information is also displayed about which file the selected object points to.
Calculation of intermediate images
Interlace/Deinterlace (only for video objects)
The tab "Interlace/Deinterlace" lets you specify the interlace editing of the video material.
Interlace properties: Normally, MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX automatically makes suitable settings for this. Adjustments still need to be made to faulty video footage. If playback of the exported movie is very jittery, if flickering occurs, or if some effects do not look how they should, you can reverse the source material frames.
Deinterlace options : Normally, the setting "Automatic interlace processing" does not have to be changed. The frames are processed separately and passed to the encoder when exported. If necessary, MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX www.magix.com
310 Menus will perform high-quality interlacing. If "No interlace processing" is set, then it is assumed that the source material contains full frames.
For more information on interlacing, please see "Interlace" (view page 366).
Interpolate intermediate frames: Activate this function in order to smoothen motion during playback in order to get a more fluid image.
Tempo/Pitch (audio objects only)
If there is information about the tempo, then the tempo can be doubled or halved here. You set the tempo with the BPM wizard.
Metadata (only when metadata is found in the object):
If you open object properties of images or AVCHD video with metadata, they will appear here. In this way you can find additional information about the object.
Transitions
Cut Trimmer
Shows or hides the "Cut trimmer" window. This allows you to make fine adjustments to the position of the selected video or image objects and their handles – as well as the transition characteristics (transition type, length).
Please read the "Fine adjustment of video ("Trimming")" chapter for more details.
Keyboard shortcut: N
Settings...
A dialog with the settings for the corresponding transition will be displayed.
Depending on the transition, different settings are available.
Audio objects
Create wave form
In most cases, the waveform display of an audio file will not be required.
However, if you require this, e.g. to navigate while cutting video, a waveform display can be produced manually via this function. www.magix.com
Menus
Edit snap point
Objects, object edges, markers or the playback marker will spring automatically to particular "Key positions", when you move them close enough with the mouse. This is called "snapping". This helps to position objects exactly, even if the project is zoomed out. Per object, one snap point may now be placed within an object to mark positions where other objects should snap to. This can be helpful, for example, in case a title should be shown at a specific position of a video object.
To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker at the position where you would like the snap point to be.
With the "Set snap point" option, which you can find in the menu "Edit" >"Edit snap points", a snap point will be set. "Delete snap point" deletes a snap point. If in the object the "Set snap point" option is selected at another position, the snap point will be moved.
"Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects in a film.
Shortcut for "Set snap point": Ctrl + P
BPM Wizard
Read the section concerning the Tempo and beat recognition (view page 215)
in the chapter "Audio" for more about this.
Keyboard shortcut: Alt + Shift + K
Volume curve
The most important effect, the volume, is available here directly. The volume is also available via the Media Pool under "Effects -> Audio effects -> General
(view page 137)", where it may also be animated.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + Shift + V
Audio effects curves
This feature provides direct access to diverse object effects, and these can be automated using a curve. All of the audio effects listed here are found in the
Media Pool under "Effects -> Audio effects -> General".
Display track curves
The most recently selected track curve is displayed on the object for editing.
Use of a curve causes the parameters set in the mixer to be disregarded.
311 www.magix.com
312 Menus
Note : The track curves of audio objects can be animated in the same way as video effects. Read more about this in the chapter "Animating objects (view
Reset track curves
All track curves can be reset with this function. The settings made in the mixer will be applied to the track again.
Caution!
Before applying this function, make sure none of the track curves will be need in the future.
Export to MAGIX Online Album
Log in to the MAGIX Online Album service and load images and music into the album to share them with your friends and acquaintances in the Internet. The assistant will lead you step-by-step through the uploading process. After the process is finished, you can access your updated MAGIX Online Album.
Object properties
This function displays all the information about the currently selected objects such as file name, position on the hard-drive, tempo, etc. The Object Editor also defines the foreground and background color of every object in the arrangement. Depending on the type of object, the elements displayed will vary.
General information
The name of the selected object, the fore/background color and aspect ratio for the object in unselected status can be changed here. Additional information is also displayed about which file the selected object points to.
Calculation of intermediate images
Interlace/Deinterlace (only for video objects)
The tab "Interlace/Deinterlace" lets you specify the interlace editing of the video material.
Interlace properties: Normally, MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX automatically makes suitable settings for this. Adjustments still need to be made to faulty video footage. If playback of the exported movie is very jittery, if flickering www.magix.com
Menus occurs, or if some effects do not look how they should, you can reverse the source material frames.
Deinterlace options : Normally, the setting "Automatic interlace processing" does not have to be changed. The frames are processed separately and passed to the encoder when exported. If necessary, MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX will perform high-quality interlacing. If "No interlace processing" is set, then it is assumed that the source material contains full frames.
For more information on interlacing, please see "Interlace" (view page 366).
Interpolate intermediate frames: Activate this function in order to smoothen motion during playback in order to get a more fluid image.
Tempo/Pitch (audio objects only)
If there is information about the tempo, then the tempo can be doubled or halved here. You set the tempo with the BPM wizard.
Metadata (only when metadata is found in the object):
If you open object properties of images or AVCHD video with metadata, they will appear here. In this way you can find additional information about the object.
Text objects
Title Editor
Opens the Title editor for the selected photo, video, or title object.
Keyboard shortcut: Ctrl + T
Disable effects
All effects applied to the text will be deactivated.
Edit snap point
Objects, object edges, markers or the playback marker will spring automatically to particular "Key positions", when you move them close enough with the mouse. This is called "snapping". This helps to position objects exactly, even if the project is zoomed out. Per object, one snap point may now be placed within an object to mark positions where other objects should snap to. This can be helpful, for example, in case a title should be shown at a specific position of a video object. www.magix.com
313
314 Menus
To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker at the position where you would like the snap point to be.
With the "Set snap point" option, which you can find in the menu "Edit" >"Edit snap points", a snap point will be set. "Delete snap point" deletes a snap point. If in the object the "Set snap point" option is selected at another position, the snap point will be moved.
"Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects in a film.
Shortcut for "Set snap point":
Load title template
Ctrl + P
A dialog for loading a title template will open.
Save as title template
This allows you to create your own templates using your title creations. The function "Load title template" enables these templates to be used again quickly.
Save as special effect
This function saves the title with all objects that have been grouped (view page
285) with the title object. This enables you to create title templates that contain
all required overlay objects.
Convert to 3D title
The title object will now be turned into a MAGIX 3D Maker object, and a limited version of MAGIX 3D Maker will open.
Attach to picture position in the video
This can be used to attach the current video, image, or (3D) text object to a movement path in another video object. Read more about this in the chapter
"Magnetic objects (view page 149)".
Border cropping adjustment:
Select this option if the edges are cropped during playback on your television.
Values stored in "Movie effects settings (view page 152)" ("Effects" menu) will
be applied.
Object properties
This function displays all the information about the currently selected objects such as file name, position on the hard-drive, tempo, etc. The Object Editor also defines the foreground and background color of every object in the arrangement. Depending on the type of object, the elements displayed will vary. www.magix.com
General information
Menus
The name of the selected object, the fore/background color and aspect ratio for the object in unselected status can be changed here. Additional information is also displayed about which file the selected object points to.
Calculation of intermediate images
Interlace/Deinterlace (only for video objects)
The tab "Interlace/Deinterlace" lets you specify the interlace editing of the video material.
Interlace properties: Normally, MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX automatically makes suitable settings for this. Adjustments still need to be made to faulty video footage. If playback of the exported movie is very jittery, if flickering occurs, or if some effects do not look how they should, you can reverse the source material frames.
Deinterlace options : Normally, the setting "Automatic interlace processing" does not have to be changed. The frames are processed separately and passed to the encoder when exported. If necessary, MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX will perform high-quality interlacing. If "No interlace processing" is set, then it is assumed that the source material contains full frames.
For more information on interlacing, please see "Interlace" (view page 366).
Interpolate intermediate frames: Activate this function in order to smoothen motion during playback in order to get a more fluid image.
Tempo/Pitch (audio objects only)
If there is information about the tempo, then the tempo can be doubled or halved here. You set the tempo with the BPM wizard.
Metadata (only when metadata is found in the object):
If you open object properties of images or AVCHD video with metadata, they will appear here. In this way you can find additional information about the object.
315 www.magix.com
316 Menus
MAGIX 3D Maker objects
Edit settings...
A limited MAGIX 3D Maker version is opened to edit the selected object.
Edit snap point
Objects, object edges, markers or the playback marker will spring automatically to particular "Key positions", when you move them close enough with the mouse. This is called "snapping". This helps to position objects exactly, even if the project is zoomed out. Per object, one snap point may now be placed within an object to mark positions where other objects should snap to. This can be helpful, for example, in case a title should be shown at a specific position of a video object.
To set a snap point, select an object and place the playback marker at the position where you would like the snap point to be.
With the "Set snap point" option, which you can find in the menu "Edit" >"Edit snap points", a snap point will be set. "Delete snap point" deletes a snap point. If in the object the "Set snap point" option is selected at another position, the snap point will be moved.
"Delete all snap points" deletes all snap points for all objects in a film.
Shortcut for "Set snap point": Ctrl + P
Create still frame
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX can create a still frame of an object at the position of the start marker.
Motion
Lets you move video objects on the screen. See "Movement" in the "Video effects" chapter.
Section
Places video objects in a particular part of the screen. Please read the "Video effects" chapter for more details.
Attach to picture position in the video
This can be used to attach the current video, image, or (3D) text object to a movement path in another video object. Read more about this in the chapter
"Magnetic objects (view page 149)".
www.magix.com
Menus
Video effects
The entries for this submenu are directly available in the Media Pool.
317
Object properties
This function displays all the information about the currently selected objects such as file name, position on the hard-drive, tempo, etc. The Object Editor also defines the foreground and background color of every object in the arrangement. Depending on the type of object, the elements displayed will vary.
General information
The name of the selected object, the fore/background color and aspect ratio for the object in unselected status can be changed here. Additional information is also displayed about which file the selected object points to.
Calculation of intermediate images
Interlace/Deinterlace (only for video objects)
The tab "Interlace/Deinterlace" lets you specify the interlace editing of the video material.
Interlace properties: Normally, MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX automatically makes suitable settings for this. Adjustments still need to be made to faulty video footage. If playback of the exported movie is very jittery, if flickering occurs, or if some effects do not look how they should, you can reverse the source material frames.
Deinterlace options : Normally, the setting "Automatic interlace processing" does not have to be changed. The frames are processed separately and passed to the encoder when exported. If necessary, MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX www.magix.com
318 Menus will perform high-quality interlacing. If "No interlace processing" is set, then it is assumed that the source material contains full frames.
For more information on interlacing, please see "Interlace" (view page 366).
Interpolate intermediate frames: Activate this function in order to smoothen motion during playback in order to get a more fluid image.
Tempo/Pitch (audio objects only)
If there is information about the tempo, then the tempo can be doubled or halved here. You set the tempo with the BPM wizard.
Metadata (only when metadata is found in the object):
If you open object properties of images or AVCHD video with metadata, they will appear here. In this way you can find additional information about the object.
Timeline
Marker -> Reset selected range
Deletes the range start and the range end.
Edit range
Choose whether the selected area, bordered by the start and end marker in the timeline, should be cut, copied, deleted, inserted or extracted, or do you wish that an empty space is inserted.
Start preview rendering...
Starts Preview rendering.
Shortcut: Ctrl + R
Remove range(s) for preview rendering...
Removes preview rendering ranges. If multiple sections were defined and the playback marker is placed over one of these sections, you will be asked whether you would like to remove only this "Secton" or "All. www.magix.com
Keyboard shortcuts
Keyboard shortcuts
Playback functions
Increase playback speed in stages
Stop playback
Reduce playback speed in stages until negative direction
Accelerate playback speed in positive direction
Accelerate playback speed in negative direction
Stop (playback marker is stopped at the current position)
Restart beginning at playback marker
Playback marker back to the beginning
Playback marker to end
1 frame back
1 frame forward
5 frames back
5 frames forward
Set project marker
Play from range start to range end
Playback at current frame
L
Shift + L
K
J
Shift + J
Shift + left arrow
Shift + right arrow
K
Back
Home
End
Left arrow
Right arrow
Ctrl + left arrow
Ctrl + right arrow
Ctrl + enter
#
+
Monitore
Video monitor Fullscreen
Other resolution
Adjust video monitor to movie settings
Adjust video monitor to selected video
Show/hide playing time
Time background transparent
Anaglyph view
View partially interlaced
Standard (2D)
Side-by-side display www.magix.com
Alt + Enter
Alt + G
Ctrl + G
Ctrl + Shift + G
Alt + I
Ctrl + Alt + I
Ctrl + .
Alt + .
.
Shift + .
319
320 Keyboard shortcuts
Arranger view
Zoom in
Zoom out
Full screen playback
Movie overview
Optimize view
Zoom 1 frame / 5 frames
Zoom 1s / 5s / 1min/ 10min
Zoom between red area markers
Entire movie
Ctrl + up cursor key
Ctrl + down cursor key
Alt + Enter
Shift + A
Shift + B
Ctrl + 1/2
Ctrl + 3/4/5/6
Ctrl + 7
Ctrl + 8
Move view
To next object edge
To previous object edge
To movie start
To movie end
To beginning of range
To end of range
Page to right/left
Grid unit to right/left
To project markers 1-10
To next/ previous project marker
To next/ previous scene marker
To next/ previous chapter marker
To next/previous ad marker
Go to previous/next marker
Go to next empty range
Go to previous empty range
To next/previously selected object
Alt + W
Alt + Q
Home end cap
Ctrl + Home
Ctrl+End.
Page Up/Down
Ctrl+PgDn/PgUp
Ctrl + 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/0
Ctrl + Shift + PgDn/PgUp
Shift + PgDn/PgUp
Alt + PgDn/PgUp
Ctrl+•+W
Alt + Shift + W
Q/W
>
Shift + >
Shift + W
Shift + Q www.magix.com
Keyboard shortcuts
Transport control in the Media Pool
Set start of range
Set end of range
Go to the start marker
Go to the end marker
Select range above blank space
Play from start to end marker
I
O
Shift + I
Shift + O
X
#
Mouse modes
Mouse mode for individual objects
All tracks mouse mode
Single track mouse mode
Curve mode
Object stretch mode
Preview audio objects
Context help
6
7
8
9
0
Alt + 6
Alt + F1
File menu
New project
Open project
Save project
Ctrl + N
Ctrl + O
Ctrl + S
Save project as... Shift + S
Project folder -> Clean up project folder Alt + Shift + X
Record audio/images/video... R
Export to device... H
Batch conversion... S
Burn CD/DVD -> Manually compile files... Ctrl + B
Clean-up wizard
Load backup project
Ctrl + Shift + Y
Ctrl + Shift + O
Exit Alt + F4
Manage movies
New
Remove from project
Export
Ctrl + Alt + N
Ctrl + F4
Ctrl + Alt + L www.magix.com
321
322 Keyboard shortcuts
Export movie
Export as AVI
Export as DV AVI
Export movie as an MPEG
Video as MAGIX video
Video as QuickTime movie
Uncompressed movie
Movie as a series of individual frames
Windows Media Export
Video as MPEG 4 video
Audio as wave
Export as transition
Single frame as BMP file
Single frame as JPEG
Animated GIF
Backup copy
Copy project and media into folder
Copy movie and media into folder
Ctrl + Alt + A
Ctrl + Alt+ D
Ctrl + Alt + P
Ctrl + Alt + M
Ctrl + Alt + Q
Ctrl + Alt + U
Ctrl + Alt + E
Ctrl + Alt + V
Ctrl + Alt + G
Ctrl + Alt + W
Ctrl + Alt + T
Ctrl + Alt + B
Ctrl + Alt + J
Ctrl + Alt + F
Alt + S
Shift + R
Settings
Movie E
Program Y
Keyboard shortcuts Ctrl + Shift + U
Edit menu
Undo
Redo
Cut objects
Copy objects
Paste objects
Duplicate objects
Delete items
Select all objects
Cut
Split scene T
Ctrl + Z
Ctrl + Y
Ctrl + X
Ctrl + C
Ctrl + V
D
Del
Ctrl + A www.magix.com
Remove scene start
Remove scene end
Remove scene
Split movie
Keyboard shortcuts
Z
U
Ctrl + Del
Alt + Y
Musical cut adjustment Ctrl + Shift + M
Edit range
Cut section
Copy section
Delete section
Insert section
Extract section
Insert empty space into selected range
Shift + Del; Alt + X
Alt + C
Alt + Del
Alt + V
Shift + X
C
Preview rendering for range between start and end marker
Ctrl + R
Group G
Ungroup Shift + G
Wizards
Slideshow Maker
Soundtrack Maker
Mix audio
Audio and video mixdown
Set snap point
Markers
Set project marker 1 - 10
Set/rename project markers
Set chapter markers
Set chapter markers automatically
Delete chapter markers
Delete all chapter markers
Set range start
Set range end
Jump to range start www.magix.com
Ctrl + M
Ctrl+Shift+S
Shift + D
Shift + M
Ctrl+P
Shift + 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/0
Ctrl + Enter
Shift + Enter
Alt + Shift + Enter
Ctrl + Shift + Enter
Ctrl + Alt + Enter
I
O
Shift + I
323
324 Keyboard shortcuts
Jump to range end
Select range above blank space
Move view
Effects menu
Movie effects settings
Video object effects
Scene recognition
Image stabilization
Edit with MAGIX Photo Designer
Video effects
Brightness/contrast
Color
Color correction
Sharpness
Video effects plug-ins
Video mix effects
Movement effects
Position/size
Section
Camera/zoom
Rotation/mirror
Audio object effects
Normalize
Volume reduction
Audio cleaning
Echo/reverb
Timestretch/resample
Load audio effects
Save audio effects
Reset audio effects
BPM wizard
Edit wave files externally
Volume curve
Shift + O
X
Ctrl + Shift + H
Shift + Z
Ctrl + L
Alt + Shift + D
Alt + Shift + H
Alt + Shift + F
Alt + Shift + C
Ctrl + Alt + S
Ctrl + Shift + P
Ctrl + Alt + X
Alt + Shift + I
Alt + Shift + P
Ctrl + Alt + Z
Alt + Shift + R
Alt + N
Alt + L
Alt + A
Shift + H
Ctrl + Q
Ctrl + +
Shift + +
Ctrl + Alt + +
Alt + Shift + K
Alt + Z
Ctrl + Shift + V www.magix.com
Title effects
Title editor
Load title effects
Save title effects
Effects libraries
Audio and video effects
Transition effects
Title effects
Keyboard shortcuts
Ctrl + T
Alt + T
Ctrl + Shift + T
Ctrl + Shift + E
Ctrl + Shift + B
Alt + Shift + L
325
Windows menu
Edit trimmer
Object trimmer
N
Shift + N
Mixer M
Master audio effect rack B
Video Monitor
Media Pool
Shift + V
Shift + P
Reset window arrangement
Display settings
Switch to next window
Film overview
Optimize movie view
Zoom horizontally/vertically
F9
Alt + Shift + V
Tab
Shift + A
Ctrl + F see Arranger view (view page
Help menu
Help
Context help
Display tooltips
About MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX
F1
Alt + F1
Ctrl + Shift + F1
Alt + Shift + F1 www.magix.com
326 Keyboard shortcuts
Edit keyboard shortcut
In this dialog you can specify keyboard shortcuts for all menu function of
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX. This allows you to adapt existing shortcuts to your requirements or to add new ones.
The settings are automatically saved in a file upon closing the program, i.e. they will be available the next time the program is used.
The display of the entire menu tree is the key function of MAGIX Movie Edit Pro
MX.
Add keyboard shortcut
To add a keyboard shortcut, proceed as follows:
Look for the required menu point and select it with a simple mouse click.
Under "Current menu point" the currently selected menu point will be displayed.
Then, click on the "New keyboard shortcut" field.
Type in the keyboard shortcut. You can also use combinations of any key with
"Shift", "Alt", and "Ctrl".
Then click on "Assign shortcut". If the shortcut should already have been assigned a corresponding warning will be displayed.
Note! Please do not use the space bar, "Esc", or "Insert" key ("0" in the number block), since the functions of these keys are permanently assigned in
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX and can not be changed.
Keyboard shortcut list
Reset: Activates all preset shortcuts again.
Load: Previously saved shortcuts are loaded and activated again.
Tip: MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX offers additional presets for those switching from other programs. These settings make it considerably easier to switch to
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX.
If you have used MAGIX Video Pro X3 and want to use its keyboard shortcuts, load Video_Pro_X3.ssc. www.magix.com
Problems and solutions
Warning: The current settings will be overwritten during loading! Save your current keyboard shortcuts in advance if you would like to keep them.
Save: The current keyboard shortcuts can be saved after naming the file appropriately.
List: This button opens a window where a complete list of current keyboard shortcuts appears. The included Copy button can be used to copy this list to the Windows clipboard and then edit and print it using a text editor.
Problems and solutions
327
File will not load
If files cannot be loaded, this means that the format is either not supported by
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX, or the corresponding codec must be activated first.
Read the section "Import formats (view page 15)" for more information.
In case of AVI files, it is possible that the necessary codec in not installed. For
more, please refer to "General tips for AVI videos (view page 335)" in the
appendix "Digital video and storage devices".
Choppy or uneven playback
Don't panic if the picture on your screen is choppy or uneven. The finished product will look perfect and play smoothly. Don't forget that MAGIX Movie
Edit Pro MX calculates all effects in real time. This lets you see for yourself what sort of influence each of the effects will have on your video footage.
Some effects make even today's high-performance PCs work quite hard, and often, a steady, continuous video stream is simply not possible on your PC.
The final product, free from previous choppiness, is only available after rendering it to DVD or exporting it. For that reason, you should first edit the movie in its raw version without effects. The preview generally delivers a steady picture, allowing you to work quickly and quietly. Towards the end, you can add effects to your movies to give them a special touch of Hollywood! www.magix.com
328 Problems and solutions
Problems and Remedies regarding the Auto Remix
Assistant
Problem: The playback stutters, the metronome is suspended, the computer is overloaded... (on older computers.)
Remedy: We recommend changing to wave drivers ("P" key, "Playback parameter" dialog) instead of DirectSound.
Problem: The metronome does not work and there are no lines on the the wave-shaped display.
Probable cause: The material does not contain beats or the song contains a passage without beats.
Remedy: The song should be limited in such a way that only rhythmic passages are contained.
Possible 2nd reason: Inaccurate tapping or a false BPM value has been entered.
Remedy: Try the tempo correction buttons or tap until the "locked" condition is attained.
Problem: The metronome sounds inaccurately or is jerky, the lines in the wave-shaped display are irregular and thinly drawn.
Activation problems
Problem : The entered code is incorrect (telephone activation)
Make sure your entry is correct; in most cases a typo is to blame.
If the code is entered correctly, dial the number of our Call Center. Our support staff will help you personally.
The MAGIX website won't open
Check your Internet connection; you may have to use manual dial-up. www.magix.com
Integrated browser
The form for ordering via post/fax won't open
Check that an adequate text editing program is installed and activated (for example, MS Word).
I still haven't received an email with the activation code
Check that your inbox isn't full.
Have a look in your spam folder.
You can always send questions via email to our support whenever you like.
Please have the following information at hand so that we can assist you as quickly and as specifically as possible.
Complete product name
Exact version number (to be found in the about box in the "About" menu item of the "Help" menu)
Encoder/Decoder name
Your user code (accessible via the "Activate via post/fax" dialog)
Problem : I have installed MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX on a new computer, installed a new hard drive in my old computer (sound card, memory...), or installed it multiple times on the same computer. My activation code is no longer accepted!
If the program cannot be activated again after it has been activated multiple
times, please contact the MAGIX customer service (view page 9).
Integrated browser
The integrated browser offers many useful functions that help you collect material for using in your project. All kinds of media can be collected – images, videos, sound or simply text can be all integrated using the built-in browser with great results.
329
Tip: You must have an Internet connection to use the full range of options offered by the integrated browser. www.magix.com
330 Integrated browser
Open browser
The integrated browser is opened by clicking on the "Internet media" button in the
Media Pool (see Media).
Navigation in the browser
One page back: Switches to the previous page.
One page forward: Switches back to the page before the "One page back" button was pressed.
Stop: Stops loading the selected page.
Reload: The current page will be reloaded.
Home: Returns to the home page.
In the address header, next to the navigation buttons, you can simply enter an
Internet address like http://www.magix.com. Press the enter button and the corresponding page will be loaded.
Loading Internet media
The buttons described here are used to collect and load media directly from the Internet into the current film. The corresponding functions can be found in the context menu of the browser.
Save selected text: The selected text will be saved. It can then be edited using the title editor. www.magix.com
Activate codecs
Start screen capture: Opens the capture dialog for starting screen capture.
Download selected images: The selected images will be saved to your computer.
Import screen capture of the opened Internet page: The loaded
Internet page will be saved as an image file.
Start audio recording: A dialog for audio recording opens.
Hint: For recording from the Internet, it is important that the sound card is selected as the sound source.
Accept media after download
This option makes sure that the downloaded media are loaded into the current movie right away.
331
Define the path for saving Internet media.
To define the path for saving Internet media, simply click on the folder symbol and navigate to the desired folder. Confirm your selection with OK.
Activate codecs
You may activate encoders/decoders for various file formats as required. The corresponding activation dialog will appear automatically when the codec is used for the first time, e g. when a DVD is burned and the MPEG-2 codec is used.
Why does it have to be "activated"?
To import (decode) or export (encode) certain video and audio formats, you will require a specific codec. MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX will ask you if you want to activate the codec as soon as you need it. The integration of decoders and encoders from third parties into programs usually costs money. These codecs are integrated via additional, voluntary activation in MAGIX programs which, according to usage and degree of prevalence, can be free or fee-based for www.magix.com
332 Activate codecs special high-quality codecs. This way, MAGIX can continue to offer you good value for your money.
Free activation of codecs
To be able to use MPEG-2, MPEG-4, Dolby ® Digital stereo import (view page
® Digital 5.1, you will have to activate the codecs for free.
Activation can be done online via telephone or via post/fax. The quickest and easiest way to order an activation code is via the Internet.
Order activation code online
Click on "Order online..." (Field 1). MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX will automatically contact the MAGIX server and load the corresponding codec.
Note : Activation of the codec checks the registration data as required.
Activation of the codec only functions if your version of the program has already been registered in your name. If you haven't registered MAGIX Movie
Edit Pro MX, then you can do this at any time.
If your computer has no Internet access, you have the following options for activation:
Order activation code in MAGIX Service Center
Use this option to conduct activation from a different computer which has
Internet access.
Order activation code via post/fax
After clicking on "Order via post/fax" (field 2), your user code will appear. This automatically assigns your personal activation code to your PC. Click on
"Continue to order form" to transfer your user code automatically to the post/fax form. Now send the completed form as a print out to the address/fax no. mentioned. Your activation code will be sent to you in just a few days via post or fax. It can also be sent by mail if an email address is stated.
Enter activation code
After receiving your personal activation code, use the export or burn function to reopen the activation dialog for the corresponding file format. Type or copy the activation code into the input field in the dialog and click on "Activate..." . www.magix.com
Activate codecs
Fee-based activation of MVC codec
MVC codec for loading some Stereo3D videos (view page 188) must be
activated for a fee.
Activation is fee-based and can be done online or via post/fax. The quickest and easiest way to order an activation code is via the Internet. Ordering the activation code takes just a few minutes via email. The order of your activation code via post/fax takes a few days.
Order activation code online
Click on "Order online..." (Field 1). The web browser will open for you to register MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX first (if you have not already done so). You will then be forwarded to a website where you can request the corresponding activation.
If your computer has no Internet access, then you have the following options for activation:
Order activation code in MAGIX Service Center
Use this option to conduct activation from a different computer which has
Internet access.
Order activation code via post/fax
After clicking on "Order via post/fax" (field 2) your user code will appear. This automatically assigns your personal activation code to your PC. Click on
"Continue to order form" to transfer your user code automatically to the post/fax form. Now send the completed form as a printout to the address/fax no. mentioned. Once payment has been processed successfully, your activation code will be sent to you in the post/via fax in just a few days.
Optionally, it can also be sent by email if an email address is stated.
Enter activation code
After receiving your personal activation code use the export or burn function to reopen the activation dialog for the corresponding file format. Type or copy the activation code into the input field in the dialog and click on "Activate..." .
333 www.magix.com
334 Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
Video Editing on the PC
Digital video processing with the PC is comparable to audio processing. The analog medium that is video must first be digitized before it can be processed by the computer.
Digital video processing functions quite similar to recording via a sound card.
The signal flow is measured in very short, regular intervals, and the values resulting from it can then be processed by the computer. The accuracy of each individual measurement results in the resolution, and the frequency of the measurements results in the frame rate. The more precise and frequent the signal is measured, the higher the quality of the digitized video, but also the higher demands on the capture performance and the required storage space.
The Windows standard format for video files is AVI (audio and video
Interleaved).
Digitizing video adopts either the camera or the graphics card, a TV card (e.g.
Miro PCTV), or a video card (e.g. Fast AV Master). However, video handling makes much higher demands upon the hardware if good image quality is required. In order to be able to reasonably process video files on today’s PCs, they must be compressed. Digital audio, on the other hand only uses compression for saving storage space.
MPEG Compression
MPEG means "Moving Picture Experts Group" and defines a workgroup which cooperates with the International Standards Organization (ISO) as well as the international Electro Technical Commission (ETC) to develop standards for video and audio coding.
Generally, the graphic data rate of the digital video standard is 167 megabits per second, which, when not compressed, requires a far higher storage capacity than a DVD can offer. A one-sided DVD 5 with 4.7 GB storage capacity is enough for 4 Minutes. For this reason, the available pictorial material must be effectively compressed – a function which is achieved with the MPEG procedure. www.magix.com
Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
This procedure is based on the simple fact that up to 96% of digital video data consists of repetition and can be compressed without visible degradation of the pictorial quality.
Each MPEG compression is, however, a data reduction and as such connected with information loss. If the video consists of very extensive details, or if the content changes very fast, then the picture may blur (dependent on the strength of the compression and the quality of the encoder).
Errors can also result from so-called compression artifacts such as small color defects or images that are too dark.
At average compression rates under 3 megabits per second it is probable that you will notice reduced quality. At rates around 6 megabit per second the degradation in quality becomes almost invisible.
335
General notes on AVI videos
The AVI format ( A udio V ideo I nterleaved) isn't actually a proper video format!
Rather, it is a so-called "container", where the conventions for transferring audio and video files to the program are only loosely defined. The codec
( co der/ dec oder) actually defines what storage format is used. A codec compresses audio/video data into its own unique format which can only be read by the codec itself and is decoded when the film is played.
In concrete terms, a computer-generated AVI file can only be loaded by and played on a different computer if the same codec is installed on it.
Many codecs (e.g. Intel Indeo ® video) have now become standard components of the Windows™ installation. Others like the popular DivX codec are not standard. If you are generating an AVI file for future play on another computer using one of these codecs, you should first install this codec on the other PC.
The best method available is to copy the codec installer to your export directory and burn it every time you create a video disc (slideshow disc) for play on computers.
You may encounter some problems when using older video editing cards with codecs which only function with the card’s hardware. Such AVIs can only be used on the computer which was used to create them. Try to avoid using this kind of codec. www.magix.com
336 Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
Overview of the different disc types
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX supports numerous disc types, and these depend on whether you want to burn a movie or slideshow and which disc type you are using (CD, DVD, or Blu-ray Disc TM ), or the type of playback device or quality required.
The table below will explain which disc types are best for different cases, the differences in quality, and how much storage space each format requires.
More detailed information, consult the chapters concerning the individual disc types.
Disc type
WMV HD
MiniDVD (view
Storage media Menu Quality Length (optimal quality)
CD/DVD
Blu-Ray disc
(view page
AVCHD (view
Multi Disc
Blu-Ray disc
DVD/Blu-ray
Disc
CD/DVD
CD
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
*** min.
*****
*****
107 min./DVD
15 min./CD
110 min.
****
***
160 min./Blu-ray Disc
45 min./DVD
7 min./CD ca. 20 minutes
* The set duration for some DVD players may be determined by this table. The amount of image material that can be put onto a CD or DVD depends on the sizes of the picture files.
You may also use the menu templates from the category "TV Showtime DVD" for the disc types MiniDVD and DVD. Each picture of a slideshow is then displayed in fullscreen on its own menu page without having to playback the slideshow.
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD)
Quality
Featuring a resolution of 720 x 576 (PAL) and encoded with MPEG-2, 25 frames per second provides very good results. www.magix.com
Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
Writable data storage formats
The recordable DVD market is currently split into three types: "DVD-RAM",
"DVD+RW", and "DVD-RW".
DVD-R/+R: This medium may only be written to once. The DVD-R may be specified with file structures for DVD video, DVD audio, or DVD-ROM.
DVD +RW: +RW drives allow re-writable DVDs to be created which may be read by almost any commercial DVD-ROM or DVD player. The companies involved are mainly Philips, Sony, HEWLETT PACKARD (as well as Ricoh,
Yamaha and Mitsubishi).
DVD-RW: This is a write/erase DVD technology promoted by Pioneer and
Sharp. This format was developed by the Pioneer company and should be compatible with existing DVD players.
DVD-RAM: DVD-RAM technology is based on either Phase Change, MOs, or hard disks, etc. and is now almost 100% incompatible with all available players.
Due to the small storage capacity and incompatibility with DVD players, setting on this standard is not recommended.
337
Note: MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX supports DVD±R and DVD±RW, but not
DVD-RAM.
Blank discs: Single-sided recordable blank discs featuring a capacity of 4.7
GB and a duration of approx. 2 hours.
Copy Protection
Macrovision (APS): The movie industry claims that even DVD-ROM drives and decoders or diagram cards with composite outputs or s-video outputs must support the Macrovision analog copy protection (APS). Only some older DVD players do not possess APS.
APS adds additional signals to a DVD’s stored graphical data. The data is almost unchanged. These supplementary signals disturb the synchronization and the automatic recording regulation of most video recorders to prevent recording of the video. They are not noticeable on the television or the monitor, however. www.magix.com
338 Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
Content Scrambling System (CSS): CSS prevents saving and duplication of
DVD video tracks to hard disk. The VOB streams of DVDs without CSS can otherwise (like other video files) be loaded via the Import Video button
There are further types of copy protection besides APS and CSS which ensure that retail DVDs cannot be copied without distortion
Blu-ray Disc™
Since early 2008, Blu-ray Discs are viewed as successors to DVDs and offer especially high storage capacity of up to 27 GB in a single layer (double-layer up to 54 GB) with very few write errors.
The term Blu-ray Disc comes from the blue color of the laser. Because a color cannot be registered as a trademark, the letter "e" was removed from the word
"blue".
The high storage capacity of the Blu-ray Disc suits high definition videos and slideshows in high quality perfectly, since these are characterized by large file sizes (depending on material approximately 40 MB/sec) and very high memory use. The MPEG-2 codec is used to create video.
Companies that were involved in developing Blu-ray technology have united themselves into the Blu-ray Disc Association (BDA).
Blu-ray Discs come in three varieties:
Only readable BD ROM (comparable to DVD video),
rewritable BD-RE (comparable to DVD±RW or DVD-RAM),
and as a disc that can be written to only once BD-R (comparable to DVD±R).
AVCHD disc
Use this format to create a high-resolution video. You can burn Blu-ray
(BD-R/RE) blanks as well as conventional DVD±R/RWs. In contrast to Blu-ray
Discs (view page 338), MPEG-4/AVC codec (view page 342) is applied as the
video format, which requires less memory at a comparable image quality.
Compatibility
AVCHD disc on Blu-ray blank: Since this is a BD-conformant format, the disc created can be played back in any conventional Blu-ray player. Playback problems can almost always be traced to incompatibilities between Blu-ray blanks and Blu-ray players. In this case, consult the instructions for your www.magix.com
Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
Blu-ray player or ask the manufacturer which blanks are compatible with the device.
AVCHD disc on DVD blank: The DVDs created with AVCHD video are not supported by all Blu-ray players. The behavior of the devices is quite different.
Normal DVD players cannot replay AVCHD discs, since the AVC format is not supported.
339
Note : To import and export AVC(HD) and MPEG-4 files, the MEPG-4 codec
must first be activated (view page 331). A dialog will open if the codec is
required.
Super Video CD (SVCD)
The Super Video CD (SVCD) is a technological advancement of the video CD.
SVCDs are also like VCD-specified CD-ROMs which can be played using either a Super Video CD player (connected to the television), or directly with the
CD-ROM drive of a computer. Many DVD players can also play SVCDs.
MPEG-2 and the increase of the data transfer rate makes it hard to tell videos from videos in DVD quality apart.
Resolution: SVCDs use the better MPEG-2 encoder in a standardized resolution of 480 x 576 (PAL). The MPEG-2 format offers a maximum resolution of up to 720 x 576 points and improved compression methods characterized by excellent image definition and homogeneity.
Hard disk capacity: An average 90-minute movie must be spread across 3
CDs. On one SVCD you can get about 30 minutes of good-quality movie.
Encoder setting: Compared to the VCD with 1.3, the data transfer rate is doubled to 2.6 Mbit/s.
MPEG-2 format introduces the so-called variable bit rate (VBR). In contrast to the constant bit rate (CBR) of the MPEG-1 encoders, this encoder has the option of using more bits for movement-intensive sections, as well as saving bits if picture content remains the same.
Video CD (VCD)
Video CDs are specific CD-ROMs for storing videos in certain forms.
Compression takes place using the MPEG-1 codec. VCDs can be played on either a video CD player attached to a television or directly via the computer's
CD-ROM drive. Most DVD players can play VCDs. www.magix.com
340 Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
Resolution: VCDs can play movies with a maximum resolution of 352 x 288 pixels (PAL) or 352 x 240 (NTSC) at 25 pictures per second. The resolution of a VHS cassette offers for instance 300 x 360 pixels. More important than the resolution is the use of a good MPEG-1 encoder. Since video images constantly change, errors cannot always be perceived by the viewer.
Hard disk capacity: A VCD can store about 70 minutes of video. A typical motion picture must therefore be stored on two VCDs. In order to get as much video data on a normal CD as possible, one must forego correction information on VCD/SVCD formats within the individual sectors (sub-ranges) of a CD. You can therefore fit 720 MB of video data on a 650 MB blank CD. Due to improved burning and scanning technology it is now possible to burn up to
985 MB video data on a 99min blank CD.
Encoder settings: Normally the video CD data is played at a data rate of 1150 kBits video and 224 kBits audio. By increasing the video bit rate to 3000kBits you can get the same resolution and an better-quality audio bit rate. Movement artifacts disappear almost completely at approx. 2000 kBits with the picture appearing a little less sharp. This pre-supposes, however, that the player can also play back such a bit rate. The fact that many DVD players can handle an increased data rate is due to well written player software.
Experiment with higher data rates: If you do not need the full running time of the VCD, then you can experiment with space to improve the quality of the video! miniDVD
The miniDVD is nothing more than the DVD data format burned onto a
CD-ROM. Thus the MPEG-2 encoder and all other specifications of the DVD data format are used, and only the data carriers are different. Because the
CD-ROM can only save about a sixth of the quantity of data a DVD can hold, the capacity of a miniDVD is accordingly limited to approx. 20 minutes of movie.
MiniDVDs are particularly suitable for playing on the computer. For stand-alone devices they must be tested on an individual basis as to whether the device can handle the DVD format on a CD-ROM.
Slideshow disc
All slideshow image and audio files will be burned onto CD or DVD, together with any effect settings and the MAGIX Media Manager CDR player program. A
MAGIX Media Manager CD is designed especially for photo projects
(slideshows). www.magix.com
Annex: Digital Video and Data Storage
The original photos are burned onto CD; Ideal for backing up valuable recordings. During playback on your PC, the highest possible picture quality is made possible. The following photo effects can be played by Media Manager.
Brightness, contrast, gamma
Cropping and rotation
Title text (without text effects)
If your project uses more effects, they won’t be visible on the Media Manager
CD. A VCD or DVD is more suitable for such projects.
The MAGIX Media Manager CDR ensures that the CD-ROM can be played back on any Windows PC regardless of the software installed. The disc will automatically begin playing the slideshow after the CD-ROM has been inserted into the drive, provided the auto-play feature is enabled on your PC. To enable the auto-play feature on your PC, select the "Auto Insert Notification" option for your CD-ROM drive from the Windows Control Panel.
If deactivated, you can also start your CD-ROM slideshow manually:
1.
Place your home-burned CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
2.
Open Explorer and click on the drive letter of the CD-ROM drive (usually
D:\).
3.
Double-click "MediaManager.exe" to start the MAGIX Media Manager CDR.
4.
In the Explorer window of MAGIX Media Manager CDR, open the slideshow playlist file ending with *.PLR and start the slideshow.
Additional information can be found in the help feature of MAGIX Media
Manager CDR (F1 key).
341
WMV HD (Windows Media High Definition Disc)
WMV WMV HD (Windows Media High Definition Disc) is a type of disc optimized for playback of slideshows on PC. The movies are converted into high-resolution Windows Media 9 format and a menu is added, like with DVDs.
You must have Windows Media Player 9 or higher installed on your PC.
Video encoding will be preset for HDTV resolution (1280 x 720, also known as
"720p"). To select different resolutions, click on the button “Encoder settings” and in “Presets” choose the following:
Standard PAL (720x576) or NTSC (720 x 480)
Standard PC resolutions (1024 x 768 or 1280 x 1024)
HDTV 720p (1280x720) or 1080i (1920x1080) www.magix.com
342 MPEG-4 encoder settings
Multi Disc
A multidisc is a combination of different disc formats on one DVD. It consists of
3 parts and offers the following advantages:
Maximum quality when played on a PC with WMV HD (Windows Media High
Definition Disc)
Fully compatible with DVD players due to a DVD part (Digital Versatile Disc)
Greatest possible safety as a data backup of the project is added (burn option
Backup disc
Use this option to compile all movies in the current disc project, including all connected media and burn them to disc.
Even larger projects can be burned straight to disc. The project, if necessary, will be split up and burned automatically to multiple discs. A restore program which is burned to the first disc of such a backup, guarantees easy re-recording of the backup.
MPEG-4 encoder settings
Behind MPEG-4, you'll find a highly complex "academic" standard that operates and is supported variably according to make.
Tip : First, check if there is a suitable preset in the export dialog for your purposes. Before changes are made in "Advanced settings", the effects and interplay of the different parameters should be familiar.
The " Advanced settings " are divided into "Video", "Audio", and "Multiplexer".
Under " Video
", there is a choice between "MPEG-4 (view page 343)" (H.263)
and "AVC/H.264 (view page 348)". Depending on the purpose of application of
the material to be exported, both of these encoder settings can be selected for compressing the video material. It is important in this case to know how the material will be played back.
Under "Audio", there is a choice between "AMR (view page 354)" and "AC
(view page 355)". The AMR format is more suitable for mobile devices that
don't necessarily require high playback quality. ACC is more flexible, on the other hand, but it is supported by fewer mobile devices. www.magix.com
MPEG-4 encoder settings
For material that is not exactly specific, encoder qualities recommend AVC image and AAC sound, since these encoders are equally suitable for all source material.
The option "Export as website" also creates an HTML page in an integrated
Flash player that can play back the video created. Read the topic "Embed
Flash videos into your own web site".
343
MPEG-4
The MPEG-4 (H.263) codec is especially useful for video material with little or only slower movements.
Generic
MPEG-4 preset
Different presets located within the encoder.
(A)SP@L0-L5 : (Advanced) Simple Profile in Level 0-5
(Q)CIF (Common Intermediate Format): CIF is a video format produced as soon as 1990 with the video compression format H.261. At that time, the format was used for video telephone conferences.
The "Q" in QCIF stands for "Quarter", and since resolution is halved in terms of height and width compared to CIF, the entire size is only a quarter of CIF.
QCIF was popular with mobile telephone manufacturers, since the resolution of
176 x 144 pixels was sensible for the first affordable SmartPhones (144 x 176).
(Half)D1: D1 corresponds with MPEG-2 DVD. HalfD1 has exactly half of the entire number of pixels, meaning that the pixel number of the height and weight is 2/3 of D1.
720p: Video stream with a resolution of 1280 x 720p (progressive).
Apple iPod : Apple iPod-compatible stream.
Sony PSP : Sony PSP-compatibler stream.
Profile/Level
So that profile and level are conformant with the other settings, pay attention to the minimum and maximum values in the following tables. www.magix.com
344 MPEG-4 encoder settings
Note!
In case the settings are not included in this information, problems playing back the encoded videos can lead to problems.
Table 1: The levels of the MPEG-4 simple profile (SP)
Level Typical visual session size
Max. numbe r of objects
L0 QCIF 1
L1 QCIF 4
L2 CIF 4
L3 CIF 4
Maximum number objects per type
1 x simple
4 x simple
4 x simple
4 x simple
Max. unique quant. tables
1
1
1
1
Max. VMV buffer size
(MB)
198
198
792
792
Continuation of table 1
Level Max.
VCV buffer size (MB)
VCV decode r rate
(MB/s)
Max. total
VBV buffer size
(units of
16384 bits)
Max. VOL
VBV buffer size
(units of
16384 bits)
Max. video packet length
(bits)
Max. bitrate
(kbit/s)
Table 2: The levels of the MPEG-4 advanced simple profile
(ASP)
Level Typical visual session size
Max. numbe r of objects
Max. number per type
Max. uniqu e quant. tables
Max.
VMV buffe r size
(MB)
Max.
VCV buffe r size
(MB)
VCV decoder rate
(MB/s)
L0 176x144 1
L1
L2
L3
176x144 4
352x288 4
352x288 4
1x AS or simple
4x AS or simple
4x AS or simple
4x AS or simple www.magix.com
L4 352x576 4
L5 720x576 4
MPEG-4 encoder settings
4x AS or simple
4x AS or simple
1 4860 1620 48600
Continuation of table 2
Level Max. Max total percentage VBV of intra
MBs with
AC prediction in VCV buffer buffer size
(units of
16384 bit s)
Max. VOL
VBV buffer size
(units of
16384 bit s)
Max. video packet length
(bits)
Max. bitrate
(kbit/s)
345
L5 25 112 112 16384
Picture type
"Picture type" specifies which parts of a frame should be used as the basis for the encoding:
Frame : A frame is a single image from a video sequence, also called a full image.
Field : A half-image, two of which combine to produce a frame. Read more
about this explanation regarding "Interlace (view page 366)".
Field order
Note : This parameter is only available if the setting "Field" is selected for
"Picture type".
In case of interlaced streams, the half-image sequence is set. Read more
about this explanation regarding "Interlace (view page 366)".
www.magix.com
346
Pulldown
MPEG-4 encoder settings
Note : This parameter is only available if the setting "Frame" or "MBAFF" (only for AVC/H.264)" is selected for "Picture type".
In normal cases, an image playback rate of 24 (or 23.976) frames per second is use; the NTSC system however requires 30 (or 29.97) frames/s, and there is a special algorithm for converting the video's frame rate. For compilations or test purposes, switch this option to "No". In normal cases, the setting can be set to "Auto".
Slice count
A frame can be divided into multiple slices for encoding. Specify the maximum number of slices are permitted. If set to "0", then the number will be determined automatically.
Bit rate control
The bit rate indicates how much data per second is saved in the video
(playback speed). This makes the bit rate the deciding parameter for the video to be encoded.
Mode
Constant bit rate : The constant bit rate should only be used if the device used to play the video supports constant bit rates.
Variable bit rate : The bit rate varies. For faster movements in the video, the bit rate increases, and for still images or slow pans, a lower bit rate is sufficient for creating the video in constant quality.
Constant quality : Similar to the "Variable bit rate" mode, the bit rate varies according to the video material. The quality depends on the selected profile and can be changed.
Constant quantizer : In this mode, a fixed colour quantization is used for the macro blocks. Under Advanced settings, a value between 1 and 32 can be set
independent of the respective frame (I-Frame (view page 366), P-Frame, or
B-Frame (view page 367)). The higher the value, the stronger the quantization:
small values produce qualitatively high-quality images and the data rate increases, and larger values produce a reduction in data, but the quality suffers. www.magix.com
MPEG-4 encoder settings
Bit rate (Bits/s)
In " Constant bit rate " mode: Exactly those values entered are applied to be able to calculate the size of the video precisely.
In " Variable bit rate " mode: The values entered here are applied to the video as an average as a guideline. The size of the video to be exported can only be approximated.
Max. rate
This is the maximum bit rate that should be present in the video stream, i.e. maximum number of bits that may be transferred to the decoder.
347
Note : This option is only available in "Variable bit rate" mode.
VBV buf. size
VBV is the abbreviation for " V ideo rate b uffer verifier d efinition" and the size of the buffer (storage area) that is applied to the encoding.
The larger the buffer is, the better the results will be, but the processing will also take much longer. The smaller the buffer is, the more parallel processing can take place at the same time in RAM.
Pixel aspect ratio
Specifies the page ratio of the individual image points (pixels).
Meaning : Different television norms and the standard pixel ratio. Select a setting and the results are displayed as "X" and "Y".
X/Y : The actual pixel ratio. If under "Meaning" the setting "Custom" is selected, then a custom ratio can be set.
GOP structure
Max key interval
Determines the maximum GOP (view page 365) length. High values mean
improved compression. Lower values create stronger security protection and enable improved access to individual frames for processing the video.
B-frames count
The number of B-Frames (view page 367). Several applications, e.g. video
conferences, require a setting of "0" for this, i.e. no B-Frames, in order to enable the shortest possible reaction times for transfer. www.magix.com
348 MPEG-4 encoder settings
Scene change detection
If this option is activated the scenes will be detected during encoding, thus
allowing you to insert an I frame (view page 366) after a scene change.
Input info
Information about the incoming video stream is displayed here during live recordings.
Statistics
Information about the encoder activity is displayed here during live recordings.
MPEG-4 H.264
The MPEG-4 H.264/AVC codec is suitable for all types of material; however, it requires relatively higher CPU power for later decoding.
In the advanced encoder settings of the AVC encoder the "Generic" options in
"Main Settings" are mainly interesting.
The AVC preset and video format can be adjusted here. For instance, if DVD quality is desired you should select "DVD". The video format should be selected specific to the country so that the material can be played on the devices most commonly available in these countries. For instance, you should select PAL for Germany, SECAM for France and NTSC for the US.
2-pass: The video to be exported will be encoded twice. The first run-through serves to calculate the streaming rate for each section (for video this is per frame). The second run-through is when the actual video is created with the streaming rates that were calculated in the first run-through. The result is a clearly improved image quality, but encoding takes place approximately twice as long.
Generic
AVC preset
This is where the actual video stream that will be exported is selected.
Baseline : According to ISO/ICE 11172-1/2 standard
CIF : Corresponds with MPEG-1 VideoCD
Main : Corresponds with ISO/ICE 13818-1/2 standard
SVCD : Corresponds with MPEG-2 Super VideoCD www.magix.com
MPEG-4 encoder settings
D1 : Corresponds with MPEG-2 DVD
High : HIGH profile 1920x1080i
DVD : DVD video
HD DVD : HD DVD video
Blu-ray : Blu-ray Disc
Blu-ray HD : Blu-ray Disc in high definition
Sony PSP : Sony PSP-compatible format
HD 1280 x 720p : High profile with a resolution 1280x720p (progressive)
HD 1440 x 1080i : High profile with a resolution of 1440 x 1080i (interlaced)
Apple iPod : Apple iPod-compatible stream.
Video format
Specifies where the video to be exported should be. The encoder optimizes video material for the selected mode of playback.
Auto : The format from the MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX project.
PAL : P hase A lternating L ine, or PAL , is a process for color transmission for analog TV that is primarily used in Europe, but also in Australia, South America, and many African and Asian countries.
The image repetition rate for PAL is 25 Hz.
NTSC : NTSC stands for " N ational T elevision S ystems C ommittee". This is a US institution that defined the first color carrier system for TV which is now used in most of America and some East Asian countries.
The image repetition rate for NTSC is 29.97 Hz.
SECAM : SECAM is a TV norm in France and eastern Europe for transferring analog color video signal.
MAC : The MAC process ( M ultiplexed A nalogue C omponents) involves TV norms developed for satellite TV. They have also been developed for an HDTV standard (HD-MAC).
Unspecified : This setting does not make any special optimization.
349
Tip : The best results are achieved with the setting "Auto", since this automatically uses the project settings as a basis by MAGIX Movie Edit Pro
MX.
Profiles
Defines which profile is applied in the AVC/H.264 stream.
Baseline profile : The basis of applications with limited computing performance, especially for video conferences or videos on mobile telephones. www.magix.com
350 MPEG-4 encoder settings
Main profile : This profile was originally intended for the broadcast industry and for backup purposes. The process has however retreated somewhat from use, since "High Profile" has been developed for these purposes.
High profile : This profile is used for broadcast and backup applications, and it is also used sometimes in the HDTV industry ( H igh D efinition T ele v ision). For example, this profile for HD-DVD and Blu-ray Discs.
Level
H.264 defines different levels. The higher the level, the larger the video's bit rate. In this table, you can see the maximum permitted values for the respective level in relation to the selected profile.
Level Max.
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
2
2.1 19800
2.2 20250
3
4.1
4.2
5.1 macro blocks per seconds
1485
3000
6000
11880
11880
40500
245760
522240
983040
Max. image size in macro blocks
99
396
396
396
396
792
1620
1620
3.1 108000 3600
3.2 216000 5120
4 245760 8192
8192
8704
36864
Max. video bit rate
(VCL) for baseline and main profile
64
192
384
768
Max. video bit rate (VCL) for high profile
80
240
480
960
Examples
(Resolution / image rate in Hz)
128 x 96/30.9
176 x 144/30.3
320 x 240/10
320 x 240/36
2 Mbit/s
4 Mbit/s
2.5 Mbit/s 320 x 240/36
5 Mbit/s 352 x 480/30
4 Mbit/s 5 Mbit/s 352 x 576/25.6
10 Mbit/s 12.5 Mbit/s 720 x 480/30
14 Mbit/s 17.5 Mbit/s 1280 x 720/30
20 Mbit/s 25 Mbit/s 1280 x 1024/42.2
20 Mbit/s 25 Mbit/s 1920 x 1080/30.1
2048 x 1024/30
50 Mbit/s 62.5 Mbit/s 1920 x 1080/30.1
2048 x 1024/30
50 Mbit/s 62.5 Mbit/s 1920 x 1080/64
2048 x 1024/60
Mbit/s
1920*1080/72.3
2048 x 1080/67.8
2560 x 1920/30.7
240 Mbit/s 300 Mbit/s 1920 x
1080/120.5
4096 x 2048/30
The setting "Level auto" specifies the encoder levels automatically, among other things for the resolution of the video format specified under "AVC preset" www.magix.com
MPEG-4 encoder settings and the set profile bit rate. If a level is manually set in this case, then other parameter values may not exceed the permitted maximum values.
Picture type
"Picture type" specifies which parts of a frame should be used as the basis for the encoding:
Frame : A frame is a single image from a video sequence, also called a full image.
Field : A half-image, two of which combine to produce a frame. Read more
about this explanation regarding "Interlace (view page 366)".
MBAFF (macro block adaptive frame field) : A macro block consists of 16 x
16 pixels. The encoder creates a "frame field" on this basis for encoding.
Field order
Note : This parameter is only available if the setting "Field" is selected for
"Picture type".
351
In case of interlaced streams, the half-image sequence is set. Read more
about this explanation regarding "Interlace (view page 366)".
Pulldown
Note : This parameter is only available if the setting "Frame" or "MBAFF" (only for AVC/H.264)" is selected for "Picture type".
In normal cases, an image playback rate of 24 (or 23.976) frames per second is use; the NTSC system however requires 30 (or 29.97) frames/s, and there is a special algorithm for converting the video's frame rate. For compilations or test purposes, switch this option to "No". In normal cases, the setting can be set to "Auto".
Slice count
A frame can be divided into multiple slices for encoding. Specify the maximum number of slices are permitted. If set to "0", then the number will be determined automatically.
Bit rate control
The bit rate indicates how much data per second is saved in the video
(playback speed). This makes the bit rate the deciding parameter for the video to be encoded. www.magix.com
352 MPEG-4 encoder settings
Mode
Constant bit rate : The constant bit rate should only be used if the device used to play the video supports constant bit rates.
Constant quantizer:
Variable bit rate : The bit rate varies. For faster movements in the video, the bit rate increases, and for still images or slow pans, a lower bit rate is sufficient for creating the video in constant quality.
Pass
Single pass : The encoder process takes place without prior analysis. This requires the least amount of time, however quality suffers.
Multi-pass analysis : The first encoding is carried out at the same time as the analysis for the second encoding is calculated.
Multi-pass encode : The first encoding is carried out at the same time as the analysis for the second encoding is calculated and updated. This produces the best results, but the process requires the most time.
Bit rate (Bits/s)
In " Constant bit rate " mode: Exactly those values entered are applied to be able to calculate the size of the video precisely.
In " Variable bit rate " mode: The values entered here are applied to the video as an average as a guideline. The size of the video to be exported can only be approximated.
HSS rate
This is the maximum bit rate that should be present in the video stream, i.e. maximum number of bits that may be transferred to the decoder.
Note : This option is only available in "Variable bit rate" mode.
CPB size
This sets the size of the "coded picture buffer“ in bits. This is the buffer where the encoding is carried out. The larger the buffer is, the better the results will be, but the processing will also take much longer.
Init delay (90 kHz)
Image and sound offset is compensated as per the source material. www.magix.com
MPEG-4 encoder settings
Tip : Detects asynchronicity that should be compensated directly in MAGIX
Movie Edit Pro MX.
Dest delay (90 kHz)
Certain mobile playback devices create an offset of image and sound during playback, even if material is exactly synchronous. This option ensures that the device offsets the image for the value entered to counteract asynchronicity.
Example of calculation
Suppose a device creates an offset of 13 ms, then the following calculation must be made:
353
Note : Only positive offsets are compensated, i.e. image comes after the matching sound.
Aspect ratio
In the film industry, this is an indication of the ratio between width and height of a rectangle, monitor, or screen.
There are 3 different sizes available:
Picture Aspect Ratio (also D isplay A spect R atio, DAR ) : This indicates the desired aspect ratio of the video to be exported. Here are some examples of typical aspect ratios: at home 4:3 , 16:9 (typical for TV sets) or 16:10
(widescreen-flatscreens, widescreen notebooks), 3:2 for 35mm films and photos. In cinemas you mostly find 1.85:1 .
Pixel Aspect Ratio (PAR, pixel aspect ratio : Indicates the aspect ratio of individual pixels. The majority of computer monitors have quadratic pixels
(PAR= 1:1 ), for analog television monitors (PAL at 4:3) 128:117 .
Sample Aspect Ratio (SAR, also Storage Aspect Ratio) : Aspect ratio of the saved resolution (number of pixels), e.g. 720:576 at PAL. It also calculates picture aspect ratio and pixel aspect ratio: SAR = DAR / PAR . www.magix.com
354 MPEG-4 encoder settings
Note : In the standard case, the "Aspect ratio" remains set the way it is. You should only change the settings if the resulting video is exported distorted or stretched or if you need to correct the video because it is in the wrong aspect ratio.
GOP structure
Max GOP length
Determines the maximum GOP (view page 365) length. High values mean
improved compression. Lower values create stronger security protection and enable improved access to individual frames for processing the video.
Max b-frames count
The maximum number of b-frames (view page 367). Several cases of
application, e.g. video conferences require "no b-frames" in order to achieve the shortest possible reaction times during transfer.
Scene change detection
If this option is activated the scenes will be detected during encoding, thus
allowing you to insert an I frame (view page 366) after a scene change.
Input info
Information about the incoming video stream is displayed here during live recordings.
Statistics
Information about the encoder activity is displayed here during live recordings.
AMR
AMR involves a parametric codec with different data rates between 4.75 and
12.2 kbit/s. The 12.2-kbit/s setting roughly corresponds with the GSM-EFR codec in terms of algorithm and audio quality.
This audio format is used by mobile telephones for transferring the conversation and is optimized for encoding conversation (voices). Low bit rates provide compensation for mobile phones in case of transfer errors, i.e. bad reception. Depending on the signal strength, the compression increases or decreases to enable the best possible quality for a conversation. The AMR www.magix.com
MPEG-4 encoder settings sound, on the other hand, encodes a fixed sample rate of 8,000 Hz compared to AAC sound.
The advanced AMR audio menu includes the following settings options:
The bit rate can be set between 4.75 and 12.2kbit/s. The higher the bit rate, the greater the file size and the higher level of audio quality. The standard settings provide a bit rate of 7.4 kbit/s. The highest bit rate for this format is more suited for transferring conversations.
355
AAC
The AAC audio was developed by MPEG, the Moving Picture Experts Group
(Dolby, Fraunhofer Institut für Integrierte Schaltungen in Erlangen, AT&T, Nokia,
Sony) as an audio data compression process, that was specified as a further development of MPEG-2 Multichannel in the MPEG-2 standard.
It's also a further development of MPEG-2 audio. This format is equally suitable for encoding general audio information and not especially optimized for certain types of audio material. As with video material, the audio format should be considered for playback later.
AAC audio can be encoded with a sample rate of 8,000, 16,000, 24,000,
32,000 or 48,000 Hz and in mono and stereo sound, respectively. By default, the sound is set to 48,000 Hz stereo. The higher the sample rate is, the larger the resulting file and higher the audio quality.
The advanced AAC audio menu includes the following settings options:
The bit rate can be set between 6 and 512 kbit/s. 160 kbits/s is active by default. The higher the value is, the larger the resulting file and higher the audio quality. After a certain limit, additional improvements to audio quality will not be perceived. Bit rates under 64 kb/s are not recommended.
As an MPEG version , set MPEG-4 or the older, proven MPEG-2 format.
For the File Header Type , choose either RAW or ADTS. The "Header" indicates an explanatory head for the beginning of the file segment, which in fact takes up extra space, but is required for decoding under circumstances.
RAW indicates material which does not include a file header in audio format. The audio material is therefore transferred directly without any special additional information (raw).
This requires that decoding routines are able to process the material without the explanatory file header. Especially in case "exotic" sample rates are set, this can lead to problems during RAW encoding. www.magix.com
356 MPEG-4 encoder settings
ADTS indicates a file header type which contains information for encoded audio material. In case of doubt, select this file header type, since fewer problems can be expected in this case.
Object type : This provides selection between "Main" and "Low complexity".
Low complexity : Data is present in a form that hinders different decoding algorithms (noise replacement), but enables others (temporal adjustment noise formation).
Main : This sets other focuses in the encoding, and other decoder algorithms can be used.
Note : For example, Apple iPod requires "low complexity encoding". However, you don't need to worry if you select the right preset for Apple iPod in the export dialog.
Multiplexer
The multiplexer is a component of the encoder which combines audio and video streams.
Output format
MPEG-4 file : This is an MPEG standard (ISO/IEC-14496) with the original goal of supporting devices with less computing performance. Currently, MPEG-4 has reached a wide bandwidth of application, from HD video to support for mobile telephones.
JPEG2000 file: DCI ( D igital C inema I nitiative) has been replaced by the
JPEG2000 format for encoding movies. The current distribution and presentation of films has been taken over by digital projectors that play back high-resolution Mj2 streams in outstanding image and sound quality.
3GPP file : A standard supported by plenty GSM and UMTS mobile telephones.
3GPP is very similar to the MPEG-4 standard, but also supports formats that are not permitted by MPEG-4.
ISMA compatible
The " I nternet S treaming M edia A lliance" combines video codec standards (e.g.
MPEG) and continuous transfer within computer networks (e.g. RTP R eal-time
T ransport P rotocol) to ensure that videos available online can be correctly transferred and played back. www.magix.com
MPEG-4 encoder settings
Note : This option can only be activated, if under "Format“ the entry "MPEG-4 file" has been selected.
For Sony PSP
Switch on this option if the video should be played back with the Sony PSP.
Note : This option can only be activated, if under "Format“ the entry "MPEG-4 file" has been selected.
For iPod
Switch on this option, if the video should be played back with the Apple iPod.
Note : This option can only be activated, if under "Format“ the entry "MPEG-4 file" has been selected.
Live mode (get times from samples)
This option is only important for live transfers and is therefore not required in
MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX.
357 www.magix.com
358 Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings
Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings
General settings
MPEG type: Set the output type of the created MPEG file. You can adjust the encoder settings freely (to export your video in the corresponding format, for instance) for further use in other programs or on your own website.
If you open the encoder from a burn dialog, or intend to use the exported material for VCDs, SVCDs or DVDs, then select the corresponding option. This will adjust the settings of the encoder according to the standards required for the corresponding discs to be played in a compatible player.
Video format: Automatically specifies the video format, aspect ratio, and frame
rate (see video settings (view page 359)). You can choose between PAL or
NTSC.
Interlace mode: The movie is encoded interlaced (i.e. in two half-screens, so-called fields). This is essential for later playback on TV screens. If you want to view the exported movie on your PC only and like a "cinemascope" view, you can also encode by frame (progressively). Some video projectors also support playback of progressively encoded image material. See Interlace (view
Bit rate: The bit rate determines the memory requirement by the completed video. The amount of data available can be used differently for different display modes. 20 MB can be 4 seconds of DVD video, or 5 minutes of Internet streaming at the thumbnail size. The quality of an MPEG video is measured by the width of the created data stream, i.e. the bit rate. This is the amount of transmitted data per time unit and is indicated in kBit/s or bit per second.
Quality: Determines the quality of the encoding process, or the quality of the
movement (view page 363) to be more precise. The higher the quality, the
better the finished video will look, but encoding will take considerably longer.
The preset value "10" is a good compromise between speed and quality.
Smart Rendering: Smart Rendering can considerably reduce the encoding/processing strain of MPEG files. The production of MPEG files re-encodes only those parts of the movie that were changed in the program
(e.g. by video cleaning or effects). Please note: The MPEG files contained in the movie must have the same format, i.e. the bit rates (variable or constant), audio formats, image resolutions, and video formats must match. www.magix.com
Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings
Quick, GOP-precise copying: This special Smart Rendering mode enables
MPEG material to be transferred without having to encode it for the target medium, thereby greatly increasing the encoding speed. The video material cannot appear to have been altered in any way; only hard cuts (without fades) are permitted. These won't be executed precisely to the frame, but will rather take place at the next GOP borders. For this reason, cuts should be set somewhat more generously.
To burn DVDs in original 5.1 Surround Sound (Dolby Digital Audio) without having to re-encode, this option has to be activated.
Allows you to rip the necessary settings from an existing MPEG file. This can be useful if you want to merge MPEG files together without re-rendering via
Smart Rendering.
359
Video settings
Frame rate: PAL requires 25 frames/sec, NTSC 29.97 frames/sec. Please note: encoding NTSC material as PAL or vice versa may be possible; however, it will result in jittery images.
Aspect ratio: Lets you set the image side or pixel ratio. With MPEG 2 the image format is displayed as image ratio; correspondingly there is 1:1 (square screen, not recommended), 4:3 (regular video) an 2.21:1 (cinemascope). This applies irrespectively of the selected video format.
With MPEG 1 the pixel format is specified instead. There is 1:1, CIR601
(corresponds to regular video) for 625 lines = PAL and 525 lines = NTSC and the same in 16:9. When selecting the output format Video CD the pixel format is automatically adjusted to the selected video format. Use with caution, even if you only want to export MPEG 1.
The option Auto is set as default. Here you can adjust the Movie settings (view
Resolution: Width and height of the video corresponds with the settings in the export dialog.
GOP structure:
Here you can change the settings of the GOP (view page 365)
sequence, i.e. the number of P frames per I frame within a GOP. Please note that the total length of the GOP must not exceed 15 frames, which corresponds to the default setting (1 I frame + 4 P frames + 5*2 B frames = 15 frames). www.magix.com
360 Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings
However, you can reduce the length of the GOP sequence (while compromising the image quality at the same bit rate). This speeds up the encoding process considerably as the motion estimation while encoding P and
B frames requires high CPU performance. The speed of decoding, i.e. playback, is also increased.
If I frame is set to 1, each frame is an I frame. If the value is set larger, the setting describes the total length of the GOP.
Auto GOP: Closed GOPs do not contain relations to frames from subsequent
GOPs. MPEGs where all GOPs are closed, make MPEG editing easier as the I frames only can be edited alone if the GOP is closed. Auto GOP closes GOPs at scene changes, whereby two different and complex procedures ("fast" and
"VSCD") are used.
Bit rate mode
In "constant bit rate" mode a bit rate that constantly remains the same is used.
This option should be used for Video CDs, as it is only required here. With a constant bit rate the full power of MPEG compression can not be used properly as bandwidth for non-moving scenes is lost.
"Variable bit rate" mode attempts to adjust the available storage space to the requirements of the video you want to encode. The actual bit rate fluctuates around a mean value. During calm sections of the video it may drop to a minimum value, if there are movements in the scene it may rise to the maximum value. There are two different regulation processes (mode 1 and mode 128).
Advanced video settings
MPEG profile and level: The MPEG-2 standard defines so-called "profiles" and
"levels". For creating SVCDs and DVDs you can use "Main profile and Main level". The high profile adds additional properties to the data stream like the option to display an image at a reduced resolution for restricted transmission quality (SNR-scalable profile), or locally scaled, for instance an HDTV data stream on a standard TV set. The 4:2:2 profile is used if the image data is to be encoded for alternative chroma scanning. However, these profiles are supported by very few encoders, and mainly only for professional use.
These levels define the restrictions to the image resolution and the maximum data rate. Low level can only reach a reduced resolution (352x2888 = CIF); high level, or High 1440, enables encoding in HDTV format.
Estimate movement: These parameters are controlled via the quality controller
(see General Settings). www.magix.com
Other
Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings
Noise sensitivity: This factor defines how sensitive the encoder will react to noise in the source material. If the source material only contains a little noise
(digital recordings, computer animations, or material already de-noised by video cleaning), then you don't have to change the default value 4, or you can even reduce to increase the quality further. However, if you want to encode noisy material, then too low of a factor will considerably increase the encoding time at the cost of quality. For an unedited analog video you can increase the factor to 8-14.
Noise reduction (click on noise sensitivity): A noise filter is used with adjustable settings from 1-31.
Advanced parameters
Additional expert settings are available in the tree to the right of the window.
These should only be changed by experienced users. They have been optimized for general applications to such an extent that changes are only necessary in exceptional cases.
361
Audio settings
Audio Type: You can use MPEG -1/-2, PCM (WAV), or Dolby ® Digital. You can also select "No audio" in the export dialog.
Sample rate: You can set a sample rate of 32, 44.1 or 48 kHz for the audio track. VCDs and SVCDs require 44.1 kHz, DVDs require 48 kHz. To reduce the size of audio data it is recommended to lower the bit rate instead of the sample rate.
Mode: You can use mono, stereo, joint stereo, or dual channel. If audio type
"Dolby
® Digital" is used, then "5.1 Surround" mode may also be selected.
Dual channel enables encoding of two mono tracks (e.g. different language sound tracks) that can be switched during playback.
Joint stereo is an optimized stereo encoder which takes advantage of the fact that the signal of both stereo channels is largely identical. Use joint stereo if you can only use small audio bit rates, but still require a stereo signal.
5.1 Surround is available only for surround projects for burning DVDs. During this process, all 6 surround channels in the audio stream are encoded. www.magix.com
362 Appendix: MPEG Encoder Settings
Note! For Surround projects "Dolby Digital" should be selected under "Audio type", and "5.1 Surround" under "Mode".
Bit rate: Here you can set the audio signal bit rate. The higher the bit rate, the better the playback quality. VCD requires 224 kBit/s, and for SVCDs and DVDs select a value between 384 kBit/s and 448 kBit/s.
Dolby® Digital Details
Hint: These functions are available only in the "5.1 Surround" mode.
Dialog normalization: Set the dB level of spoken dialog. This value will be used to adjust the total volume of DVD movies and different programs that can be received by the DVB. To do this, you must first measure the volume of spoken dialogs in your movies. The values 1-31 correspond to volume levels of -1 to
-31 dB.
Hint: Use the mixer's peakmeter to set the volume level. This process produces only approximate results, because the exact measurement requires a mean value and this cannot be easily measured with MAGIX Movie Edit Pro
MX.
The displayed value serves also as a reference value for "Dynamic Range
Control". Some areas are softer so that speech can be made louder, and louder areas will be made softer to avoid overmodulations.
Background: Action-filled movies have larger volume differences between spoken dialogs and loud scenes (during explosions, for example). Because of this dialogs are softer than in quieter films which can be modulated higher.
Surround mix level / Center mix level: These settings lead to an additional damping of the surround channels and the central channel. Usually both settings are set to -3 dB.
LFE channel: Switch off the LFE channel ( L ow F requency E ffect), e.g. if you want to eliminate undesirable rumbling sounds in the low frequency range.
Normally, you should leave this option activated.
LFE filter: The LFE filter is a low pass filter, which lets through only the lowest frequencies. If you are dubbing a project in Samplitude/Sequoia, and have applied the LFE filter, you can switch off this function here, since this filtering has already been accomplished. www.magix.com
MPEG glossary
MPEG glossary
Motion estimation
Motion estimation is a further element for reducing data used in MPEG encoding. Motion estimation also occurs in the B and P frames. The image
difference that still exist after prediction (view page 368) are examined.
Complex algorithms are used to search for an original occurrence of the macro block in the reference frame of each macro block of the P or B frame (these are units of 2x2 blocks specially combined for this purpose), which have been moved either by movement or by camera pan. They can then be left out in the
P and B frame. Only the information by how far and to where the macro block has been moved is saved instead. This vector is called the motion detector.
In the General encoder settings (view page 358), you can specify the quality of
the final MPEG video. This factor also influences the time required for encoding. The longer it takes, the better the quality.
Bit rate
MPEG is a format used for storage and transferring. With older formats (e.g.
AVI) you could predict that 20 seconds of movie would result in 20 MB of data.
The file size is this a direct measurement of quality.
This is different for MPEG: The amount of data available can be used differently for different display modes. 20 MB can be 4 seconds of DVD Video or 5 minutes Internet streaming in thumbnail format. The quality of an MPEG video is measured by the width of the created data stream, the bit rate. This is the amount of the transmitted data per time unit; it is stated in kBit/s or bit per second.
Bits, not bytes are used, since the data word width has to address the transmission restrictions.
The file size can be calculated from the average bit rate, if its length is known:
F = (BRV + BRA) * t
F=File size BRV=
Video bit rate
BRA=
Audio bit rate t=Length in s www.magix.com
363
364 MPEG glossary
Block
For almost all image file editing techniques the image is subdivided into 8 x 8 pixel blocks (image points). This should be noted if you would like to used user-defined image resolutions (width/height), and they should always be a multiple of 8.
Chroma format
The color value of each image point consists of the color values for the primary colors red, green, and blue (RGB), and for traditional and technical reasons it is transformed into one brightness value (Y = 0.299*R = 0.587*G + 0.114*B) and two color difference values (U = R - Y, V = G -Y).
The Y value alone produces the black and white picture. These signal components allow brightness and color information to be handled separately.
The first data reduction occurs when single rows comprising a picture are read. Because the human eye has a lower color resolution than a brightness resolution, the color components are recorded only for every other point of a row (4:2:2) for each four pixels grouped (4:1:0), i.e. color signal under-reading.
4:2:2 This corresponds to the established TV standard. One piece of color information is transmitted per row for two pixels which corresponds to a 2/3 compression of the output data.
4:1:0 This is the color coding used for DVDs and most other consumer video applications. For each 4 pixels grouped together on two rows, one unit of color information is saved. This corresponds to a output data compression of 1/2.
Field
A half-image, i.e. two halves which combine to produce a frame (see
de-interlacing (view page 366)).
www.magix.com
MPEG glossary
Frame
A frame is a single image from a video sequence which also called a full image.
PAL video, for example, contains 25 frames per second, NTSC 29.97 frames.
Video recordings, with the exception of computer animations and still frames, don't contain full images. Instead, they have double numbers of half-images
(fields) which are transmitted in an interlaced state. However, we still refer to frames, since many predecessors of MPEG compression are based on such frames. Video editing literature usually refers to frames.
365
GOP
G roup o f P ictures: The sequence of I frames and the P and B frames that belong to them. e.g. I B B P B B P B B I ...
(This GOP has a length of 9, with 2 P frames and 2 B frames)
I frames contain the entire image information of a frame, while P and B have
part of the information. So-called prediction (view page 368) and movement
approximation are methods used for reduction.
The combination P B B is called a subgroup.
I frames must appear in regular intervals in the data stream for image and sound to be synchronized. Between the I frames only a limited count of P and
B frames is allowed. This explains a few things: Since P and B frames contain only differential information, these differences will be larger with time, since more and more changes takes place from frame to frame. A large count does not make much sense, since GOP has a maximum length of 15 (4P, 2B) in PAL and 18 (5P, 2B) in NTSC. (More than 2 B frames between P frames is not allowed).
In a closed GOP , B frames of the last subgroup may contain only backward predictions or references to the preceding P frame, but no references to the following I frame, since it belongs to the next GOP. www.magix.com
366 MPEG glossary
I frames
Intra-frames: In these pictures, the entire image information of a frame is saved and only information from this frame is used ("intra-frame encoded"). In contrast to the I frame, P and B frames save only the differences between the current frame, and preceding and/or following frame are also found in MPEG video (P frame = "predicted frame", B frame = "bidirectional frame", see
Interlace
For historical reasons, pictures in a movie are always recorded and transmitted in the form of two fields; first the lines with even numbers and then those with odd numbers. These fields are alternatively displayed with double the frame rate. The (lazy) eye of the viewer or the processing of the TV tube puts the two frames together to form one.
The output image First field Second field
You normally don’t have to worry about field processing. The video material goes through the entire processing chain as fields and is exported again as fields or burned onto DVD or shown on TV when played back on a DVD as a full picture. Only in certain rare conditions is it necessary to go deeper into this process. Two problems can occur:
1. Interlace artifacts
To be displayed on a computer monitor (during recording, in your TV/VCR, and in the arranger during editing), the two fields must be combined to form a full screen.
These two fields are not the same, since two fields are created during the recording between which a 1/50 of a second gap is evident. Moving objects can therefore produce artifacts on vertical edges. www.magix.com
MPEG glossary 367
Typical interlacing errors
You can use so-called de-interlacing to avoid this type of artifact.
De-interlacing places a picture in between the two fields (interpolated). If you want to create stationary pictures from movies, then you should definitely use a de-interlace filter.
In the system settings ("File" menu -> Program settings (More information can
be found in the section "Folders" on page 63)) you can set the preview monitor
display to use hardware de-interlacing during video recordings for the video recorder and for display in the arranger.
2. Incorrect field rate
If you move around the series of fields in a movie data stream, then you will see strong jitter and flicker effects. Picture objects move in a backward movement – two steps forwards, one back – since a delayed field is shown before the previous one. This can happen in the processing chain if you export video material improperly with the wrong field order and then import it into different material. We use MXV or MPEG "Top field first" format for all analog recordings ("odd" in other programs).
DV-AVI on the other hand is saved with “Bottom Field First”.
You can correct the field series for each video object in its object settings. See:
"Menu -> Effects -> Object properties"
P frames and B frames
P frames save only the difference between the current picture and the preceding I frame. The "P" comes from the term "prediction" which describes this process.
B frames save the differences between the current picture and the I or P frame preceding and following. This includes the information that was the same before and remained the same after the current frame. Both directions are analyzed (indicates the "B" in the name, i.e. "bidirectional-predicted"). You can
read more under prediction (view page 368).
www.magix.com
368 MPEG glossary
Prediction
Prediction is a method of data reduction used by the MPEG format. The image elements already known from the previous or following frames are removed from the data stream.
How does it work?
The encoder has a precisely defined GOP, for example IBBPBBPBB. This sequence is transmitted together with the encoder, which always knows exactly which kind of frame comes next. I, P, and B frames are differentiated.
Hint: When we talk about pictures, we mean frames of the video output, and I,
P an dB frames are the frames of the encoded video. Just as in movement approximation, blocks (8x8 pixels) are united into macroblocks (16x16 pixels) during prediction.
The first frame is always the I frame. It is completely encoded from the first picture. Afterwards, the 4th picture is analyzed for the creation of the first P frame. (As already said, the encoder, and later the decoder, will know that two
B frames belong between them.) This image will also be completely encoded, and afterwards all macroblocks that haven't changed in comparison to the I frame will be deleted. They will be replaced by corresponding references for the decoder that tell it "you already know what should be shown here, and you can get it from the last I frame".
Now, the 2nd will be completely encoded, and all macroblocks identical to the first I frame and the following P frame will be removed. References to previous frames are called backward predictions , and references to following frames are called forward predictions . The third picture will be edited in exactly the same fashion.
The fourth picture we have already explained, and now we need the next P frame, or picture number 7. Pictures 5 and 6 are B frames again, which are compared to P frames to both sides of them (picture 4 and 7); these are followed by the last two B frames. These have a special place, since in closed
GOPs, they may contain only backward predictions, and no references to the next I frame, because it belongs to the next GOP.
Something else: Since the decoder is no prophet, the P frames are always transmitted before the B frames! The GOP explained above will be encoded and transmitted in the order it is written. www.magix.com
Original
GOP
I
0
B
01
B
02
P
01
B
11
B
12
P
02
B
21
B
22 I1
MPEG glossary
Data stream
I
0
P
01
B
01
B
02
P
02
B
11
B
12
B
21
B
22 I1
... for closed GOPs
I
0
P
01
B
01
B
02
P
02
B
11
B
12
I
1
B
21 B22
P
11
... For open GOPs
Due to this nested structure, it is easy to see that during direct editing of
MPEG material, complicated computations have to take place! These are made easier using a frame table . A frame table contains a list, where the information of every frame in the data stream is found, identifying the type of frame it is.
Using Movement prediction (view page 363) P and B frames are likewise
reduced.
Quantization scaling
The single pictures in MPEG are saved using a compression method comparable to JPEG with bitmaps and associated with quality loss. For this
single images are divided into 8 x 8 blocks (view page 364).
Each one of these blocks is then transformed into an 8 x 8 matrix (a table with rows and columns) using a DCT (discreet cosinus transformation) mathematical method. Each of these values is produced using all 64 individual pixels of the block, but the values in the matrix are ordered in such a way that the image information is ordered according to its importance.
This matrix will then be multiplied by another matrix, i.e. the quantization matrix . Exactly how and why this matrix must be created is the biggest secret of encoder programmers, since this determines the quality of the whole encoding process. What is known is that the result should contain as many zeros as possible! These zeros correspond to the "unimportant" image elements mentioned and will not be transmitted in the data stream.
Depending on the encoder parameters regarding the target bit rate, fewer or more values of the matrix will be declared unimportant by dividing the quantization matrix by the quantization scaling factor . Since only whole numbers are used, a division can produce a zero is the remainder is discarded.
This factor is also a direct measure of the sought image quality of the MPEG data stream, since the "Q" in "Q" factor stands for quantization and quality. www.magix.com
369
370 Glossary
Glossary
Symbols & Numeric
720p
This is the "small" HD resolution, which is sized at 1280 pixels x 720 pixels.
The "p" stands for "progressive", i.e. full images are always displayed.
A
Aliasing
Aliasing, or alias effects, are mistakes that appear during digital scanning of sounds, videos or images when the sample frequency (in audio editing) or resolution (in video editing) used are too low.
ATN:
This abbreviation stands for "Absolute Track Number". Which is the actual time code of DV and HDV recordings recorded using the helical scan method.
Audio
This is then referred to as "audio" when the sound signal is saved directly as such on the PC. The actual sound is recorded or played back here. audioid audioid is a process used to determine the title and artist name base on musical properties. An Internet connection is required to access the audioid database.
AVCHD
Stands for "Advanced Video Codec Definition". It is an HD format for video cameras which has been developed by Panasonic and SONY. In comparison to the HDV format, a meaningful quality improvement can be seen here.
For the video recording MPEG 4 AVC/H.264, and for audio recording Dolby ®
Digital or Linear PCM are used. The maximum bit rate is 25 Megabits/sec. www.magix.com
Glossary
AVI
The AVI format ( Audio Video Interleaved ) isn't actually a proper video format!
Rather, it is a so-called "container" for which the conventions for transferring audio and video files to the program are only loosely defined. More in this topic
can be found in General notes on AVI videos. (view page 335)
B
Backup disc
Copying of files to a different file storage medium to secure these files is called backing up, or creating a backup.
371
Browser
A browser (also known as web browser, or Internet browser) is a computer program that displays websites. The best-known browsers are Internet
Explorer, Firefox, Safari, and Opera.
Button
Refers to an element of the graphic user interface of a program. The button initiates an action in the program via left mouse click.
Button
Refers to an element of the graphic user interface of a program. The button initiates an action in the program via left mouse click.
C
Cache
Simply stated, this is a temporary folder where frequently accessed files are saved so that they can be quickly launched while you are working.
CC
CC stands for "Connectivity Co-ordination" and describes how the change of a domain name from one provider to another occurs (domain transfer).
Clip level
Signifies the volume level at which the recorded signal is overmodulated, or
"clipped". www.magix.com
372 Glossary
Clipboard
The clipboard is used to temporarily store objects during execution of commands like "copy" and "cut".
Clipboard
The clipboard is used to temporarily store objects during execution of commands like "copy" and "cut".
Compatible
Different devices are compatible with each other if they operate together without any errors occurring.
Context menu
Context menu can be reached by right clicking on a selected object. It offers functions which are available and can be expected in the given context.
Copyright
Protection of intellectual and creative property against unauthorized copying.
Copyright
Protection of intellectual and creative property against unauthorized copying.
CPU
Central processing unit : The name for the main processor of the computer
(CPU). Modern computers have even two or more processors, or one processor with several cores.
Crossfade
Transitions, crossfades. Can be used to fade between objects.
D
Dialog
A dialog opens in a new window and lets the user interact with the program.
This means that the dialog can present information to the user and/or expects to receive input from the user. www.magix.com
Glossary
A dialog can contain various user elements which can be manipulated by a simple mouse click. Keyboard entries are also possible.
Disc project
A "Disc project" includes everything that you want to put on your CD and DVD.
This normally contains one or more movies and includes a menu structure/menu design which allows you to choose a movie later on the CD or
DVD.
Disc types
The disc types determines the format and medium (CD, DVD, Blu-ray disc, etc.) to which the current project will be burned.
DNS
The abbreviation DNS stands for Domain Name Service and refers to a provider of Internet services that registers domain names for customers.
373
Domain
A domain is the website's Internet address. It consists of the name of the
Internet protocol (usually http://), the computer or network name (such as www), the second-level domain (such as magix), and the top level domain (like
.com, .net).
Altogether we have: protocol://networkname.second-level-domain.top-level-domain (such as
"http://www.magix.com").
Domains are allocated by a country's so-called NIC (Network Information
Center). In Germany the DENIC is responsible for the release of domains.
Domain transfer
See CC. If you already have a domain, you can move it from your previous provider to another provider.
Downmix
A method developed for audio technology to turn a Surround Sound recording into a version with fewer channels. Most often (as is the case with MAGIX
Movie Edit Pro MX) this will be a stereo version. www.magix.com
374 Glossary
Drag & drop
Enables files and objects to be moved freely between various applications (or within an application) by dragging the object and letting it drop using the mouse cursor.
F
Fader
Used for visual input of values. Similar to volume control on a mixing board, you can control various parameters by sliding the fader. A very common example for this is the zoom slider that lets you see a picture in more detail.
Field
A half-image, two of which combine to produce a frame (see interlace).
Flip menu
Drop down menus create menus consisting of lists of selectable choices. They look very similar to text input fields, but have a button with a downward-pointing symbol on the right-hand side.
Frame
A frame is a single image from a video sequence which also called a full image.
A PAL video contains 25 frames per second; NTSC contains 29.97 frames.
H
Handles
Handles are the five little rectangles at the edges of selected objects. All curve points can be moved by holding down the left mouse button.
Length handles: Bottom right and bottom left. You can use them to change the length of an object.
Fade handles: Top right and top left. These can be used to softly fade an object in or out.
Volume/Brightness handle: Above-center. You can use it to adjust the volume or the brightness. www.magix.com
Glossary
Hard disk
Storage medium with the largest storage capacity where the operating system(s), programs, and files are saved. A hard disk can be built into the computer, but there are also external hard disks which can be used with different computers via a USB connection (portable drives or external hard disk).
Hard disk drive
Storage medium with the largest storage capacity where the operating system(s), programs, and files are saved. A hard disk can be built into the computer, but there are also external hard disks which can be used with different computers via a USB connection (portable drives or external hard disk).
Hardware
The all-encompassing name for all internal components of a computer. For example hard disk, graphics card, mainboard, etc. External peripheral devices are also considered hardware, i.e. printer, scanner, monitor, etc. The synchronization of single hardware components is coordinated by the software.
HDD
Storage medium with the largest storage capacity where the operating system(s), programs, and files are saved. A hard disk can be built into the computer, but there are also external hard disks which can be used with different computers via a USB connection (portable drives or external hard disk).
HDTV
This acronym stands for " H igh D efinition T ele v ision.
HTTP
Stands for Hyper Text Transfer Protocol and is used for transferring websites onto the Internet (from web server to the browser). For this reason, the abbreviation http:// always comes before the Internet address. This is automatically inserted and does not have to be entered when entering the
Internet address.
375 www.magix.com
376 Glossary
Hyperlink
Hyperlinks (or in short "links") are references to other websites/online documents (or other computer networks). They build the base of the World
Wide Web (WWW) as it is only via these hyperlinks that networking or interlinking between the billions of website out there is actually possible.
I
ID3 tags
ID3 tags contain title information that can be added to a music title. This includes the title, artist, album, as well as the genre, year of release, and other criteria that can help searching through a database. The database is created using this information.
Info: Title information will only be saved for MP3s in the so-called ID3 tags
(Identify an MP3), but other formats offer similar possibilities, like "Vorbis comment" for the OGG Vorbis format, for example.
Image
An image is a representation of a CD, DVD, hard drive, or another storage medium that is saved as a file.
The difference from a copy or backup is that an image contains information about the structure of the original storage medium, and not just individual files.
This enables 01:01 copies of complete storage media to be created.
Caution! Copyright laws forbid copying of commercial CDs/DVDs, and for this reason, this process can be prohibited by copy protection.
IMAP
Stands for Internet Mail Access Protocol and is an advanced procedure used for receiving emails.
Interlace
Describes the creation of a full image from 2 half-images (fields).
In this process, even and odd lines are alternately assigned to one of the two fields. www.magix.com
Glossary
The human eye perceives both of the projected half-images as a single full image, so that despite the slow image repetition rate (25 Hz for PAL, 29.97 for
NTSC) a subjectively fluid image is seen.
377
Intro
"Intro" means the introduction or opening credits of a movie.
J jpx
A format developed by MAGIX which is used for photo editing. It enables free experimentation with effects without altering the original file. The effects settings are also displayed when the photos are opened using a different
MAGIX program.
M
Menu
Menus contain practically all function of a program. They can be opened using a simple mouse click on the corresponding menu. Keyboard shortcuts, if available, are also found at the end of menu entries.
The graphical surface of a CD/DVD will also be represented as a menu.
Menu bar
Almost every program has a menu bar. It can normally be found underneath the title line of the program. A simple mouse click opens a corresponding menu.
MIDI
MIDI files do not contain the actual sounds like audio files, but only the note control information which can be interpreted during playback by the synthesizer chip on the sound card or an external synthesizer.
MMC
MMC stands for MIDI Machine Control and is part of the MIDI protocol.
Transport control and position data is conveyed using MMC. www.magix.com
378 Glossary
Motherboard
This is the centerpiece of hardware components of a computer. All other hardware components like CPU, RAM, hard disk, additional drives, graphics cards, as well as other cards for specialized uses are connected to the motherboard.
Motherboard
This is the centerpiece of hardware components of a computer. All other hardware components like CPU, RAM, hard disk, additional drives, graphics cards, as well as other cards for specialized uses are connected to the motherboard.
Motherboard
This is the centerpiece of hardware components of a computer. All other hardware components like CPU, RAM, hard disk, additional drives, graphics cards, as well as other cards for specialized uses are connected to the motherboard.
MOV
MOV is a video and audio format developed by Apple, which has since become widely used with Windows. QuickTime supports lots of compression technology, which make it possible to optimize audio and video and even graphics for the Internet and multimedia/video applications. Conventional
(hardware) DVD players are not able to play this format.
Movie
In MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX, an arrangement of various objects (videos, photos, text, sound, etc.) is called a movie. A movie file has an "mvm" extension.
MP3
MP3 (actually MPEG-1 layer 3) is currently the most important standard for compressing audio files. www.magix.com
Glossary
MPEG
MPEG is short for "Moving Picture Experts Group" and refers to a committee concerned with the standardization of video and audio data compression as well as container formats.
MS audio
A process developed by Microsoft for compressing audio files with properties similar to those of MP3.
MTC
MTC stands for M IDI T ime C ode and it transmits the exact playback position via MIDI. In this way, programs and devices can be synchronized with each other.
MXV
This is the MAGIX video format for quicker processing with MAGIX products. It offers very low loss of quality, but it cannot be played via conventional DVD players.
N
Noise Sample
Sample of a noise that is to be removed
379
NTSC (USA, Japan)
NTSC stands for " N ational T elevision S ystems C ommittee". This is a US institution that defined the first color carrier system for TV which is now used in most of America and some East Asian countries.
The image repetition rate for NTSC is 29.97 Hz.
Numeric keypad
Also known as the numpad, or the number block. www.magix.com
380
O
Offset
Glossary
With an offset of 60:00:00 (1 hour) you can, for example synchronize a tape whose time code that starts at 1 hour, MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX however, still starts the tape beginning at 0.
OGG VORBIS
This is a new, royalty-free format with similar properties to MP3.
P
PAL (Europe)
P hase A lternating L ine, or PAL , is a process for color transmission for analog
TV that is primarily used in Europe, but also in Australia, South America, and many African and Asian countries.
The image repetition rate for PAL is 25 Hz.
Play marker
The play marker is a red vertical line which moves from left to right during playback. It indicates the current play position.
Playlist
Arrange your songs in playlists from various sources in different formats and in whatever way you like, sometimes updated daily.
Important: Playlists are only links to songs on your hard drive or in your CD drive.
When you add a song to your playlist whose real source is a CD in your computer's drive, the song will no longer be playable when the CD is removed from the drive.
Similarly, when you move a folder on your hard drive, the playlist will no longer be able to play the song, since the link is no longer valid.
For the latter, however, there is a simple solution: If you know where the song has been saved, then you can redefine the path. A corresponding dialog window is provided for this purpose. You can reset the path by navigating through the Explorer folders. The playlist is now correct once again. www.magix.com
Glossary
Plug-in
Plug-ins are additional programs that expand the functionality of the main program. They are inserted into the main program.
POP3
Stands for Post Office Protocol (version 3) and is used in standard email programs for receiving email (for example, Outlook Express). POP3 enables email to be collected by the provider's email server and loaded into your email program.
Project
A "Disc project" includes everything that you want to put on your CD and DVD.
This normally contains one or more movies and includes a menu structure/menu design which allows you to choose a movie later on the CD or
DVD.
Provider
A provider or ISP (Internet Service Provider) offers Internet services like webhosting or domains (DNS). In relation to the MAGIX Website Service,
MAGIX is the provider.
R
RAM (Random Access Memory)
This is a hardware component of a computer. RAM is needed to temporarily save files. This type of storage is erased when the computer is shut down or reset. The larger this storage is, the faster you can work with programs to change and save files.
Ratio:
The aspect ratio is the ratio between the height and width of a rectangle. In practice these are photos, screens or projection screens. This method can also be used to describe the aspect ratio of pixels.
Here are some examples of typical aspect ratios: at home 4:3 , 16:9 (typical for
TV sets), or 16:10 (widescreen flat screens, widescreen notebooks), 3:2 for 35 mm films and photos. In cinemas you mostly find 1.85:1
381 www.magix.com
382 Glossary
Red Book
Specific standards have been established for the different CD types in order to unify their data structure and to make them compatible with the different CD drives. Their names refer to the color of the books where these standards were written.
The term "Red Book" is common language for the Compact Disc Audio
Standard. The requirements listed here have to be observed for industrial CP production. Audio CD players only read CDs created according to the Red
Book format. It is therefore necessary to first convert PC files into this format before writing them onto an audio disc compatible with any audio CD player.
Restore
Restoration of files originating from a backup will be called "Restoring".
RM
RealMedia includes all of the media formats from software developer
RealNetworks. RealMedia especially refers to the "RealVideo" video format and the "RealAudio" sound format. The quality of RealVideo files is comparably good at high compression rates, but does have some loss of quality. These formats cannot be played back by (hardware) DVD players.
S
Scene
Freely definable section of a video in MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX.
In general, a scene is a segment of a film that is a product of various settings and conveys a certain action.
Screenshot
A screenshot is an image composed of all visible screen elements (messages, open dialogs, etc.) at a certain time. By pressing the "Print screen" key on the keyboard, this image is saved into the clipboard. Next, open a program which can edit images and select "Insert" (shortcut "Ctrl+V") in a new document to add the screenshot for editing and saving.
Note: Press "Alt + Print screen" on the keyboard to capture the active window only. www.magix.com
Glossary
Slider
Used for visual input of values. Similar to volume control on a mixing board, you can control various parameters by sliding the fader. A very common example for this is the zoom slider that lets you see a picture in more detail.
SMTP
Stands for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol and enables the exchange of emails across computer networks.
Software
The name for all non-physical functional components of a computer. This primarily includes computer programs and files that are meant to be used by computer programs.
Storyboard mode
The Storyboard mode is the default edit screen view. This view offers an easy, streamlined interface to simplify the editing process. The alternative Timeline mode offers a more detailed interface for more extensive editing and scene arrangements, the scene overview mode offers a complete overview of all scenes on a small scale. You can toggle between the three view modes using the Tab key.
Submenu
Besides normal entries, a menu can contain submenus that offer additional functions. This makes menus more comprehensive.
Super Video CD (SVCD)
The Super Video CD (SVCD) is a technological advancement of the video CD.
SVCDs are also like VCD-specified CD-ROMs which can be played using either a Super Video CD player (connected to the television), or directly with the
CD-ROM drive of a computer. Many DVD players can also play SVCDs.
MPEG-2 and the increase of the data transfer rate makes it hard to tell videos from videos in DVD quality apart.
Resolution: SVCDs use the better MPEG-2 encoder in a standardized resolution of 480 x 576 (PAL). The MPEG-2 format offers a maximum resolution of up to 720 x 576 points and improved compression methods characterized by excellent image definition and homogeneity.
383 www.magix.com
384 Glossary
Hard disk capacity: An average 90-minute movie must be spread across 3
CDs. On one SVCD you can get about 30 minutes of good-quality movie.
Encoder setting: Compared to the VCD with 1.3, the data transfer rate is doubled to 2.6 Mbit/s.
MPEG-2 format introduces the so-called variable bit rate (VBR). In contrast to the constant bit rate (CBR) of the MPEG-1 encoders, this encoder has the option of using more bits for movement-intensive sections, as well as saving bits if picture content remains the same.
T
Toolbar
Here you will find small buttons that provide a function when clicked. For example, you can cut out a selected object by clicking on the scissors.
Toolbar
All basic functions of the corresponding program can be found here. The corresponding functions can be called up via mouse click.
Top-level domain
Top-level domains (TLD) are always those separated by a dot at the end of an
Internet address (for example, "http://www.magix.com" < here, .com is the top-level domain). Among these are also country top-level domains, such as
.co.uk, .us, .de as well as so-called generic top-level domains like .net, .org,
.biz, and so on.
Traffic
Traffic (data transmission) occurs within your MAGIX Website Service as soon as data is transferred across the Internet: for example, when uploading or downloading files to your website or when someone else opens your website.
U
Universal Plug & Play; UPnP
Universal Plug ‘n’ Play (UPnP) is a network protocol which enables data exchange between different devices (PCs, hi-fi systems, video cameras, PDAs, and webservers). UPnP allows various devices to participate in network-wide communication, i.e. the initialization of functions and other device functions.
Long-winded configuring or installing of drivers is not required as the devices www.magix.com
Glossary can handle their own functions and data sources by themselves. Find out more at www.upnp.org.
385
Hint: To work with UPnP you have to activate it first. This can be found under
"Options" ("Y" -> UPnP).
URL
URL stands for Uniform Resource Locator and describes where a source can be found online (for example, a website). The address or the path to the storage location of a file on your computer is known as a URL. Often the term
URL is used as a term for the domain. The URL for the MAGIX website is: http://www.magix.co.uk
V
VirtualDub plug-in
Plug-ins are additional programs that expand the functionality of the main program. They are inserted into the main program.
VirtualDub plug-ins are also referred to "VirtualDub filters" and have the "VDF" file extension. You can use them to apply additional video effects to video objects.
VST and DirectX plug-ins
Plug-ins are additional programs that expand the functionality of the main program. They are inserted into the main program.
Two standards exist for audio editing: VST (Steinberg) and DirectX (Microsoft).
VST has asserted itself stronger in the current market.
W
WAV
Wave (*.WAV) is a standard uncompressed audio format.
Wave
Wave (*.WAV) is a standard uncompressed audio format.
Wave file
Wave (*.WAV) is a standard uncompressed audio format. www.magix.com
386 Glossary
Webhosting
This means that an Internet Service Provider makes domains and webspace available to its customers. With the MAGIX Website Service, MAGIX provides webhosting to its customers.
Webmail
Webmail enables the customer to view and receive the contents of their email inbox without having to install email software on their computer. Customers of the MAGIX Website Service can use MAGIX Webmail for this.
Webmaster
A webmaster is responsible for the administration and maintenance of a website. Often, the webmaster is also the owner of the website as well as the domain that belongs to it. Once you have registered a domain in the MAGIX
Website Service, an email account will automatically be set up, for example:
"mailto:[email protected]".
Webserver
Webserver refers to the computer on which your host saves your website's pages and which makes your pages accessible on the Internet 24-hours a day.
WMA
A process developed by Microsoft for compressing audio files with properties similar to those of MP3.
WMV
Windows Media Video (WMV) is a trademark video codec from Microsoft. If you have Windows installed on your PC, then playing WMV files shouldn't be a problem. Only a few (hardware) DVD players are able to play this format. Read more about this in your DVD player's manual.
This video format is very good for web videos as it allows relatively high compression rates.
World Wide Web (WWW)
WWW stands for "World Wide Web" and is the most used service of the
Internet. On the WWW, web browsers (for example, Internet Explorer) are used to display information via websites. The process is colloquially called "Surfing the Internet". www.magix.com
If you still have questions
If you still have questions
Task assistant
The task assistant is your information center. It helps you complete your tasks and provides support at every step. Not only will you find clear videos with step-by-step instructions, but you'll also find quick access to a lot of functions.
The task assistant chapters can be found in the "Tasks" menu (view page 299).
Tips for program help
The "Help" file features hints on how to use the program and additional information. Many important terms are indicated in the text in italics and an explanation to them is reached by clicking on them.
Context help: Press the "F1" key at any point in the opened program and the help file will open with the matching topic (context help).
Search function: Use the search function to find out information about specific words. Enter either the individual word or use logical operators (OR, AND,
NEAR) to refine your search if you have several search words.
" OR " (between two words): All topics which contain both words or one of the words will be listed.
" AND " (between two words): Only those topics will be listed which contain both words.
" NEAR " (between two words): Only those topics will be listed which contain both words. A maximum of six other words may be added between the search terms.
" NOT " (before a word): Topics which contain this word will not be listed.
Print: Use the help program's print function to make a printout of individual topics or entire sections. The print button is located at the top of the help window in the toolbar.
387 www.magix.com
388 More about MAGIX
More about MAGIX
MAGIX Online World
Everything you need for your website
Easily create your own website with MAGIX website software
Publish your website for free with the MAGIX free web hosting service
Register your domain name of choice for your website at a great price
Discover MAGIX Online World at www.magix-online.com
magix.info
Do you have questions, need help, or are looking for expert tips and tutorial videos on your MAGIX product? At magix.info you will find answers and solutions as well as workshops and a comprehensive user forum for software and multimedia queries.
You can access magix.info online at www.magix.info
MAGIX News Center
The MAGIX News Center features links to current online tutorials and tips & tricks on the software application examples. The "News" is indicated by color according to content:
Green indicates practical tips & tricks for the software
Yellow reports the availability of new patches and updates
Red for special offers, contests and questionnaires
If no new messages are present, the button will appear gray. When the MAGIX
News Center is clicked, all of the available information will be displayed. Click the messages to reach the corresponding website. www.magix.com
More about MAGIX
MAGIX Magazine
The MAGIX Magazine – stay well-informed & keep up-to-date on:
Digital trends
Interesting websites
Useful information about MAGIX products
You can find the MAGIX Magazine at www.magix-magazine.com.
389 www.magix.com
390
Index
Index
3
3D 188
3D morph 136
3D series
3D text
3D transitions
104
121
103
5
5.1 Surround 179
A
Abbreviations 319
Ad markers 113
Adapt length to music
Add music
212, 284
85
Additional effects
Adjust brightness
Analog video recording
Animate effects
140
123, 151, 176
83
143
Animated GIF
Anti-flicker filter
Anti-interlace filter
273
152
154
Arranger 53
Artistic filter 127
Attach to picture position in the video
Audio cleaning
149
159
Audio effects
Audio recording
49, 158
85
Audio track export 181, 272
Automate 179
Automatic scene detection
Automatic volume damping
Automatically cut
201
88
201, 212, 223
AVCHD disc 338 www.magix.com
Index 391
B
Background music
Burn Blu-ray Disc
Burn CD
C
173
Backup copy
Basic view
Batch Capturing
Batch recording
263
105
80
78, 80
Beat detection 215
Blu-ray 338
Border cropping adjustment 154
Bounce 187
30
279
Camera/zoom 133
Chapter markers
Chroma key
Clean-up wizard
41, 110, 245
126
265
Color correction 125
Computer 46
Continue 253
Continue burning 253
Controls 51
Copy 97
Create disc menu 242, 244
Create menus
Create new project
242, 244
35
Curve mouse mode 42
Customer service 10
Customize 54
Cut commercials
Cut trimmer
223
100 www.magix.com
392 Index
D
Database 47
DeClipper 160
Decorate 49
DeHisser 161
Deinterlace 69
DeNoiser 160
Design 212
Design buttons
Design elements
Design page
Digitize VHS tapes
247
49, 138
247
83
DirectX Plug Ins
Disc formats
176
16
Distortion 128
Dolby Surround 179
Dub 85
Ducking 88, 173, 294
DV as MPEG 80
DV-AVI 268
DVD 336
Burn DVD 30, 279
DVD with surround sound179
Import DVD 93, 95
E
Edit
Edit after recording
Effects
Effects curves
Effects masks
Effects settings
21, 33, 93, 281, 322
92
48, 122, 158, 179, 213, 291, 324
145
139
122, 151
Exchange 40
Export audio
Export formats
Export movie
Export video
274
268
268
268 www.magix.com
F
File formats
File import
Film abspielen
Film menu
Film overview
Full screen
G
Index
15, 335
21, 44, 95
21
245
94
94
393
H
H.264 72
Hard drive camera
Help
72
36, 300, 325
I
Image stabilization 150
Import 44
Import Formats 15
Insert date 121
Interlace 64
Interpolation for interlace material 154
J
JPEG export 273
K
Key frames
Keyboard shortcuts
143
319 www.magix.com
394 Index
L
Limiter 173
Load 35, 44, 180, 266
Load CD titles
Load project
155, 274
35, 266
Loading parts of movie files 95
Logging 81
M
MAGIX Online Album
MAGIX Online World
47
388
MAGIX Video CD 269
Magnet 106
Mastering
Mastering Suite
159, 168, 178
168
Media Pool 21, 28, 44
MIDI 174
Mirror 135
Mixdown 187
Mixer
Modes (Storyboard/Timeline/Overview)
41, 167, 176, 182
23, 24, 33, 53
Monitor 94
MotionJPEG-AVI 269
Mouse modes 42, 321
Movement effects
Movie selection
49, 131
37
MP3 272
MPEG-4 271
Multicam mode 114
Multimax 170
Mute 41
My Media 46
N
Navigation 245
News Center 36 www.magix.com
Index 395
O
Object editing
Object grid
Object handles
Object mouse mode
Object trimmer
Online Album
Online Welt
Open files
93
41, 106
98
42
99
47
388
15, 21, 95, 154, 155, 266, 274, 280
Optimize image
Output video
Overview
Overview mode
123, 151, 154
274
94, 105, 298
105
Overwrite 40
P
Panorama 210
Panorama automation 179
Personalized templates
Play
138
21, 24, 51, 319
Playback markers
Polarizing filter
Prelisten mouse mode
108
192
43
Preview rendering 70
Program 236
Program monitor
Program settings
94
36, 60
Programming TV recording
Project markers
237
109
Q
Quick Start
R
Real time
Record sound www.magix.com
18
158
85
396 Index
Recording 71
Redo 37
Remote control
Remove scene
241
39
Resolution 56
Restore normal view 67
Rewrite 253
Rotation 135
Rotation & Mirror
Run of the panorama and volume curve
135
179
RW 253
S
Save 35
Save project 35, 266
Scene recognition
Screen capture
201
90
Screen capturing 90
Scrubbing 185
Search function
Section & zoom
45
132
Serial number
Settings
12
36, 55, 60, 236
Shortcuts 319
Show grid 41, 106
Show text
Shutter mode
48
67, 192
Single frame export
Single-frame recording
270
78, 88
Size 131
Size & position 131
Slideshow Maker
Sound restoration
212
159
Specify TV image 152
Speed 130
Start 18
Starting MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX
Stereo FX
Storyboard Mode
18
163, 172
23
Stretch mouse mode 43
Support 10 www.magix.com
Index 397
Suppress flickering 152
Surround 179
T
Tasks 300
Television 67
The burn dialog
Timeline mode
253
24
Timer 89
Time-shifted TV 240
Title Editor 38
Tools 35
Track effects automation 179, 183
Transitions 48, 102, 212, 272
Transparency 24
Transport functions
Travel route animation
51, 225, 321
203
Trimmer 98
U
Uisng MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX
Uncompressed video
18
269
Undo 37
Use plug-ins 140, 158, 176
V
Video effects
Video Monitor
49, 123
94
View 50, 67, 298, 320
Vimeo 299
Virtual Dub-Plug-ins
Volume automation
Volume reduction
VST plug-ins
140
179
88, 173
176
W
Wave (WAV) 272
Window 296
Windows Media video 270 www.magix.com
398 Index
Workshop 18
Y
YouTube 299
Z www.magix.com
advertisement
Key Features
- Video recording & importing
- Video editing
- Audio editing
- DVD/Blu-ray burning
- Online sharing
Related manuals
Frequently Answers and Questions
What video formats can I import into MAGIX Movie Edit Pro MX?
Can I create professional-looking DVD menus?
What are the supported export formats?
advertisement